ATIKAMEKSHENG FIRST NATION OFFICE COMPLEX...2020/04/29 · Atikameksheng First Nation Office Complex Project No. 18103 Page 3 of 141 Subcontractors: .1 We the undersigned submit a

Page 0 of 141

ATIKAMEKSHENG FIRST NATION OFFICE COMPLEX

A T I K A M E K S H E N G F I R S T N A T I O N , O N T A R I O

ISSUED FOR TENDER + CONSTRUCTION 2020 04 29 project no 18103 ARCHITECTS

STRUCTURAL

A 2 S C O N S U L T I N G E N G I N E E R S . MECHANICAL / ELECTRICAL

S N C L A V A L I N CIVL

E X P

Atikameksheng First Nation Office Complex Project No. 18103

Page 1 of 141

3rdLine.Studio Inc. have prepared the following specification except where noted.

SPECIFICATIONS / DRAWINGS INDEX

Specification Index Page no. Specifications Index 01 Tender Form 02 Division 00 – Procurement + Contracting 07 Supplementary General Conditions 12 Division 01 – General Requirements 22 Division 02 – Existing Conditions 31 Division 05 – Metals 35 Division 06 – Wood, Plastics and Composites 35 Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection 37 Division 08 – Openings 46 Division 09 – Finishes 51 Division 10 – Specialties 63 Division 11 – Equipment 63 Division 13 – Special Construction 63


Page 2 of 141

TENDER FORM To: ATIKAMEKSHENG FIRST NATION

Herein referred to as the "OWNER". The UNDERSIGNED, herein referred to as the "CONTRACTOR" With the legal company name of __________________________________________________________________ A company duly incorporated under the laws of ______________________________________________________ And having its Head Office at ____________________________________________________________________

HEREBY UNDERTAKES AND AGREES WITH THE OWNER AS FOLLOWS:

Having examined the Tender Documents, entitled ATIKAMEKSHENG FIRST NATION, OFFICE COMPLEX, ATIKAMEKSHENG FIRST NATION, ONTARIO including: .1 All Drawings dated: 2020.03.27 .2 Specifications dated: 2020.04.27 .3 Addenda Numbers _______________________________________________________________________

Issued _________________________________________________________________________________ And having visited the site, and having examined and become familiar with conditions affecting the proposed work,

WE UNDERTAKE TO DO WORK, AND SUPPLY MATERIALS AND SERVICES IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TENDER DOCUMENTS, FOR THE CONTRACT PRICE, WHICH EXCLUDES HARMONIZED SALES TAX (HST), OF __________________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________and_________/100 DOLLARS ($____________________________________).

The UNDERSIGNED hereby submits that amounts are in Canadian funds and that these amounts to be subject to adjustments as

provided in the Contract documents. The UNDERSIGNED further submits that costs for supervision, administration, co-ordination, handling, management, expediting,

scheduling, overhead and profit and assuming full responsibility and warranty for the assigned work are included in the Contract Price Tendered.

That the UNDERSIGNED, if notified of proposal acceptance within SIXTY (60) DAYS of Tender Closing Date agrees to enter into a formal Contract with the Owner for the work, in the form of the Canadian Standard Construction Document, CCDC 2-2008, Stipulated Price Contract.

The UNDERSIGNED undertakes to commence the work under the Contract forthwith after execution of the formal Contract and when notified so to do by the Owner and to carry out work without interruption to completion of the Contract.

The UNDERSIGNED declares that the above quoted Contract Price includes the Cash Allowances in the amount of $305,000.00 as indicated in Division 00 - Procurement + Contracting.

The Undersigned agrees to perform work between the hours of 8:00am to 5:00pm unless instructed otherwise by the Owner. The UNDERSIGNED agrees to complete the work within _____ weeks from Contract Award. The UNDERSIGNED agrees to provide a Cash Flow Breakdown with their Tender. The Undersigned submits herewith the Bid Bond and Agreement to Bond for the project. The UNDERSIGNED hereby agrees to submit a completed Appendix A – Sub-Contractor and Major Supplier

List / Cost Breakdown within 1 hour of tender close.


Page 3 of 141

Subcontractors:

.1 We the undersigned submit a list of subcontractors in Appendix A on which the bid is based. No changes to this list shall be made without written permission from the Owner.

.2 We the undersigned submit that we have consulted each of the under mentioned subcontractors and have ascertained to our complete satisfaction that the firms are fully acquainted with the extent and nature of the work involved, and of the requirements of the construction schedule, and that all subcontractors shall execute the work to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and the required schedule.

Fees/Rates/Unit Costs for Changes to Work:

The following composite rates are for all classes of trades and crafts to be employed on this Contract. The unit prices reflect the cost to supply and install all items required for the change to work. The standard rates for labour includes charges for overhead, profit, site supervision, including project superintendent, in directs, insurance, paid holidays, remunerations, small tools and equipment, consumables, appliances and non-mechanical plant. The overtime rate shall be the standard rate plus the actual amount of wage premium paid to the worker and any additional payroll burdens, taxes and insurance. All rates are firm and shall not fluctuate for the duration of this Contract. There shall be no additional charges for overhead and profit.

Item Standard Rate/Hour Overtime Rate/Hour

Foreman

Tradesman

Labourer

Clerical

Separate Prices (All separate prices to exclude HST):

.1 Should all asphalt paving and concrete curbing inclusive of line painting be deleted, deduct;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________and_________/100 DOLLARS ($__________________). From the Contract Price.

.2 Should Office space 139 and 224 become separate Tenant Suites with the following changes to the building:

MECHANICAL: To permit individual metering of each of the tenant spaces we would have to: 1) Put a sub meter on the domestic cold water serving each floor level where it enters the space (1/2” meter). 2) Delete the domestic hot and hot water recirc piping serving the space intended for future connection. Electric hot water

tanks would be provided as part of the tenant fit up package at some point. 3) Remove the perimeter hot water radiation and piping off of the main boiler loop serving the space and install electric

heating in it’s place (10KW per floor level). Electric heat could be added as part of tenant fit up once layout is known. 4) Remove the single 5 ton packaged roof top unit serving the Rental Space (AC-3) along with the VVT system and in it’s

place provide 2 – 2.5 ton packaged roof top units (new AC-3 and AC-4) with similar features each complete with programmable electronic thermostats (one for each floor level).

5) Remove the section of natural gas piping from AC-2 to AC-3. Install new ½” 2 PSI natural gas piping from two new gas meters at grade to both the new AC-3 and AC-4. Provide PRVs assemblies at both to reduce to inch gas.


Page 4 of 141

ELECTRICAL: For the separate metering of electricity, separate rooftop units, and separate metering of gas to the two tenants the following would be required:

1) Provision of a second switchboard cell with two additional 200A meter sockets with fusible disconnects; 2) Provision of 200A feeders from each of these meters to the tenant panels; 3) Provision of a second rooftop unit and ductwork such that each of the two tenant suites are fed from their dedicated

RTU; 4) Provision of dedicated natural gas lines to the new rooftop units with provision for individual metering; 5) Supplying the heat trace in the main floor tenant space from a house panel and not the tenant panel;

add;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


.3 Should the portion of the building between gridlines 6-7, A-c designated as Phase 2 be deleted, and the wall along gridline 6 becomes an exterior wall in its entirety, deduct;

_____________________________________________________________________________________________


Unit costs are to be provided to allow the owner to add or subtract work based on the following:

All unit costs include profit and overhead and shall not fluctuate for the duration of this Contract. If more space is required, please

attach an additional sheet.

Item Unit Cost

Granular ‘A’ back fill

Granular ‘B’ Type ll back fill

Ground Thaw Heating / month

Snow Clearing (plowing, shoveling, snow blowing)/ per occurrence

Heating and hoarding Enclosures


Page 5 of 141

IN WITNESS WHEREOF THE UNDERSIGNED CONTRACTOR HAS HERETO set its Corporate Seal and the hands of its' proper officers in that behalf at

__________________________________________________ (Province),

(City) This ___________________DAY OF___________________ (Month), 20____ (Year).

______________________________________________________ COMPANY NAME ______________________________________________________ ADDRESS, POSTAL CODE, PHONE Corporate Seal (or) ______________________________________________________ ________________________________ SIGNATURE WITNESS ______________________________________________________ PRINTED NAME AND TITLE


Page 6 of 141

APPENDIX A – SUB-CONTRACTOR AND MAJOR SUPPLIER LIST / COST BREAKDOWN Submit a completed hardcopy of this appendix within 1 hour of tender close. The UNDERSIGNED lists herein the individual Sub-contractors and Major Supplier for the trades listed below (provide only one name for each) and who he proposes to employ on the Project, and upon whose sub-trade or supply quotation he has based the Contract Price quoted herein, and agrees that no change shall be made in the list, as regards such Sub-contractor or Supplier actually employed on the Work, except under conditions set out in Section 00 – Procurement + Contracting, in the item entitled ‘Subcontractors’. The UNDERSIGNED lists herein the costs associated with each part of the work as described below. Please note that the cash allowance is included in the summary and that all costs must add up to match the CONTRACT PRICE.

Trade Sub-contractor or Major Supplier Cost

General Conditions inclusive of o/h and profit

Excavation + Backfill

Site Finishes

Foundations

Concrete Slab on Grade

Building Insulation, Air / Vapour Barriers

Exterior Cladding System – prefabricated stone

Exterior Cladding System – prefinished wood siding, soffit,

facia, and trim

Roofing Systems, Eavestrough,

Aluminium Windows, Vestibule Glazing + Doors

Firestopping

Gypsum Board Walls + Ceilings

Acoustic Tile Ceiling Systems

Flooring + Base

Painting + Finishing

Washroom Accessories

Plumbing Systems

HVAC Systems

Electrical Systems

Hardware Allowance

Winter Construction Allowance

Testing Allowance

Hydro One Allowance

Contract Price

Total Amount Payable to the Contractor

Note: ATIKAMEKSHENG FIRST NATION is tax exempt. The successful Bid will be provided with a Tax Exemption Letter. It is the successful Bidders responsibility to coordinate the Tax exemption with their sub-trades.


Page 7 of 141

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT + CONTRACTING

1.0 - GENERAL The Owner is seeking the services of qualified contractors to supply labour, materials and equipment to construct the

ATIKAMEKSHENG FIRST NATION– OFFICE COMPLEX. Atikameksheng First Nation is Tax exempt. The Successful bidder will be provided with a Tax Exemption Letter. The Owner hereby invites you to submit quotations for the construction work as described in the contract documents. Note, because of the Provincial legislation currently in place, regarding Covid 19, on the day this tender was issued, this

building is deemed non-essential construction and therefore, construction cannot commence until such time that the Province or the First Nation, relieves the restrictions currently in place. The hope is that these restrictions will be relaxed by June 2020 and construction can proceed. However, the Owner reserves the right to cancel the tender and/or extend the award date to the full 60 days as per section 10, Tender Validity below. Should conditions for construction not change to allow the building to proceed at a normal construction pace, the Owner may choose to re-tender spring 2021. The intent is not to start construction until a normal construction pace can be achieved to avoid material deliveries and delays extending the construction duration abnormally and thus increasing costs to the project.

2.0 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidders to consult the Contract Documents. Contract Documents to be determined by the Owner:

.1 Agreement between Owner and Contractor - CCDC-2 2008

.2 Definitions

.3 General Conditions of the Contract - CCDC-2 2008

.4 Supplemental General Conditions

.5 Bid Form

.6 Specifications and Drawings

.7 Any addenda issued prior to the close of the bid Bidders must familiarize themselves with the requirements of the contract documents prior to tender submission. No consideration will

be given to a Bidder’s failure to comply with the requirements of the contract documents. Examine the Tender Documents upon receipt thereof, and should you discover any errors, contradictions, or omissions therein,

immediately notify the Consultant so that further instructions in writing may be issued to Bidders before the Tender Closing Date. If there is a conflict within the Contract Documents:

.1 The order of priority of documents, from highest to lowest, to be; .1 The Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor .2 The Definitions .3 Supplementary General Conditions .4 The General Conditions .5 Divisions 00/01 of the Specifications .6 Divisions 02 to 32 of the Specifications .7 Material, Room Finish, Door and Window Schedules .8 The Drawings

.2 Drawings of larger scale to govern over those of smaller scale of the same date.

.3 Dimensions shown on Drawings to govern over dimensions scaled from Drawings.

.4 Later dated documents to govern over earlier documents of the same type.

3.0 - EXAMINATION OF THE SITE Bidders are required to submit their bids upon the following express conditions:

.1 The bidder and trade contractors to examine the bid documents and make personal examination of the site(s) in order to become acquainted with the conditions under which the bidder will be obliged to work.

.2 The bidder to make the investigations necessary to become thoroughly informed regarding facilities for access to the site(s) such as may be required to execute the work.

.3 The bidder to be wholly responsible for the completeness and accuracy of the information obtained by the bidder’s personal examination and study. No plea for ignorance of conditions that exist, or that may exist hereafter, or of conditions, or difficulties that may be encountered in the execution of the work under the resulting contract as a result of failure to make the necessary examinations and investigation, or ascertaining the required information will be accepted as an excuse for any failure or omission on the part of the bidder to fulfill in every detail the requirements of the said contract documents, or will be accepted as a basis for any claims whatsoever for extra compensation, or for an extension of time.


Page 8 of 141

4.0 LOCAL CONTENT CONDITIONS It is a requirement of this Contract and tender submission that a minimum of thirty percent (30%) of the onsite finishing of the

modular, once placed, be allocated for Local Content. In general, the balance should be 10% local labour & 20% local material, however, the Owner reserves the right to evaluate content submitted by each bidder.

Local Content is anything purchased or labour hired or contracted in Atikameksheng. Receipts and/or CV’s may be required to support claims for compliance with Local Content requirements.

The Bidders shall be responsible for determining the availability of Local Content and must negotiate rates for Local Content directly with local contractors and/or suppliers. A list of local contractor and supply business is included herein.

The Bidders are required to submit, on company letterhead, a detailed summary of their proposed use of Local Content at the time of Tender Close. Bidders not accompanied by Local Content summary submission may be declared informal and not accepted.

The successful Modular Builder will be responsible for verifying with the Consultant the use of Local Content identified in their detailed summary in order to receive payment and in accordance with the following conditions: .1 In addition to holdback required by legislation and statutory regulations, a Local Content Holdback shall be retained by the

Owner from each monthly progress claim. The Local Content Holdback amount shall be 10% of the work completed to date minus the Local Content used to date as verified by the Consultant.

.2 When the Local Content Holdback is positive as verified by the Consultant, the Local Content Holdback will be deducted from that month’s progress payment.

.3 When the Local Content Holdback is less than the Local Content actually utilized to date as verified by the Consultant, the Local Content Holdback will equal zero for that month’s progress payment.

.4 By the date of substantial completion of the Contract, any remaining Local Content Holdback amount will be retained by the Owner as unused Local Content amounts.

The percentage identified in paragraph .1 above is the minimum percentage required for the project. All Tenderers are encouraged to utilize Local Content to the fullest extent.

5.0 – QUESTIONS Matters and inquiries relating to the execution of this Contract to be directed to:

.1 Mike Ladyk, t: 705.674.2300 x 422, e: [email protected]

6.0 - COPIES OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Electronic copies (pdf format only) of drawings and specifications will be provided to each bidder.

7.0 - ADDENDA / AMENDMENTS If necessary, written instructions or explanations in the form of Addenda or Amendments will be sent to bidders. Bidders to state on the Tender Form in the space provided, the numbers of Addenda and/or Amendments received and included by

Bidders in the preparation of their Tender.

8.0 – PRE-TENDER SITE MEETING Not Required. However, bidders are encouraged to visit Atikameksheng to familiarize themselves with the location of the site. Note:

any contractor visiting the site must respect the current Provincial legislation concerning social distancing as well as the check pints set in place by the Atikameksheng First Nation.

9.0 - TENDERS All bids to be submitted on the tender form provided by the Architect. The tender form to be provided by the Architect in a ‘pdf’ format

that can be printed by the Contractor on letter sized paper. All bids to be Stipulated Lump Sum in Canadian currency, and to reflect the bidder’s total proposed price for the work including,

without limitation, labour, materials, coordination, management, supervision, expediting, administration of work of the Contract, work of trades and subcontracts, taxes (excluding HST), assessments, levies and custom duties, overhead and profit. Bids to be without qualification and in complete compliance with the Contract Documents.

Emailed ([email protected]) bids shall be accepted. Enclose the Tender Forms in a sealed envelope clearly marked:

ATIKAMEKSHENG FIRST NATION OFFICE COMPLEX and marked with the Bidder’s Company Name, Deliver this hardcopy quotation to the office of either: 3rdLine Studio Inc. 289 Cedar Street, suite 300 Sudbury, On P3B 1M8 Attn: Mike Ladyk No later than 2pm (local time) May 27, 2020

mailto:[email protected]


Page 9 of 141

Bidders finding any discrepancies in, or omissions from the Tender Documents, or having any doubt as to the meaning or intent of any

part thereof, to at once notify the Architect. Neither the Owner, Consultants, nor the Architect will be responsible for verbal instructions. A discrepancy in the contract documents to not limit the obligation of the Bidder to perform the aggregate of work described by the contract documents.

All Tenders will be opened and reviewed privately by the Owner and Architect. It is agreed and understood by each bidder that the Owner and/or the Architect reserve the right to reject any or bids, to waive

informalities or to accept any proposal that is deemed desirable without regard to whether such bid is the low bid. Of particular importance to the Owner and the Architect will be a Bidder’s reputation for quality workmanship and proven ability to perform work on schedule.

Alternate, itemized, separate and unit prices, where required by the Tender Documents, must include, without limitation, taxes (except HST) assessments, levies and custom duties, overhead and profit.

In the case of a Provincial Sales Tax, levy or custom duty revision effective prior to the acceptance of this proposal, it is assumed that Contractors have taken into account any notice of such revision and have included for any such revision in their contract price.

10.0 - TENDER VALIDITY Tenders to remain valid and open for acceptance for a period of SIXTY (60) DAYS from the Tender Closing Date. General Contractors

to ensure that sub-trade and supply quotations are valid for a sufficient length of time to accommodate the above validity period for General Contract Tenders.

11.0 - SUBCONTRACTORS Each bidding Contractor is encouraged to maximize the utilization of qualified local labour and suppliers for the execution of this

project. Each bidding Contractor to list, in the appropriate place in the Tender Form, the name of the individual Subcontractor or major supplier

he proposes to use in the execution of the Contract, and whose sub-trade or supply quotation he has used in compiling the Stipulated Sum quoted in his Tender.

Should the Owner be unable to approve of a Subcontractor recommended by a Tenderer, then another subcontractor may be selected by the Owner, and the Stipulated Sum Tender Figure adjusted accordingly. If no changes are required by the Owner to the list of subcontractors proposed by the Successful Tenderer then those subcontractors named by the successful Tenderer in his subcontractors list to be employed on the work, unless express written approval is received from the Owner for a proposed change.

12.0 - BONDING Bonding; The Contractor to provide the following bonds;

.1 Bid bond; The Contractor to provide a bid bond valued at 10% of the contract value issued by a recognized insurer and to the satisfaction of the Owner. The bid bond to be submitted with the tender form prior to the close of the tender and to be valid for a period of SIXTY (60) DAYS from the tender closing date.

.2 Agreement to bond; The Contractor to provide an ‘agreement to bond’ prepared by a recognized insurer and to the satisfaction of the Owner, that confirms the ability of the Contractor to obtain performance and labour / material bonds required for the project. The agreement to bond to be submitted with the tender form prior to the close of the tender and to be valid for a period of SIXTY (60) DAYS from the tender closing date.

.3 All Bid Bonds submitted, with the exception of the three (3) lowest Bidders, will be returned within ten (10) days of the Tender Closing Date. The Tender Deposits of the three (3) lowest bidders will be retained by the Owner until a formal Contract has been executed with the successful Bidder, and the successful Bidder has furnished any required documents such as Performance and Labour and Material Payment Bonds, and Insurance Certificates, or until the expiry of the time limit for tender validity, whichever is sooner.

.4 If a Bidder whose Bid is accepted by the Owner refuses or fails, within ten (10) days after a Contract is offered for acceptance, to enter in a formal Contract with the Owner for the performance of the Work or to furnish such Performance of Labour / Material Bonds or Insurance Certificates as may be required, and a Contract for the Work is entered into with another bidder for a greater amount, the Bidder is liable to the Owner for the difference between the two bids up to the amount of the Bid Bond and the Owner may forthwith take proceedings under the Bid Bond.

.5 Performance bond; The Contractor to provide a performance bond valued at 50% of the contract value issued by a recognized insurer and to the satisfaction of the Owner.

.6 Labour / material bond; The Contractor to provide a labour and material valued at 50% of the contract value issued by a recognized insurer and to the satisfaction of the Owner.

.7 Performance and Labour / Material Bonds to be made out in favor of the Owner and to be submitted within 10 days of the acceptance of the Tender.

.8 Cost of bonds to be included in the Contract Price.


Page 10 of 141

13.0 - INSURANCES The Owner to provide, maintain and pay for Property and Boiler and Machinery in accordance with the General Conditions of the

Stipulated Price Contract CCDC 2-2008, as amended by the Supplementary General Conditions. The Contractor to provide, maintain and pay for other insurances as specified in the General Conditions of the Stipulated Price

Contract CCDC 2-2008. The Contractor are responsible for paying insurance deductible and uninsured losses as applicable to their operations. The Owner and members of the Consultant Team to be named as additional named insured under the Contractor’s insurance policies.

Each insurance policy to be endorsed to waive rights of subrogation or cross-claim against the Owner and the Consultant. Each policy to state that it cannot be cancelled, lapsed or materially altered without at least thirty (30) days prior written notice to the Owner.

Prior to commencing work on site, the Trade Contractor to submit to Owner / Architect, a letter of good standing from the Workplace Safety & Insurance Board (WSIB), a form 1000, and a current Health and Safety Policy and Procedures document.

14.0 CASH ALLOWANCES Selection of Products:

.1 Provide the following services and/or information: .1 Determining qualified and/or acceptable suppliers. .2 The consultant will assist the contactor in determining qualified and/or acceptable suppliers. .3 Obtain proposals from suppliers and/or sub-contractors. .4 Make appropriate recommendations for consideration of Consultant. .5 Notify Consultant of any effect anticipated by selection of product or supplier under consideration, on construction

schedule and contract sum. .2 On notification of selection, enter into purchase agreement / contract with designated suppliers and/or sub-contractors.

General: .1 All testing and inspection work will be paid for by the Contractor. Refer to the requirements of specification Section 01 45 00,

Quality Control and specific sections in the specifications. .2 The Cash Allowances shall be expended as the Owner directs and only through the Consultant's written instructions. .3 If a test made proves that the material or system is not in accordance with the Documents, then the subsequent testing

including Owner's testing of replacement materials or systems shall be Contractor's expense. .4 Add or deduct any variation in cost from the Cash Allowance. No adjustment will be made to Contractor's expense. .5 Cash Allowances do not include Harmonized Sales Tax (HST) .6 Cash Allowances, unless otherwise specified, cover net cost to Contractor of services, products, construction machinery and

equipment, freight, handling, unloading, storage and other authorized expenses incurred in performing Work. .7 The Contract Price includes the allowance amount listed below including the Contractors overhead and profit. Expenditures

from the cash allowance through the Contractor will be at a cost with no mark-up. Individual subtrade pricing for each allowance item as required will be permitted an allowance for overhead and profit as outlined by the contract.

.8 The cash allowance amount will be decreased on a continuous basis by way of CAD – Cash Allowance Directive, issued by the consultant to confirm cash allowance monies are to be spent by the contractor.

.9 Progress payments on accounts of work authorized under cash allowances shall be included in Consultant’s monthly certificate for payment.

.10 The allowance money as included within the contract can be expended by the consultant as required on any item. Upon total depletion of the allowance amount, any further expenditure will be completed by way of change order, as per CCDC 6.1, 6.2 and 6.3 as required.

.11 Should the entire contingency amount not be spent during the contract, a credit change order shall be issued by the consultant, including an amount of 5% for Contractors overhead and profit.

.12 The contractor shall provide services to call for competitive bids for portions of the work to be paid for by cash allowances, if requested by the Consultant.

Cash Allowances: .1 Include in Contract Price a cash allowance of $305,000.00. .2 Expenditures under allowance will be authorized in accordance with procedures provided in CCDC 2, GC 6.1 Changes CCDC

2, 6.2 Change Order and CCDC 2, 6.3 Change Directive, and item 2.8, above by way of CAD as required and directed by the consultant.

.3 Unused amounts of the cash allowance can be interchanged with other divisions of the cash allowance.

A B C

ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION OF WORK SCHEDULED VALUE

1 Inspection and Testing Services $15,000.00

2 Door Hardware $90,000.00

3 Winter Construction $150,000.00

4 Hydro One Service $50,000.00


Page 11 of 141

15.0 - PERMITS The Building Permit, if required, will be obtained and paid for by the Owner. The Contractor to obtain and pay for other permits required to complete the work of this Contract.

16.0 - ACCEPTANCE PERIOD

The Tender to be valid and subject to acceptance by the Owner for a period of SIXTY (60) DAYS from the date of closing Tenders.

17.0 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE + COMPLETION OF THE WORK Work under this Contract to commence immediately upon receipt of written acceptance of tender and to be continued to completion

without interruption. The completion date assumes that the Owner to award the contract within sixty (60) days of the close of the tender. Should the award of the tender occur after this time frame the completion date with be extended to match the delay in award of the tender.

18.0 - COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK The submission of a Tender constitutes the bidder’s agreement to commence work promptly and to execute the work without

interruption until completion, in accordance with the schedule prepared by Owner. As time is of the essence, the successful Contractor to immediately upon receipt of a letter of acceptance proceed with the preparation

of shop drawings and/or samples and procurement of major component materials and equipment to avoid delay to the work. Work of this contract cannot commence until the Province of Ontario permits non-essential building construction to resume.

19.0 - ASSIGNMENT OF THE CONTRACT The successful bidder to not assign the whole or any part of the resulting contract without the prior written consent of the Owner, which

consent may be withheld by the Owner in its sole discretion or may be given subject to such terms and conditions that the Owner may impose.

20.0 - DISCREPANCIES AND / OR OMISSIONS If the Contractor finds discrepancies in, or omissions from the Drawings, Specifications or other Contract Documents or has any doubt

as to the meaning or intent of any part thereof the Consultant to be notified at once. The Consultant will send written instructions or explanations. Neither the Owner nor the Consultant will be responsible for oral instructions.

21.0 - EXAMINATION Make a careful examination of the site of the project, and investigate and be satisfied as to matters relating to the nature of the work to

be undertaken, as to the means of access and egress thereto and there from, as to the obstacles to be met with, as to the rights and interests which may be interfered with during the construction of the work, as to the extent of the work to be performed and any and matters which are referred to in the Drawings, Specifications and other Contract Documents, or which are necessary for the full and proper understanding of the work and the conditions under which it will be performed. No allowance to be made subsequently in this connection on behalf of the Contractor for any error or negligence on its part. Before commencing the work of any Section, the work of other Sections upon which it may depend, to be carefully examined. Report any defects which might affect the new work in writing to the Consultant. Commencement of new work to imply acceptance of work by other Sections upon which the new work depends. Verify dimensions of prepared work before fabrication of that work which is dependent on the prepared work.

22.0 - EXISTING CONDITIONS Make good surfaces and finishes damaged or disturbed due to Work of this Contract to match existing. Ensure that material used to

repair damage is compatible with existing work. Term "make good" to mean repairing or filling operations performed on existing floors, walls, ceiling or any other exposed surfaces. Perform cutting and patching where applicable as specified herein. It is intended that finished surfaces match and line with existing adjoining surfaces. Restore Site to condition equal to or, if specified elsewhere, to condition better than existing conditions. Restore lands outside of limits of Work which are disturbed due to Work to original condition in addition to complying with requirements of General Conditions of the Contract.


Page 12 of 141

SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS

PART 2. General The General Conditions of the Stipulated Price Contract Canadian Standard Construction Document – CCDC 2 - 2008, Articles GC1

through GC12 inclusive, form part of this Contract. The following Supplementary Conditions modify, change, delete from and/or add to the Articles of Agreement, the Definitions, and the

General Conditions of the Stipulated Price Contract, Standard Construction Document CCDC 2 - 2008. Where any Article, Paragraph or Sub-paragraph in the Agreement and/or General Conditions is supplemented by one of the following

paragraphs, the provisions of such Article, Paragraph or Sub-paragraph to remain in effect and the supplemental provisions to be considered as added thereto.

Where a General Condition or paragraph of the General Conditions of the Stipulated Price Contract is deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the numbering of the remaining General Conditions or paragraphs to remain unchanged, and the numbering of the deleted item will be retained, unused.

Where any article, paragraph, or sub-paragraph in the Agreement and/or General Conditions is amended, voided, or superseded by any of the following paragraphs, the provisions of such article, paragraph, or sub-paragraph not so amended, voided, or superseded to remain in effect.

The term "provide" as used in the Contract Documents, to mean the furnishing of labour, materials, equipment, transportation and other services required, including costs in connection therewith, to complete the Work.

Wherein the word "submit" is used in the Contract Documents, it to be followed by the words "to the Consultant" unless the context provides otherwise. Wherein the words "approved", "designated", "directed", "inspected", "instructed", "permitted", "required", "satisfactory", and "selected" are used in the Contract Documents, they to be followed by the words "by the Consultant" unless the context provides otherwise.

Throughout the Contract Documents, wherein the term "Value Added Taxes" is used, amend to read "Harmonized Sales Tax” (i.e. HST).

Throughout the Contract Documents, wherein the term "Certificate of Total Performance of the Work" is used, amend to read: "Statement of Completion of the Contract", and any other reference to the word "Certificate" then referring to "Certificate of Total Performance" to be amended to read "Statement".

Articles, Definitions, General Conditions, paragraphs, subparagraphs or clauses thereof have been modified in these Supplementary General Conditions as described in this section

PART 3. Modifications to Agreement Between Owner and Contractor

Article A-5 Payment Insert the following values in the blanks of Paragraph 5.1: "ten" AND "10". Unused Add the following Paragraph:

.1 “5.4 The Consultant may withhold or nullify, in whole or in part, any application for payment represented by the Contractor’s estimate or any Certificate for Payment to such extent as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss because of the following: .1 Defective work not remedied. .2 Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probably filing of claims. .3 Failure of contractor to make payment properly to subcontractor or suppliers for materials and/or labour. .4 Reasonable doubt that the contract can be completed, and unpaid claims, charges, liens and encumbrances satisfied,

for balance then unpaid. .5 Damage to the work of another contractor. .6 Erroneous or inflated estimates by the contractor of value of work performed. .7 Unauthorized deviations by contractor from contract documents. .8 Unsatisfactory progress of project work by contractor. .9 Record drawings not current and up-to-date with changes. .10 Incomplete and/or unacceptable lbc/ilbi submissions. .11 Legal costs related to lien action(s). .12 When the above noted grounds are resolved, payments will be made for amounts withheld because of them. No

interest will be paid on payments withheld. The Consultant’s determination as to issuance or withholding of, or amount of payment reflected by Certificates for Payment, to be final and binding, and to not subject the Consultant to any liability whatsoever to the Owner, Contractor, Surety, or any other person.”

Delete Article A-6.1 And Substitute New Article 6.1: 6.1: Notices in Writing between the parties or between them and the Consultant to be considered to have been received by the

addressee on the date of receipt if delivered by hand or by commercial courier or if sent during normal business hours by fax and


Page 13 of 141

addressed as set out below. Such Notices in Writing will be deemed to be received by the addressee on the next business day if sent by fax after normal business hours or if sent by overnight commercial courier. Such Notices in Writing will be deemed to be received by the addressee on the fifth Working Day following the date of mailing, if sent by pre-paid registered post, when addressed as set out below. An address for a party may be changed by Notice in Writing to the other party setting out the new address in accordance with this Article.

PART 4. Modifications to Definitions Add the following:

.1 Submittals .1 Submittals are documents or items required by the Contract Documents to be provided by the Contractor, such as:

.1 Shop Drawings, samples, models, mock-ups to indicate details or characteristics, before the portion of the Work that they represent can be incorporated into the Work; and

.2 As-built drawings and manuals to provide instructions to the operation and maintenance of the Work. Delete Item 24 , "Value Added Taxes" in its entirety and replace with "Harmonized Sales Tax" to read:

.1 "10a. Value Added Taxes to be as levied by the Federal Government and is computed at Thirteen (13) percent of the Contract Price. The payment or collection of which is by the legislation imposing such tax an obligation of the Contractor".

Add new Item 10b: .1 "21. Indirect and Direct Costs

.1 Indirect Costs Indirect costs include but are not limited to such soft cost items as: .1 Head office overhead .2 Off-site supervision (including non-working foremen) .3 Change order preparation, research, negotiation, and associated travel .4 Site supervision (including working foremen)

.2 Direct Costs Direct costs include but are not limited to such hard cost items as: .1 Labour .2 Material .3 Off-site material carrying costs .4 Shipping costs .5 Restocking charges .6 Additional performance and payment bond premiums .7 Temporary protection .8 Temporary heat, light, and power .9 Material re-handling costs .10 Safety equipment, staging, scaffolding, and lights".

MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE STIPULATED PRICE CONTRACT

PART 5. General Provisions

GC 1.1 Contract Documents Unused Add the following items to end of end of sentence 1.1.7.1:

.1 “All other information provided such as appended documents, specifications, reports, etc.” Paragraph 1.1.7.1 is amended by adding new subparagraphs.5, .6, .7, and .8

.1 “In case of discrepancies, noted materials and annotations to take precedence over graphic indications in the Contract Documents.”

.2 “Architectural drawings to have precedence over structural, plumbing, mechanical, electrical and landscape drawings insofar as outlining, determining and interpreting conflicts over the required design intent of architectural layouts and architectural elements of construction. It to be understood that the integrity and installation of the engineered systems are to remain with each of the applicable engineering disciplines.”

.3 “In the case of conflict, other documents to govern over the colour schedule and colour schedule drawings.”

.4 “Addenda to have priority over the documents they refer to or amend and addenda of a later date to have priority over earlier documents of the same type.”

Paragraph 1.1.9 is replaced with the following: .1 “Specifications, Drawings, models, and copies thereof furnished by the Consultant to be the property of the party to whom they

are provided but to not be altered in any manner without the written authorization of the Consultant.” Amend paragraph 1.1.10 to read as follows:


Page 14 of 141

.1 The Contractor will rely on electronic Documents and Specifications made available by the Owner. Paper Copies can be provided to the Contractor at cost."

Add the following paragraphs: .1 The Contractor to be provided with an electronic PDF copy of Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings for

the purpose of assisting in the preparation as-built drawings. A service charge of $750.00 (Seven Hundred and Fifty-Five and xx/100 Dollars) will apply for each/any electronic AUTOCAD drawing file requested. The Contractor is responsible for distribution of files and recovery of costs from subcontractors.

.2 The digital data supplied by the Consultant will be provided to the Contractor as a matter of courtesy and convenience and is in no way to be taken as appurtenant to, associated with, or in placement of the officially signed and sealed contract documents. The data contained will be provided “as is” without warranty of any kind either expressed or implied and to be relied upon as such. Although every care and diligence is taken to ensure the accuracy and correctness of supplied data, any and liabilities for damage, direct or indirect, however caused and resulting in any from the use of the supplied digital data will be the full responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor accepts these conditions upon acceptance of the digital data.

PART 6. Administration of The Contract

GC 2.2 Role of the Consultant Delete paragraph 2.2.4 in its entirety. Add at the end of paragraph 2.2.9. “The Owner and the Contractor to waive any claims against the Consultant arising out of the making of such interpretations and

findings made in accordance with paragraphs 2.2.7., 2.2.8. and 2.2.9” unless such interpretations and findings are the result of negligent actions or willful misconduct.

The consultant’s obligation to make findings on a large claim or large numbers of claims is subject to the terms and conditions of the Owner/Consultant Agreement.

Delete the comma after the word “submittals” and add the words “which are provided” before the words “in accordance” in paragraph 2.2.14.

GC 2.4 Defective Work Add new subparagraphs 2.4.1.1 and 2.4.1.2:

.1 “2.4.1.1 The Contractor to rectify, in a manner acceptable to the Owner and the Consultant, defective work and deficiencies throughout the Work, whether or not they are specifically identified by the Consultant.”

.2 “2.4.1.2 The Contractor to prioritize the correction of any defective work which, in the sole discretion of the Owner, adversely affects the day to day operation of the Owner.”

PART 7. Execution of the Work

GC 3.1 Control of the Work Add the following to Paragraph 3.1.2:

.1 Add the word “schedules” after the word “techniques”

.2 Add new paragraph 3.1.3:

.3 Prior to commencing individual procurement, fabrication and construction activities, the Contractor to verify, at the Place of the Work, relevant measurements and levels necessary for proper and complete fabrication, assembly and installation of the Work and to further carefully compare such field measurements and conditions with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Where dimensions are not included or contradictions exist, or exact locations are not apparent, the Contractor to immediately notify the Consultant in writing and obtain written instructions from the Consultant before proceeding with any part of the affected work.”

GC 3.4 Document Review Delete paragraph 3.4.1 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 3.4.1: The Contractor to review the Contract Documents and to report promptly to the Consultant any error, inconsistency or omission the

Contractor may discover and which may be reasonable determined by comparing the various Drawings and Specification documents. Such review by the Contractor to comply with the standard of care described in paragraph 3.14.1 of the Contract. Except for its obligation to make such review and report the result, the Contractor does not assume any responsibility to the Owner or to the Consultant for the accuracy of the Contract Documents. The Contractor to not be liable for damage or costs resulting from such errors, inconsistencies, or omissions in the Contract Documents, which the Contractor could not reasonably have discovered. If the Contractor does discover any error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents, the Contractor to not proceed with the work affected until the Contractor has received corrected or missing information from the Consultant.”

Notwithstanding the foregoing, inconsistencies and /or omissions to not include lack of reference on Drawings or in Specifications or in the specifications to labour and or products that are required or normally recognized within respective trade practices as being necessary for the complete execution of the Work.


Page 15 of 141

GC 3.5 Construction Schedule Add sentence .4 to paragraph 3.5.1:

.1 “clearly indicate and communicate materials/products procurement and delivery dates paying particular attention to schedule”

GC 3.6 Supervision Add the following paragraphs:

.1 The Owner may, with reasonable cause, at any time during the course of the Work, request the replacement of the supervisor or the representative. Upon receipt of such request, the Contractor will immediately make arrangements to appoint an acceptable replacement. . Costs associated with any removal(s) or replacement(s) of these individuals to be the responsibility of the Contractor.

.2 The Contractor to employ an “Office Representative/Manager of the Work”, in addition to the Superintendent of the Work, for the entire duration of the project. .1 Coordinating, managing and expediting control of the project relating to matters of the project including, but not limited

to authorities having jurisdiction, product suppliers, subtrades, Owner and Consultant etc. .2 Project scheduling and management (i.e. trades, products, etc.) .3 Work with the Site Superintendent of the Work as required to ensure compliance of the Work with the intent of the

Construction Documents including but not limited to projects scheduling, coordination of subtrades, quality control and performance of the Work.

.3 The Site Superintendent of the Work to perform duties and responsibilities at the Place of Work until Total Performance of the Work has been achieved and as issued by the Consultant.

.4 Both the Site Superintendent of the Work and the Office Representative/Manager of the Work to have relevant and verifiable experience with undertaking and completing projects of this nature.

GC 3.7 Subcontractors and Suppliers Revise Paragraph 3.7.2 as follows: After the word “if” in the first line add “when requested at the time of tender and within five (5) working days”. Add the following paragraph 3.7.7:

.1 The contractor to not change subcontractors and/or suppliers and agrees not to do so without the prior written consent of the Owner and the Consultant. The Contractor must substantiate cause for change.

GC 3.8 Labour and Products Add to sentence 3.8.2

.1 Where the Contract Documents permit the use of salvaged materials and /or where those salvaged materials are provided by the Owner it to be the responsibility of the Contractor to be responsible for transportation to the project site, any taxes, handling, on-site storage and protection.

Add new paragraph 3.8.4: .1 The Contractor is responsible for the safe on-site storage of Products and their protection (including Products supplied by the

Owner and other contractors to be installed under the Contract) in such ways as to avoid dangerous conditions or contamination to the Products or other persons or property and in locations at the Place of the Work to the satisfaction of the Owner and the Consultant. The Owner to provide relevant information on the Products to be supplied by the Owner.”

Add new paragraph 3.8.5: .1 The responsibility as to which Subcontractor provides labour, products and services rests solely with the Contractor".

GC 3.10 Shop Drawings Add the words “AND OTHER SUBMITTALS” to the Title after SHOP DRAWINGS to read “SHOP DRAWINGS AND OTHER

SUBMITTALS” Add “and Submittals” after the words “Shop Drawings in paragraphs 3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.10.4, 3.10.7, 3.10.8, 3.10.8.2, 3.10.9, 3.10.10,

3.10.11, and 3.10.12. Delete 3.10.3 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 3.10.3 GC.3.10.3 Prior to the first application for payment, the Contractor and the Consultant to together prepare a schedule of the dates for

submission and return of Shop Drawings and any Submittals. Delete the words “with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay in the performance of the Work” and replace with “within 10

working days for Architectural and Structural Trades and 15 working days for Mechanical and Electrical Trades or such longer period as may be reasonably required” in paragraph 3.10.12.

Add the following paragraphs to GC- 3.10: .1 The contractor acknowledges its responsibilities to submit complete shop drawings and other submittals. Incomplete submittals

will be returned to the contractor unreviewed and will be not be deemed a bona fide submittal. No time extensions or cost increases will be allowed for delays caused by return of incomplete submittals.


Page 16 of 141

.2 The contractor to submit shop drawings and other submittals for each and every component of the Work as a requirement of completing the Work and for verification and audit purposes as stipulated in the Contract Documents.

.3 The Contractor to not provide any of the Products nor include those products in the Work without reviewed shop drawings and other submittals. The Contractor will be totally responsible for rectifying and correcting the Work as required including assuming responsibility for related costs should Products or the Work occur without approved Shop Drawings and Submittals.

.4 The Consultant’s review will not include review of dimensions, quantities, calculations, weights, fabrication processes, construction means or methods, the coordination of trades, or safety factors relating to the construction for which the Contractor has the sole responsibility in connection therewith.

.5 Should any errors in dimensions, or interference with other work be noted by the Consultant in his review of the shop drawings, the attention of the Contractor will be called to them, but review of shop drawings by the Consultant to not in any was whatsoever relieve the Contractor from responsibilities required for the preparation and submission of shop drawings.

.6 Only shop drawings indicated as ‘Reviewed’, ‘Reviewed for General Design’, Reviewed as Noted’ or ‘Reviewed as Modified’ and bearing the Consultant’s review date and initials, to be used at the Place of the work or for the manufacture of fabrication of Products.

.7 The review of shop drawings, by the Consultant, does not authorize a change in the Contract Price or Contract Time.

GC 3.11 Use of the Work Add the following new paragraphs:

.1 The Owner to have the right to enter and occupy the Work in whole or in part prior to Total Performance of the Contract if in the opinion of the Consultant this does not interfere with the Work or the Schedule. And, any entry or occupancy by the Owner to not be considered acceptance of the Work or relieving the Contractor of Contract obligations to completing the Work or to provide and maintain the specified warranties.

.2 The Owner to have the right to occupy the Work as described elsewhere in this Contract.

.3 The Owner and the Contractor to cooperate together where occupancy may be required prior to Total Performance of the Contract.

GC 3.14 Performance by Contractor Add new General Condition 3.14.1

.1 In performing its services and obligations under the Contract, the Contractor to exercise a standard of care, skill and diligence that would normally be provided by an experienced and prudent contractor supplying similar services for similar projects. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that throughout the Contract, the Contractor’s obligations, duties and responsibilities to be interpreted in accordance with this standard. The Contractor to exercise the same standard of due care and diligence in respect of any Products, personnel, or procedures which it may recommend to the Owner.

Add new General Condition 3.14.2 .1 The Contractor further represents, covenants and warrants to the Owner that:

.1 The personnel it assigns to the Project are appropriately experienced;

.2 It has a sufficient staff of qualified and competent personnel to replace its designated supervisor and project manager, subject to the Owner’s approval, in the event of death, incapacity, removal or resignation.

PART 8. Allowances

GC 4.1 Cash Allowance Delete paragraph 4.1.4 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 4.1.4:

.1 Where costs under a cash allowance exceed the amount of the allowance, unexpended amounts from other cash allowances to be reallocated at the Consultant’s direction to cover the shortfall.

Delete paragraph 4.1.5 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 4.1.5: .1 The net amount of any unexpended cash allowances, after providing for any reallocations as contemplated in paragraph 4.1.4,

to be deducted from the Contract Price by Change Order without any adjustment for the Contractor’s overhead and profit on such amounts(s).

Delete paragraph 4.1.7 in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 4.1.7: .1 At the commencement of the Work, the Contractor to prepare for the review and acceptance of the Owner and the Consultant,

a schedule indicating the times, within the construction schedule referred to in GC 3.5, that items called for under cash allowances and items that are specified to be Owner purchased and Contractor installed or hooked up are required at the site to avoid delaying the progress of the Work.

Add new paragraph 4.1.8: .1 The Owner reserves the right to call, or to have the Contractor call, for competitive bids for portions of the Work, to be paid for

from cash allowances.


Page 17 of 141

PART 9. Payment

GC 5.2 Applications for Progress Payment Add the following to sentence 5.2.5:

.1 “The Consultant and Owner will determine the acceptance of the breakdown submitted. The Contractor will revise as directed”. Add the following new paragraph:

.1 The second and subsequent applications for payment including application for release of holdback to be accompanied by: .1 Statutory Declaration, required by the Contract Documents executed by the Contractor, in the form prescribed by the

Consultant, declaring that accounts for labour, subcontracts, products, construction machinery and equipment and other indebtedness which may have been incurred by the Contractor in the performance of the work for which the Owner might in any way be held responsible have been paid in full except holdback monies properly retained.”

.2 any other documents required by the Contract Documents

.3 The second and subsequent applications for payment, including application for release of holdback, to be accompanied by a Workplace Safety and Insurance Board (WSIB) Clearance Certificate and a Statutory Declaration. The Statutory Declaration to be executed by the Contractor, in the form prescribed by the Consultant, declaring that accounts for labour, subcontracts, products, construction machinery and equipment and other indebtedness, which may have been incurred by the Contractor in the performance of the work, and for which the Owner might in any way be held responsible, have been paid in full except holdback monies properly retained.

Add the following new paragraph: .1 Payment at the end of each month is subject to submission of the following Prerequisite documentation. Furthermore, payment

will only be made upon receipt of complete information: .1 Regarding Mitigation Measure/Requirements: Written Proof and documentation that mitigation measures/requirements

have been met on an item by item basis. .2 Each payment and Final payment are subject to receipt of required documentation. .3 A proper Invoice has been received;

GC 5.3 Progress Payment Delete the word “calendar” and substitute the word “business” in sentence 5.3.1.2: Delete the word “calendar” and substitute the word “business” in sentence 5.3.1.3: Delete the last two hyphenated sentences and insert “after receipt by the Owner of the Application for Payment from the Consultant.

GC 5.4 Substantial Performance of Work Add the following paragraph:

.1 Procedures upon application by the Contractor for Certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, and for statement of Completion of the contract, respectively, to be in accordance with OAA/OGCA Document No. 100, November 1983, Take over Procedures." Note: Latest Amendments, not yet release, take precidents.

Add the following paragraph: .1 In addition to the requirements of applicable lien legislation, a condition precedent to Substantial Performance of the Work to

include submission to the Consultant of the following materials and documentations: .1 Submission of warranties, operating and maintenance manuals, shop drawings and as-built records in acceptable

manner; .2 Systems demonstrations and instruction of Owner in the operation of systems; .3 Receipt and submission of the OBC and Municipal Occupancy Permits; .4 receipt and submission of sprinkler system approval from Insurance Advisory Organization; .5 Submission to and acceptance by the Consultant of interim accounts of the Work showing additions and deletions to

the Contract Price; .6 Receipt and submission of elevator inspection and approval by governing authorities; .7 Verification reports confirming systems and equipment started up and tested, except for final balancing; .8 Verification reports confirming life safety systems verified by Contractor as complying with the requirements of the

Contract Documents; .9 Inspection reports from local fire authority confirming that life safety systems installed are acceptable; .10 Submission of spare parts and maintenance materials

.2 The Contractor to co-operate with the Consultant and Owner in establishing a Deficiency List before Substantial Performance of the Work. The Contractor to complete the Work noted on the Deficiency List expeditiously and at the discretion and convenience of the Owner. If more than one (1) inspection is required to review deficiency completion each subsequent site visit will be charged at $500.00 per visit per consultant required to attend the visit.

.3 Acceptance of the Work by the Owner does not relieve that Contractor from correcting deficiencies that are missed at the time of preparing the deficiency list, or hidden deficiencies, which become apparent during warranty period.


Page 18 of 141

.4 The publication by the Contractor of the Certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work to constitute a waiver by the Contractor, whether for a change in the Contract Price, extension of Contract Time or otherwise, except those made in writing, prior to the Contractor’s application for payment upon Substantial Performance of the Work, and still unsettled.

GC 5.5 Payment of Holdback upon Substantial Completion of the Work Add the following clauses to Paragraph 5.5.1:

.1 Submit a written request for release of holdback including a declaration that no written notices of lien have been received

.2 Submit a statutory declaration

.3 Submit a workplace and insurance board certificate of clearance

.4 Submit written confirmation from the bonding company that it has been notified of the intent to claim release of holdback money

Delete paragraph 5.5.3 in its entirety. Add the following Paragraph:

.1 If a lien is registered by a Subcontractor, supplier, labourer, or mechanic, the Contractor to reimburse the Owner for damages and costs which may result from such action, and the Contractor to pay for legal costs incurred in the removing of such lien.”

GC 5.7 Final Payment Add the following to Paragraph 5.7.1:

.1 "5.7.1 (cont'd) The Contract to be deemed to be completed when the price of completion or correction of known defects is not more than the lesser of .1 one percent (1%) of the contract price; and .2 $1,000.00."

Amend paragraph 5.7.4 to read as follows: .1 Subject to the provision of paragraph 10.4.1 of GC 10.4 - WORKERS' COMPENSATION, and any lien legislation applicable to

the Place of the Work, the Owner to, no later than (20) calendar days after the issuance of a final certificate for payment, pay the Contractor as provided in Article A-5 of the Agreement - PAYMENT."

PART 10.Changes in the Work

GC 6.2 Change Order Add the following paragraphs: The value of a change to be determined in one or more of the following methods:

.1 By estimate and acceptance in a lump sum substantiated by an itemized cost breakdown satisfactory to the consultant with the applicable overhead and profit percentage fees applied.;

.2 By unit prices set out in the contract or subsequently agreed upon;

.3 By cost and a fixed or percentage fee. In the case of changes in the Work to be paid for under methods (.1) and (.3) of paragraph 6.2.3, the Contractor and Subcontractor,

respectively, may add to the reasonable net cost of additional work a fee, or mark-up, inclusive of overhead and profit, limited to the following:

.1 The Subcontractor may add to the total net cost of labour and materials, a fee, or mark-up, equal to ten percent (10%) of such cost for Work done by the Subcontractor.

.2 The Contractor may add to the net cost of additional work by a Subcontractor, a fee, or mark-up, equal to ten percent (10%) of the total sum quoted by such Subcontractor.

.3 The Contractor may add to the total net cost of labour and materials of additional work to be carried out by his own forces a fee, or mark-up equal to fifteen percent (15%) of such cost.

.4 In the event that owner-initiated changes in the Work result in delays to the completion of the Project, the Contractor and/or the Subcontractor(s) who are executing the Work to each be allowed an additional one (1%) percent of the cost of the changes as compensation in full for the delay.

.5 For Owner requested substitution of building material(s) and/or building component(s) with no additional labour content by the Contractor, a total mark-up of five (5%) percent to be allowed on such changes regardless of the value of the change

.6 For Owner requested substitution of building material(s) and/or building component(s) with no additional labour content by Subcontractor(s), the Subcontractor(s) to be allowed a total mark-up of five (5%) percent and the Contractor to be allowed an additional total mark-up of five (5%) percent regardless of the value of the change.

.7 Such fee or mark-up, by Contractor and Sub-contractor respectively, to be based on net additional cost for any one change in the Work, such net additional cost being derived by deducting credits for labour and materials involved in deleted work from the cost of labour and materials involved in additional work. When quantities of the same product or material are changed in the same Change in the Work, the change in the Contract Price to be based on the net difference in quantity between the product or material deleted and the same product or material added. The procedure


Page 19 of 141

of crediting deleted material at a certain unit cost and then charging the aggregate quantity of the same material at a higher unit cost will not be accepted.

.8 The Consultant alone to determine the scope of change

.9 Consideration for Unusual Changes: unusual and/or peculiar changes requiring consideration to be reviewed on an individual basis. The consultant alone to determine what constitutes an unusual and/or peculiar change.

.10 Changes for Cause and/or Changes for Convenience: The Contractor and sub-contractors must demonstrate, by way of their submissions that any/all products and/or substitutions are made as substitutions for ‘cause’ in support of the intent of the contract documents.

.11 Changes and/or Substitutions deemed ‘for convenience’ will not be considered and allowed. The Consultant alone will determine the acceptance of a change or Substitution.

In the case of a Change in the Work to be paid for under method (.2) of Paragraph 6.2.3, involving a class of work for which a unit price was required to be quoted in the Tender proposal, the cost to be paid for such class of work, derived by deducting quantity of deleted work involved in such change from the quantity of additional work involved in such change, multiplied by the applicable unit prices quoted.

'Overhead' to include any additional charges and/or premiums for Permits, Bonds, Insurance, Site Supervision, Office Administration and the like, which may result from Changes in the Work, whether calculated on the basis of quoted Unit Prices, or on the basis of Cost-Plus Fee or Mark-up."

Except where Unit Prices have been quoted, the value of a change in the Work to be determined by method (3) of Paragraph 6.2.3. Where the additional cost of a change in the Work has been quoted by the Contractor and accepted by the Owner in the form of a

lump sum as evidenced by the issuance of a Change Order, such quoted cost to be deemed to have included costs, including any costs for delay of work, which are or may be occasioned by such change. No later claims for additional costs will be considered.

The Contractor’s fee, or mark-up, inclusive of overhead and profit, is understood to include, without limitation, the following: .1 The Contractor’s head office and administration expenses, associated travelling / .2 Accommodation / meals costs, financing costs including holdback, bonding and insurance costs; .3 All supervision, co-ordination, administration, margin and risk of undertaking within stipulated a mount; .4 The salaries of superintendents, project managers, engineers, timekeepers, accountants, .5 Clerks, and other Site supervision staff above foreperson level employed directly on the Work; .6 The Contractor’s mark-up and profit; .7 Use of temporary offices, sheds and other general temporary Site support facilities and utilities used therein; .8 Miscellaneous additional costs related to:

.1 Licenses, building permit and statutory fees, except when these are

.2 Special for a particular item of Work;

.3 Purchase of rental material, plant and equipment;

.4 Purchase of small tools and supplies;

GC 6.3 Change Directive Delete Paragraph 6.3.11 in its entirety.

GC 6.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions Add new subparagraph 6.4.5:

.1 The Contractor confirms that, prior to bidding the Project, it carefully investigated the Place of the Work and applied to that investigation the degree of care and skill described in paragraph 3.14.1, The Contractor is not entitled to compensation or to an extension of the Contract Time for conditions which could reasonably have been ascertained by the Contractor by such careful investigation undertaken prior to the submission of the bid.

GC 6.5 Delays Delete the period at the end of paragraph 6.5.1, and substitute the following words: but excluding any consequential, indirect or special

damages.” Paragraph 6.5.2 to be amended by deleting the period at the end of the paragraph and adding: “but excluding any consequential,

indirect or special damages.” Add new subparagraph 6.5.6.

.1 If the Contractor is delayed in the performance of the Work by an actor omission of the Contractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed or engaged by the Contractor, or by any cause within the Contractor’s control, then the Contract Time to be extended for such reasonable time as the Consultant may decide in consultation with the Contractor. The Owner to be reimbursed by the Contractor for reasonable costs incurred by the Owner as the result of such delay, including, but not limited to, the cost of additional services required by the Owner from the Consultant or any sub consultants, project managers, or others employed or engaged by the Owner. And, in particular, the cost of the Consultant’s services during the period between the date of Substantial Performance of the Work stated in Article A-1 herein as the same may be extended through the provisions of these General Conditions and any later, actual date of Substantial Performance of the Work achieved by the Contractor directly or indirectly, or by stop work order or by a court or public authority as the result or an act of the contractor,


Page 20 of 141

or by unusual delay by common carriers or unavoidable casualties or, without limit to any of the forgoing, by any cause within the Contractor’s control.”

GC 6.6 Claims for Change in Contract Price Add the words “as noted in paragraph 6.6.3” after the words “of the claim” in paragraph 6.6.5 and add the words “and the Consultant”,

at the end of paragraph 6.6.5.

PART 11.Dispute Resolution

GC 8.1 Authority of the Consultant Amend paragraph 8.1.1 to read as follows:

.1 Differences between the parties to the Contract as to the interpretation, application or administration of this Contract or any failure to agree where agreement between the parties is called for, herein collectively called disputes, which are not resolved in the first instance by findings of the consultant as provided in GC 2.2 - Role of the Consultant, paragraphs 2.2.6 and 2.2.7, to be settled in accordance with the requirements of Part 8 of the General Conditions - DISPUTE RESOLUTION."

Amend paragraph 8.1.2 to read as follows. .1 A party to be conclusively deemed to have accepted a finding of the Consultant under GC 2.2 - ROLE OF THE CONSULTANT

and to have expressly waived and released the other party from any claims in respect of the particular matter dealt with in that finding unless, within 15 Working Days after receipt of that finding, the party sends a notice in writing of dispute to the other party and to the Consultant, which contains the particulars of the matter in dispute and the relevant provisions of the contract documents. The responding party to send a notice in writing of reply to the dispute within 10 Working Days after receipt of the notice of dispute setting out particular of this response and any relevant provisions of the Contract Documents."

Add the following paragraphs: .1 It is agreed that no act by either party to be construed as a renunciation or waiver of their rights or recourses, provided they

have given the notices in accordance with paragraph 8.1.2 and have carried out the instructions as provided in paragraph 8.1.3."

.2 If the dispute is not resolved in the first instance by the decision of the Consultant, then either party may submit the dispute to such judicial tribunal as the circumstances may require."

.3 In recognition of the obligation by the Contractor to perform the disputed work as provided in paragraph 8.1.3, it is agreed that settlement of dispute proceedings may be commenced immediately following the dispute in accordance with the aforegoing settlement of dispute procedures."

GC 8.2 Negotiation, Mediation and Arbitration Add the following new paragraphs 8.2.9, 8.2.10, 8.2.11, 8.2.12., 8.2.13., and 8.2.14.

.1 Within five days of receipt of the notice of arbitration by the responding party under paragraph 8.2.6, the Owner and the Contractor to give the Consultant a written notice containing: .1 A copy of the notice of arbitration .2 A copy of supplementary conditions 8.2.9 to 8.2.14 of this Contract, and; .3 Any claims or issues which the Contractor or the Owner, as the case may be, wishes to raise in relation to the

Consultant arising out of the issues in dispute in the arbitration .2 The Owner and the Contractor agree that the Consultant may elect, within ten days of receipt of the notice under paragraph

8.2.9, to become a full party to the arbitration under paragraph 8.2.6 if the Consultant: .1 Has a vested or contingent financial interest in the outcome of the arbitration; .2 Gives the notice of election to the Owner and the Contractor before the arbitrator is appointed; .3 Agrees to be a party to the arbitration within the meaning of the rules referred to in paragraph 8.2.6, and, .4 Agrees to be bound by the arbitral award made in the arbitration.

.3 If an election is made under paragraph 8.2.10, the Consultant may participate in the appointment of the arbitrator and, notwithstanding the rules referred to in paragraph 8.2.6, the time period for reaching agreement on the appointment of the arbitrator to begin to run from the date the respondent receives a copy of the notice of arbitration.

.4 The arbitrator in the arbitration in which the Consultant has elected under paragraph 8.2.10 to become a full party may: .1 On application of the Owner or the Contractor, determine whether the Consultant has satisfied the requirements of

paragraph 8.2.10, and; .2 Make any procedural order considered necessary to facilitate the addition of the Consultant as a party to the

arbitration. .5 The provisions of paragraph 8.2.9 to apply mutatis mutandis to written notice to be given by the Consultant to any sub-

consultant; .6 In the event of notice of arbitration given by the Consultant to a sub-consultant, the sub-consultant is not entitled to any

election with respect to the proceeding as outlined in 8.2.10, and is deemed to be bound by the arbitration proceeding.


Page 21 of 141

PART 12.Protection of Persons and Property

GC 9.1 Protection of Work and Property Delete subparagraph 9.1.1.1 in its entirety and substitute new subparagraph 9.1.1.1:

.1 Errors in the Contract Documents which the Contractor could not have discovered applying the standard of care described in paragraph 3.14.1;

Delete paragraph 9.1.2 in its entirety and substitute the following new paragraph 9.1.2: .1 Before commencing any Work, the Contractor to determine the locations of underground utilities and structures indicated in the

Contract Documents, or that are discoverable by applying to an inspection of the Place of the Work the degree of care and skill described in paragraph 3.14.1.

GC 9.2 Toxic and Hazardous Substances Add the word ‘designated’ to the words “toxic “and “hazardous” in this General Condition Add the following sentence to paragraph 9.2.1:

.1 Designated substances to be as defined by applicable legislation and the Occupational Health and Safety Act. Add to paragraph 9.2.6 after the word "responsible”, the following new words:

.1 “Or whether any toxic or hazardous substances or materials already at the Place of the Work (and which were then harmless or stored, contained or otherwise dealt with in accordance with legal and regulatory requirements) were dealt with by the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible in a manner which does not comply with legal and regulatory requirements, or which threatens human health and safety or the environment, or material damage to the property of the Owner or others, “

Subparagraph 9.2.7.4 is deleted. Add to paragraph 9.2.8 after the word "responsible”, the following new words:

.1 “or that any toxic or hazardous substances or materials already at the Place of the Work (and which were then harmless or stored, contained or otherwise dealt with in accordance with legal and regulatory requirements) were dealt with by the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible in a manner which does not comply with legal and regulatory requirements, or which threatens human health and safety or the environment, or material damage to the property of the Owner or others,”

Add the following to subparagraph 9.2.8.4 : .1 Add “and the Consultant” after the word “Owner”

GC 9.5 Mould Add the following to Subparagraph 9.5.2.4:

.1 Add “and the Consultant” after the word “Owner” Delete Subparagraph 9.5.3.4.

PART 13.Governing Regulations

GC 10.2 Laws, Notices, Permits, and Fees Delete from the first line of paragraph 10.2.5 the word, “The” and substitute the words:

.1 “Subject to paragraph 3.14.1, the”.

PART 14.Insurance and Contract Security

GC 11.1 Insurance Delete paragraph 11.1.1.3; ‘aircraft and watercraft liability’ insurance is not required for the project. Refer to paragraph 11.1.1.5; ‘boiler and machinery’ insurance will be provided by the Owner. Paragraph 2 of CCDC 41 – CCDC Insurance Requirements to be amended by replacing the amount of $5,000,000 with the amount of

$2,000,000 for the automobile liability insurance.

PART 15.Indemnification, Waiver of Claims and Warranty

GC 12.1 INDEMNIFICATION Paragraphs 12.1.1, 12.1.2, and 12.1.3 of the General Conditions are deleted and replaced with the following:

.1 The Contractor to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, its officers, elected and non-elected officials, partners, agents and employees from and against actions, claims, demands, losses, costs, damages, suits or proceedings whatsoever which may be brought against or made upon the Owner and against loss, liability, judgments, claims, suits, demands or expenses, including interest and legal costs, which the Owner may sustain, suffer or be put to resulting from or arising out of the Contractor’s failure to exercise reasonable care, skill or diligence or omissions in the performance or rendering of any work or service required hereunder to be performed or rendered by the Contractor, its agents, officials and employees.


Page 22 of 141

GC 12.3 WARRANTY Delete from the first line of paragraph 12.3.2 the word, “The” and substitute the words: "Subject to paragraph 3.14.1, the…” Add the following Paragraphs:

.1 Faulty materials or workmanship to include but not be limited to shrinkage, expansion and movement. Make good deficiencies outstanding within thirty (30) days from the end of warranty period.

.2 The Contractor or Subcontractor responsible to also bear costs involved in removing or replacing adjacent affected materials, including owners’ Goods and equipment, that may be disturbed and which to be required in the complete restoration of the original finish.

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 00 00 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Division One Requirements:

.1 The provisions of sections of division one to apply to each section of the Specifications, including those of Divisions 21 to 27. Sleeving:

.1 Assess requirements for sleeving the structural elements for passing of pipes, conduits and other mechanical or electrical components, and include work required for approved interfacing between the structure, mechanical and electrical work, and other components of the work. Confirm and coordinate sleeving locations with mechanical and electrical trades as required during the construction of the work.

Concealing of Mechanical and Electrical Components: .1 Include work required to modify indicated location of pipes, ducts, conduits, and other mechanical or electrical components to

fully conceal such components from view in finished spaces, except where indicated otherwise. Drainage:

.1 Ensure that positive drainage is provided to roof, floor, site drains and catch basins, as set in their final positions, and at other locations to prevent water infiltration into the building. Provide constant slopes for drained surfaces to drains and drainage courses.

.2 Verify the extent of each area served by a drain, or drainage course, to eliminate possible undrained surfaces. Co-ordinate the work of involved Subcontractors before each of their work proceeds.

.3 If water is found to be ponding on roof areas due to improperly placed drains, install additional drains to alleviate water ponding at no cost to the Owner. If extra drains are required co-ordinate the location of rainwater leaders with the Consultant.

Documents at Job Site: .1 Maintain at job site, one copy each of the following and make same available to the Consultant upon request:

.1 Contract drawings.

.2 Specifications.

.3 Addenda.

.4 Reviewed shop drawings.

.5 Architectural Bulletins

.6 Change Orders.

.7 Other modifications to Contract.

.8 Field test reports.

.9 Copy of approved work schedule.

.10 Manufacturer's installation and application instructions.

.11 Ontario Building Code and Guide to the Ontario Building Code, 2012 edition. Cutting and Patching:

.1 Do not cut, drill or sleeve load-bearing members without obtaining Consultant’s written approval for each condition.

.2 Schedule and coordinate Work to minimize cutting and patching. Cut and patch as required to make work fit. Use workers qualified in work being cut and patched to ensure that it is correctly done.

.3 Cut, patch and make good to accommodate Work and to leave Work in finished condition. Cutting in this sense to mean actual cutting of components to allow new components to pass through or to provide new openings. Cutting to not mean mere drilling of holes to accommodate screws, anchors, bolts or other fasteners as such. Such drilling is part of Section's installation function.

.4 Use workers qualified in work being cut and patched to ensure that it is correctly done.

.5 Make cuts with clean, true, smooth edges to tolerances required and in conformance with industry practice for applicable class of work. Make patches undetectable in finished work.

Cold Weather Construction: .1 Work of this Contract to be carried forward to completion with possible speed for the full twelve (12) months of every year and

to commence when the Contract is awarded. .2 The Contractor to be deemed to have included in his pricing ample funds for the provision of necessary temporary heating,

temporary enclosures and other cold weather measures during cold weather construction period from September 15th of each year to May 31st of the following year.


Page 23 of 141

.3 Provide labour, plant, equipment and services to provide and maintain adequate heat for work of trades within the building. The use of open fires or salamanders is not permitted. Temperatures attained to not be injurious to materials or finishes of any trade.

.4 During cold weather periods, maintain the ambient air temperature at working areas at or above 5° Celsius for trades requiring above freezing temperatures to ensure specified quality of work and workmanship. Erect and maintain temporary enclosures as required.

.5 The use of the permanent heating plant for temporary heat in areas of the building not occupied by the public will not be permitted unless authorized by the Consultant in writing and then only under conditions set out in the mechanical sections of these Specifications and in a manner which guarantees and warrantees on equipment will not be affected.

.6 Maintain adequate venting, ventilation and humidity to ensure proper curing of materials, safeguard finishes and to prevent build-up of combustion gases within enclosures.

.7 In cold weather, the Contractor to provide ambient minimum protection as follows:

Labels and Nameplates: .1 Do not install permanent or permanently attached labels, trademarks, and nameplates in visible locations on materials and

components, unless required for operating instructions or by Jurisdictional Authorities. Work of Other Consultants:

.1 Refer also to the work of other consultants included in this package and / or retained by the Owner. Coordinate requirements defined by others as required.

Air Leakage and Expansion Control: .1 Recognizing that wall and roof materials are not dimensionally stable, and that they move differentially from the structural

frame, the location of cracks should be anticipated and an airtight diaphragm and/or flexible sealants incorporated to maintain air-tightness, and to prevent problems due to vapour condensation.

.2 In addition, connections between structural steel members are not airtight and perimeter connections must be made airtight.

.3 Although concealed behind convectors, paneling, wallboard or suspended ceilings, the interior surfaces of exterior walls and roofs to be made airtight. Ensure that backup masonry walls are well laid with full mortar joints, and wallboard joints are sealed.

.4 The manner of installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, and electrical outlets to be thoroughly coordinated to prevent the occurrence of air leaks: When pipes or conduits run adjacent to exterior walls and are to be furred in, not only to the exterior wall be airtight, but it to be adequately insulated to prevent cold spots on which condensation could occur in the cold space. Provide a continuous air seal between the airtight part of a wall or ceiling and the frames of openings such as windows, doors, hatches, ducts, grilles, louvres, structural steel members and the like.

.5 As a general rule, the air / vapour barrier must be on the interior (warm) side of the insulation and should be in contact with it.

.6 In addition to the specific requirements in each technical section of the Specification, make allowance for expansion control throughout the construction. Ensure that poured paving and slabs, exterior to the building structure, together with applied materials are not tight to building face, and that expansion control joints are left to accommodate movement.

.7 Take particular care in constructing walls around wet areas such as showers, to avoid moisture transfer to adjacent building areas.

01 18 00 – PUBLIC UTILITIES AND SERVICES At public utilities and services complete the following:

.1 Verify limitations imposed on project work by presence of utilities and services, and ensure no damage occurs to them.

.2 Notify service authorities concerned so that they protect, remove, relocate or discontinue them, as they may require.

.3 Make arrangements for services required for project work.

.4 Locate poles, pipes, conduit, wires, fill pipes, vents, regulators, meters, and sanitary service work in inconspicuous locations. If not shown on drawings, verify location of service work with Consultant before commencing installation.

01 31 00 – BUILDING DIMENSIONS AND COORDINATION Ensure that necessary job dimensions are taken and trades are co-ordinated for the proper execution of the work. Assume complete

responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of such dimensions, and for co-ordination.

Outdoor Air Temperature Type of Heat Enclosure

5 degC to 2 degC (41 degF to 36 degF) None None 2 degC to -4 degC (36 degF to 25 degF) Vented heater Windbreak tarpaulin or plastic / canvas enclosure -4 degC to -8 degC (25 degF to 18 degF) Vented heater Windbreak tarpaulin or plastic / canvas enclosure -8 degC to -18 degC (18 degF to 0 degF) Temporary heating Full enclosure of approved type below -18 degC (below 0 degF) Temporary heating Full enclosure of approved type


Page 24 of 141

Verify that work, as it proceeds, is executed in accordance with dimensions and positions indicated which maintain levels and clearances to adjacent work, as set out by requirements of the drawings, and ensure that work installed in error is rectified before construction resumes.

Check and verify dimensions referring to the work and the interfacing of services. Verify dimensions, with the trade concerned when pertaining to the work of other trades. Be responsible to see that Subcontractors for various trades cooperate for the proper performance of the Work.

Avoid scaling directly from the drawings. If there is ambiguity or lack of information, immediately inform the Consultant. Be responsible for any change through the disregarding of this clause.

All details and measurements of any work which is to fit or to conform to work installed to be taken at the building. Advise Consultant of discrepancies and if there are omissions on drawings, particularly reflected ceiling plans and jointing patterns for

paving, ceramic tile, or carpet tile layouts, which affect aesthetics, or which interfere with services, equipment or surfaces. DO NOT PROCEED without direction from the Consultant.

Ensure that each Subcontractor communicates requirements for site conditions and surfaces necessary for the execution of the Subcontractor's work, and that he provides setting drawings, templates and other information necessary for the location and installation of material, holes, sleeves, insets, anchors, accessories, fastenings, connections and access panels. Inform other Subcontractors whose work is affected by these requirements and preparatory work.

Prepare interference drawings to properly coordinate the work where necessitated. Refer to Section 01 33 00. Where work incorporates metric modular components, the following rules apply:

.1 Actual opening dimensions in masonry including doors, windows, walls, louvres and actual room sizes are 10mm (3/8") greater than nominal dimensions given on Drawings. Actual thicknesses of walls, piers and overall lengths of walls or buildings are 10mm (3/8") less than nominal dimensions given on Drawings unless indicated otherwise.

.2 Unless indicated otherwise drawing details at scales of 1/2” = 1’-0” (1:10) or larger indicate "actual" rather than "nominal" dimensions.

01 33 00 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Submit shop drawings in accordance with the attached schedule. Refer also to structural, mechanical, electrical drawings for additional

submittals that may be required. Submit one electronic copy in pdf format of each submittal and or shop drawing. The review by the Consultant is for the sole purpose

of ascertaining conformance with the general design concept. The review to not mean that the Consultant approves the detail design inherent in the shop drawings, responsibility for which to remain with the Contractor submitting same, and such review to not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop drawings or of his responsibility for meeting requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation, and for coordination of the work of trades. The review of this drawing and/or any notes added to it, does not constitute authorization to proceed with any work which, in the Contractor's or Supplier's opinion, will involve extra cost to the Owner. In the event of any conflict between the Contract Documents and a shop drawing, the Contract Documents to govern. Shop drawings to show; .1 The name of the project. .2 Kinds of material and finishes. .3 Sections, arrangements and details which indicate complete construction, as well as interconnections with other work. .4 Fabrication and erection dimensions, together with quantities and/or locations. .5 Assumed design loadings, dimensions of elements and material specifications for load-bearing members. .6 Data verifying that superimposed loads will not affect function, appearance and safety of work shown on shop drawings, as

well as other work interconnected. .7 Proposed chases, sleeves, cuts, and holes in structural members.

SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

product / system description

sam

ple

s

pro

du

ct li

tera

ture

mai

nte

nan

ce in

stru

ctio

ns

sho

p d

raw

ing

s

fiel

d r

evie

w r

epo

rt

rep

ort

/ m

od

ellin

g a

nal

ysis

additional requirements (refer to notes to submittal schedule)

Compaction Test Results x Provide compaction testing at frequency as defined by the specifications – refer to civil structural drawings

Concrete Tests x Provide concrete testing at frequency as defined by the specifications – refer to structural drawings.

Granular Material Analysis x Refer to civil drawings for testing requirements.

Civil Inspection Reports x Refer to civil drawings for requirements.


Page 25 of 141

Metal Fabrications x Shop drawings to be stamped and sealed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the province of Ontario.

Reinforcing Steel x Refer to structural drawings for requirements.

Brick Masonry x x Shop drawings to be stamped and sealed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the province of Ontario.

Structural Steel x Refer to structural drawings for requirements.

Miscellaneous Metals x Shop drawings to be stamped and sealed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the province of Ontario.

Windloaded Metal Studs x x Shop drawings to be stamped and sealed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the province of Ontario.

Metal Stairs, Handrails And Guards x x Shop drawings to be stamped and sealed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the province of Ontario.

Metal Cladding and Trim x x x Shop drawings to be stamped and sealed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the province of Ontario.

Modified Bituminous Roofing Systems x x

Metal Roofing Systems x x Provide sample of shingles indicating colour and pattern

Firestopping x Engineered judgements, where required, to be stamped and sealed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the province of Ontario.

Expansion Joints x x x

Aluminium Doors and Windows / Insulated Glass Units

x x x Shop drawings to be stamped and sealed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the province of Ontario. Provide shop drawings that show location and type of connection details between the aluminium framing and the existing structure and demonstrate that the framing system can withstand wind loads a as defined by part 4 of the OBC 2012. Verify that insulated unit meets minimum thermal performance described in this specification.

Hollow Metal Door and Frame Shop Drawings

x x x In addition to typical shop drawings / schedule, provide detailed product literature that describes typical doors and frames.

Hardware Schedule and Catalogue Cuts x x x

Folding Partition x x x x

Toilet Partitions x x x Shop Drawings: Include overall product dimensions, floor plan, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Include choice of options with details.

Washroom Accessories x x x Shop Drawings: Show and describe in detail, materials, finishes, dimensions, details of connections and fastenings, elevations, plans, sections, metal gauges, hardware and any other pertinent information. Submit a washroom accessories schedule indicating accessories required, showing model number, finish and mounting height on a room by room basis.

Acoustic Ceilings x x x

Interior Tactile Warning Surfaces x x x

Resilient Flooring x x x

Elevator x x x x Shop drawings to be stamped and sealed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the province of Ontario

Inspection Reports From The Building Services Department

x

Record Drawings x Record drawings to be prepared by the Contractor. Maintain one full set of drawings and specification on the site. Accurately record changes to the contract documents on these drawings and submit to the Architect at substantial completion of the work.

Electrical Safety Authority (ESA) Certificate x

Warranties x Provide copies of warranties and extended warranties signed and sealed by the Contractor and Trade Contractors. Where applicable provide extended warranties as required by the specifications.

Contractor / Trade Contractor Contact List Index

x Provide a list of trades, contractors and suppliers that have contributed to the project. Provide corporate names, addresses, email telephone numbers and contact names for each.

Project Manual x At substantial completion provide a hardcopy and pdf copy of the project manual. Provide a detailed index of materials. Include copies of items in this schedule. Samples are not required.


Page 26 of 141

Submittals When Project is Substantially Performed .1 Manufacturer's Data Book and Shop Drawings:

.1 Provide the Owner with shop drawings and Manufacturer's Data Books at the completion of the Project.

.2 Shop drawings shall consist of two complete sets of final "REVIEWED" and "REVIEWED AS MODIFIED" shop drawings, on which corrections have been recorded of changes made during fabrication and installation of unforeseen conditions. Do not include drawings which were noted "REVISE AND RESUBMIT".

.3 The Manufacturer's Data Book shall consist of two (2) bound copies of hard, black, vinyl-covered loose leaf binders, to accommodate 8-1/2" x 11" sheets. Binders shall match in all dimensions. A title sheet labelled "Manufacturer's Data Book" with project name, and the date of Substantial Performance and list of contents shall precede data. Organize required material into applicable sections of work. Each section shall be marked by labelled tabs protected with celluloid covers fastened to hard paper dividers.

.4 The Manufacturer's Data Book shall contain: .1 Equipment and operating instructions on all operable equipment and on all mechanical and electrical

equipment, plumbing fixtures, and architectural hardware. Notes shall be typed. Drawings shall be neatly drafted and inked, or white-printed. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for additional requirements.

.2 Maintenance instructions for all exterior, and interior floors, walls and ceiling surfaces.

.3 Operating and maintenance instructions for all mechanical and electrical equipment.

.4 Original brochures on all equipment.

.5 Parts lists on all equipment including a list of suppliers.

.6 All additional material used in the project beyond that indicated by brochures listed under the various sections, showing manufacturers and sources of supply.

.7 Names, addresses and telephone numbers of the designer(s) and major contractor(s) who worked on the building.

.8 Commissioning data such as air and water flows and regulating valve positions.

01 35 00 – SAFETY The Contractor shall conform to and enforce strict compliance with the Occupational Health & Safety Act and Construction

Regulations, the Environmental Protection Act, Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS), Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, and any other pertinent legislation for construction projects. .1 The Contractor for purposes of the Occupational Health & Safety Act, will be designated as the constructor for this project and

will assume all of the responsibilities of the constructor set out in that Act and its Regulations. .2 The Contractor shall monitor the Work to ensure that all applicable Health & Safety Regulations are followed. Violations will be

documented, appropriate action taken, and records kept on file. .3 The Contractor shall be informed of any minor violations of the Occupational Health & Safety Act or its Regulations and shall

correct such minor violations immediately. .4 The Consultant or its authorized representative shall stop the Work immediately for any major violation of the Occupational

Health & Safety Act or its Regulations. The Contractor shall not resume the Work until any such violation has been rectified. .5 The Contractor shall be responsible for any delay in the progress of the Work due to a violation of legislated or City health and

safety requirements, and shall take the necessary steps to avoid delay in the final completion of the Work without additional cost to the Owner.

The Contractor shall provide a telephone, first aid kit, stretcher, blanket, eye wash station, and any other measures foreseeable in the site office, or other appropriate location, for emergency use.

The Contractor to perform the Work in a safe manner and to comply with applicable municipal, provincial, and federal legislation and any other regulation by authorities having jurisdiction of construction projects. In the event of conflict between any provisions on the above authorities, the most stringent provision to apply.

Maintain existing exits and accesses to exits and vehicle access points serving portions of the building scheduled to remain in use by the Owner, including corridors and doorways (man doors and overhead doors), free of impediments and obstructions.

Where an exit or access to exit is unavoidably blocked provide an acceptable alternate exit and/or access route, clearly defined and protected so that it is separated from the construction area by a smoke and dust tight partition equivalent to a 45 minute fire separation. Proposed alternate exits to be to the satisfaction of authorities having jurisdiction.

At existing occupied floor areas exposed to new construction, provide a temporary dust tight partition equivalent to a 45 minute fire separation. Proposed partition to be to the satisfaction of authorities having jurisdiction.

01 35 26 – LIFE AND FIRE SAFETY General:

.1 Enforce requirements established by Jurisdictional Authorities and Underwriters for life safety, fire prevention, and fire protection.

.2 Be proactive by means of communication with Building Controls and Local Fire Department regarding ongoing Life and Fire Safety.


Page 27 of 141

Fire Safety Plan: .1 All Contractors and their personnel shall be familiar with this section and its requirements. And, the contents of this section

shall not diminish or relieve the contractor of his/her/ contractual obligations to the Owner. Fire Department Briefing:

.1 The General Contractor shall coordinate arrangements for the trade Contractors to be briefed on Fire Safety at their pre-work conference by the Fire Chief before any work is commenced.

Reporting Fires: .1 Know the location of nearest fire alarm box and telephone, including the emergency phone number. .2 Report immediately all fire incidents to the Fire Department as follows:

.1 Activate nearest fire alarm box, or

.2 Telephone. .3 Person activating fire alarm box shall remain at the box to direct Fire Department to scene of fire. .4 When reporting a fire by telephone, give location of fire, name or number of building and be prepared to verify the location.

Interior and Exterior Fire Protection and Alarm Systems: .1 Fire protection and alarm systems shall not be:

.1 Obstructed,

.2 Shut Off, or

.3 Left inactive at the end of a working day or shift without notification and authorization from the Fire Chief or his representative.

.2 Fire hydrants, standpipes and hose systems shall not be used for other than firefighting purposes unless authorized by the Fire Chief.

Fire Extinguishers: .1 The Contractor shall supply fire extinguishers, as scaled by the Fire Chief, necessary to protect, in an emergency, the work in

progress and the Contractor’s physical plant on site. Blockage of Roadways:

.1 The Fire Chief shall be advised of any work that would impede fire apparatus response. This includes violation of minimum overhead clearance, as prescribed by the Fire Chief, erecting of barricades and digging of trenches.

Smoking Precautions: .1 Although smoking is not permitted in hazardous areas, care must still be exercised in the use of smoking materials in non-

restricted areas. .2 Smoking is not permitted within the building.

Rubbish and Waste Materials: .1 Rubbish and waste materials are to be kept to a minimum. .2 The burning of rubbish is prohibited. .3 All rubbish shall be removed from the work site at the end of the work day or shift or as directed. .4 Extreme care is required where it is necessary to store oily waste in work areas to ensure maximum possible cleanliness and

safety. .5 Greasy or oily rags or materials subject to spontaneous combustion shall be deposited and kept in an approved receptacle and

removed as required. Flammable Liquids:

.1 The handling, storage and use of flammable liquids are to be governed by the current National Fire Code of Canada.

.2 Flammable liquids such as gasoline, kerosene and naphtha may be kept for ready use in quantities not exceeding 45 litres provided they are stored in approved safety cans bearing the Underwriter’s Laboratory of Canada or Factory Mutual seal of approval. Storage of quantities of flammable liquids exceeding 45 litres for work purposes, requires the permission of the Fire Chief.

.3 Transfer of flammable liquids is prohibited within buildings or on jetties.

.4 Transfer of flammable liquids shall not be carried out in the vicinity of open flames or any type of heat-producing devices.

.5 Flammable liquids having a flash point below 38 degC such as naphtha or gasoline shall not be used as solvents or cleaning agents.

.6 Flammable waste liquids for disposal, shall be stored in approved containers located in a safe ventilated area. Quantities are to be kept to a minimum and the Fire Department is to be notified when disposal is required.

Hazardous Substances: .1 If the work entails the use of any toxic or hazardous materials, chemicals and/or explosives, or otherwise creates a hazard to

life, safety or health, work shall be in accordance with the National Fire Code of Canada. .2 The Fire Chief is to be advised, and a ‘Hot Work’ permit issued in all cases involving welding, burning or the use of blow

torches and salamanders, in buildings or facilities. Special precautions are necessary to safeguard life and property from damage by fire or explosives.

.3 Wherever work is being carried out in dangerous or hazardous areas involving the use of heat, fire watchers, equipped with sufficient fire extinguishers shall be provided. The determination of dangerous or hazardous areas along with the level of


Page 28 of 141

precaution necessary for Fire Watch shall be at the discretion of the Fire Chief. Contractors are responsible for providing fire watch service for their work on a scale established and in conjunction with the Fire Chief at the pre-work conference.

.4 Where flammable liquids, such as lacquers or urethanes are to be used, proper ventilation shall be assured and all sources of ignition are to be eliminated. The Fire Chief is to be informed prior to and at the cessation of such work.

Questions and/or Clarifications: .1 Any questions or clarification on Fire Safety in addition to the above requirements shall be directed to and cleared through the

Fire Chief.

01 41 00 – REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Minimum Standard: Unless reference is made in the Contract Documents to other standards, work to conform to or exceed the

minimum applicable standards of The Ontario Building Code, and/or the governing Jurisdictional Authorities. Construction Safety: Include provisions for construction safety, such as fences, barricades, bracing supports, storage facilities,

sanitation facilities, fire protection, standpipes, electrical supply, temporary heat, ventilation, construction equipment with its supports and guards, stairs, ramps, platforms, runways, ladders, scaffolds, guardrails, temporary flooring, rubbish chutes, walkway lighting and as required by the Occupational Health and Safety Act, and amendments thereto and the Ontario Fire Code Regulation as well as other applicable regulations of Jurisdictional Authorities.

01 42 13 – ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS Many words or expressions that are repeated frequently on the drawings are abbreviated to reduce the amount of wording that might

obscure the detailing. In some instance and to avoid misinterpretation, these abbreviations are listed, with their full meaning, on a tables / legends located on the drawings or near schedules where the abbreviations are used.

01 43 00 – QUALITY ASSURANCE Each contractor / trade contractor to have a minimum of five (5) years’ experience with materials and methods of their trade and if

required, be able to provide references and evidence to substantiate this requirement. A contractor’s / trade contractor’s inability to provide this documentation to constitute grounds for dismissal from the project at no cost to the Owner.

01 43 13 – MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS Install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instruction. Where instructions in this package conflict with the

manufacturer’s recommendations identify the conflict to the Architect immediately.

01 43 39 – MOCK UPS Prior to proceeding with the Work, prepare mock-ups as requested in the individual sections of the specifications and in this section.

Include for Work of all Sections required to provide mock-ups. Construct in specified locations or as selected by the Consultant. Prepare mock-ups for Consultant's review with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence, so as not to cause any delay in

the Work. Failure to prepare mock-ups in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time and no claim for

extension by reason of such default will be allowed. Remove mock-ups at conclusion of Work or when acceptable to Consultant.

01 45 00 – QUALITY CONTROL The Owner / Architect will identify inspection testing companies. Testing will be paid for by the Owner unless noted otherwise. Contractor to be responsible for coordinating completion of the required testing to suit the progress of the project and the required

frequencies of the test defined in the specifications or requested by the Consultant Team. Contractor to give the Consultant team notice of the progress of the work to provide reasonable opportunity to review the work for

compliance with the Contract Documents. Failure to do so will be cause for the Consultant to classify the work as defective. If the initial inspections and tests required to establish compliance with the Contract Documents indicates non-compliance with the

Contract Documents, subsequent testing or re-inspection occasioned by non-compliance to be performed by the same Inspector(s) and the cost thereof borne by the Contractor. Where factual evidence exists, that defective workmanship has occurred or that work has been carried out incorporating defective materials, the Consultant may have tests, inspections or surveys performed, analytical calculation of structural strength made and the like in order to help determine whether the work must be replaced. Tests, inspections or surveys carried out under these circumstances will be made at the Contractor's expense, regardless of their results, which may be such that, in the Consultant's opinion, the work may be acceptable. Testing to be conducted in accordance with the requirements of the Ontario Building Code, except where this would in the Consultant's opinion cause undue delay or give results not representative of the rejected material in place. In this case, the tests to be conducted in accordance with the standards given by the Consultant. Materials or workmanship which fails to meet specified requirements may be rejected by the Consultant whenever found at any time prior to final acceptance of the work regardless of previous inspection. If rejected, defective materials or work incorporating defective materials or workmanship to be promptly removed and replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Consultant, at no expense to the Owner.


Page 29 of 141

Construction Tolerances: .1 Unless more restrictive/demanding requirements are specified, the following construction tolerances could be accepted:

.1 "Plumb and level" - 3mm in 3m (1/8” in 10’-0”).

.2 "Square" - 10 seconds more or less than 90 degrees.

.3 "Straight" - 3mm (1/8”) under a 3m (10’-0”) long straight edge.

.4 Tolerances to not be cumulative.

01 50 00 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS The Contractor to be responsible that activities are in compliance with applicable legislation. The Contractor to be responsible for the

provision of and removal of temporary provisions and controls for the project including but not limited to the following; .1 Identification and enclosure of materials / spaces required to develop an appropriate field of operations / staging / storage

areas to permit the execution of the project. .2 The provision of parking areas for the Contractors / Trade Contractors personnel. Onsite parking is available in Contractor’s

Trailer / laydown area that will be designated on site by the Owner. Additional parking areas will be provided in parking lots as designated by the Owner at a later date.

.3 The provision of hoisting, scaffolding, roads, walkways and other construction aids as required.

.4 The provision of field offices / sheds to be located in the Contractor’s Trailer / Laydown Area identified by the Owner.

.5 The provision of temporary heat. Salamanders to not be permitted.

.6 The provision of temporary lighting and power systems. Maintain not less than 160 LUX level. Temporary power distribution wiring to comply with the Ontario Hydro Electrical Safety Code. Obtain inspection certificates and approvals for temporary electrical work.

.7 Temporary washroom facilities for use by the Contractor and Subcontractors the duration of the project.

.8 The provision of protection of completed construction where ongoing work or exposure to weather may cause damage.

.9 The provision of building enclosures; Work to include temporary enclosure for building as required to protect it, in its entirety, or its parts, against vandals, the elements, and to maintain temperatures which ensure conditions for installation that prevent harm to materials. Erect temporary enclosures to allow accessibility for the installation of materials during the time the enclosures remain in place. Design temporary enclosures to withstand wind pressures. Structural framing of the building may be used within load limits for which the framing is designed, for support of temporary enclosures. Keep surfaces of temporary enclosures free of snow and ice, to avoid overloading of building framing.

.10 Dust Nuisance, Mud, Snow and Ice Removal; Prevent nuisance to adjacent properties near the works from dust raising and mud deposits, by taking appropriate anti-dust and mud measures, at such times as found necessary, and as directed by the Consultant, or at any other times complaints of dust or mud are received from the public by either the Contractor, the Consultant, or the Owner.

.11 The provision of dust partitions; Provide dust tight screens or partitions to localize dust generating activities, and for the protection of workers, areas scheduled to remain occupied during construction, finished areas of work and the public. Maintain and relocate, as required, to suit construction sequencing and until such work is complete.

.12 The provision of safeguards; In addition to the requirements of the Occupational Health and Safety Act provide temporary safeguards and protection adequate to maintain standard safety practices and to protect against: .1 Accident or injury to any workman and other persons on the site, adjacent work and property, roads and walks. .2 Damage to any part of the work and to any adjoining or adjacent structure, property, pavement, walks, services and

other similar items by frost, weather, overloading, and any other cause resulting from the execution of the work. .3 Particular attention to be paid to the prevention of fire and elimination of fire hazards which would endanger the work or

adjacent buildings and premises. .4 Particular attention to be paid to the prevention of spills or releases of asbestos, PCB's or mercury which would

endanger the work at the site and at adjacent buildings and premises. .5 Should any part of the work or any buildings, pavements, trees, poles, hydrants, cultivated or grassed areas, etc., on or

surrounding the site and adjacent to any road leading thereto, become damaged or disfigured due to lack of failure of such protection, make good with material identical with existing and adjoining surfaces, or compensate the Owner for value of same.

.6 Provide necessary temporary enclosures, hoardings, fences, gates, guardrails, hoists, stairs, ladders, scaffolding, staging, runways, night-lights, and barriers as necessary for the work. Conform to such requirements of the Labour Laws and other Provincial or local labour safety laws, applicable thereto. Be responsible for scaffolding, formwork, or other temporary supports used during the work. Where such structures are of a complicated nature, employ the services of a Registered Professional Engineer to design such scaffolding, framework, or other temporary supports. Support scaffolding independently of the building's finished surfaces. Arrange to avoid when not in use to permit work to proceed unimpeded, and promptly remove when no longer required.

.7 Use temporary fire standpipes and hose, or other approved fire extinguishing equipment in the building(s) until the permanent fire protection system in the building(s) is available.


Page 30 of 141

.8 Should work be stopped for any cause, provide protection for the work and necessary temporary cold weather heating during such periods of work stoppages.

.9 Keep portions of the work properly and efficiently drained during construction and until completion, and the Contractor will be held responsible for damage which may be caused or result from water backing up or flowing over, through, from, or along any part of the works, whether such damage is to the works, to the existing building, or to neighbouring properties.

.10 Underground Electrical Services: provide safeguards to existing underground electrical services. .13 Water, reasonably used, to be provided by the Owner at no cost. .14 Electricity, reasonably used, to be provided by the Owner at no cost. Contractor may connect to existing electricity for use of

trades except for purpose of power welding and electric heating.

01 60 00 – PRODUCT HANDLING Provide the required facilities to receive, store and secure construction products at the job site as required for the duration of

construction. Where require provide system to heat, cool or humidify interior spaces to support the safe storage of materials. Refer to manufacturer

of products for environmental requirements. Protect products from damage.

01 62 00 – PRODUCT OPTIONS Substitution(s) for ‘Cause” and/or ‘Convenience’:

.1 The Contractor (and all sub-contractors) must demonstrate, by way of their submissions that any/all products and/or substitutions are made as substitutions for ‘cause’ and the intent of the contract documents. Substitutions deemed as substitutions for ‘convenience’ will not be considered and allowed.

.2 The distinction made regarding substitution for ‘cause’ or ‘convenience’ identified for substitution is intended to allow the contractor to access the marketplace for legitimate options and it is intended to discourage frivolous, inadequately researched or untimely substitutions.

Exceptions: .1 During bidding, the Consultant will consider written requests from prime bidders for substitutions, received at least seven (7)

working days prior to bid closing date; requests received after that time will not be considered. .2 All considerations/requests for product options and /or, for substitution be it during bidding or at construction stage shall include

complete data substantiating compliance with the Contract Documents. The onus and responsibility resides with the contractor to demonstrate product compliance. .1 For Cause: Demonstrate rational/reason for substitution and/or Product Option proposed. Submit in writing. .2 For Products:

.1 Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address.

.2 Manufacturer's literature: 1. Product description. 2. Performance test data. 3. Reference standards. 4. Living Building Challenge Requirements compliance demonstrating specific applicable prerequisite

requirements. .3 Samples. .4 Name and address of similar projects on which product was used, and date of installation, where possible. .5 Any ‘Exceptions’ status acceptance documentation.

.3 For Construction Methods: .1 Detailed description of proposed method. .2 Drawings illustrating methods. .3 Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified.

.4 For Construction Schedule: Support documentation vis a vis any impact on project schedule.

.5 For Cost Consideration (s): Indicate whether Product Option or a proposed substitution is cost saving, cost neutral or a cost increase. Submit cost back-up. Provide additional information as requested by consultant.

.6 Relation to (any) separate contracts. .3 In making request for substitution and/or Product Options, the Contractor represents:

.1 Substitution for ‘Cause’

.2 He/she has thoroughly investigated proposed product or method, and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified.

.3 He/she will provide the substitution with the same guarantee as that for product or method specified.

.4 He/she will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, making such changes as may be required for work to be complete in all respects.


Page 31 of 141

.5 Requests for substitutions during construction shall state what cost difference if any, will be made in the Contract Price for each substitution, should it be accepted.

.4 Substitutions and/or Product Options will not be considered if: .1 Substitution for ‘Cause’ is not demonstrated, whereupon the consultant will reject the proposed substitution .2 They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or project data submittals without formal request. .3 Acceptance will require revision to Contract Documents.

01 73 00 – VERIFICATION OF INVERTS Immediately after award of the Contract, verify field service connections to ensure that drainage runs can meet the inverts of the site

services. Give notification immediately of any apparent difficulties or discrepancies.

01 74 00 – CLEAN UP REQUIREMENTS General:

.1 Maintain the work in a tidy condition and free from the accumulation of waste products and debris, other than that caused by the Owner, other Contractors or their employees. Conform to requirements established by jurisdictional authorities for environmental and pollution control. Prevent dust from spreading to adjoining properties. Keep roads and sidewalks free from excavated materials, dirt and debris, snow, and ice.

Clean-up: .1 Contractor will be responsible for clean up on a daily basis. If the site is not cleaned each day Owner will arrange for site

cleanup and the Contractor will be charged the cost as determined by Owner. .2 Contractor will be responsible for the cleanup and removal of rubbish and surplus material associated with his work. Clean up

is to be scheduled and carried out to the satisfaction of Owner. .3 Contractor will be responsible for daily general housekeeping. .4 Should the Contractor repeatedly fail or refuse to perform his own cleanup, Owner to perform this work after 48 hours’ notice

and cost to be assessed to the Contractor’s account. .5 At completion of the work, each Contractor to remove tools, equipment, machinery, storage sheds, temporary protection and

surplus material leaving the project clean and ready for occupancy. Final Clean-up:

.1 Contractor to be responsible for the final cleanup of the project prior to achieving substantial completion. This to be completed by experienced personnel or professional cleaners to the satisfaction of Owner / Architect and to generally include the following; .1 All excess construction materials and construction debris to be removed from the site. .2 All interior surfaces and fixtures to be vacuum clean, mopped and wiped. Clean and polish glass and mirrors. .3 All manufacturer’s labels, stickers, markings to be removed. .4 Exterior building surfaces to be cleaned, washed and wiped. Dust, efflorescence or other markings, debris to be

removed. Clean and polish glass. .5 Exterior hard surfaces to be broom clean, soft landscaping to be rake clean.


Page 32 of 141

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 00 00 – EXISTING CONDITIONS Make good surfaces and finishes damaged or disturbed due to Work of this Contract to match existing. Ensure that material used to

repair damage is compatible with existing work. Term “make good” to mean repairing or filling operations performed on existing floors, walls, ceiling or any other exposed surfaces.

Perform cutting and patching where applicable as specified herein. It is intended that finished surfaces match and line with existing adjoining surfaces.

Restore Site to condition equal to or, if specified elsewhere, to condition better than existing conditions. Restore lands outside of limits of Work which are disturbed due to Work to original condition in addition to complying with requirements

of General Conditions of the Contract.

02 21 00 – SURVEYS Existing grades and other known conditions of site are shown on Site Plan. This survey information has been established by personnel

engaged by the Owner. No responsibility is assumed by the Owner or Consultant for accuracy of this survey information. The Contractor to assume full responsibility for and execute complete layout of work to locations, lines and elevations indicated.

Establish other necessary lines and levels, and erect substantial batter boards and maintain their accurate position. The Contractor to employ an Ontario Land Surveyor to:

.1 Layout new building additions on site and establish a permanent bench mark or widely separated bench marks, as required by building configuration.

.2 Verify elevations established for each floor as construction proceeds.

.3 Verify relation of building floor elevations to permanent bench marks.

.4 Verify that no restrictions in force, or probable in the near future, are violated by the placement of construction on the site, or lines of traverse to public utilities.

.5 Correlate geodetic elevation of bench mark with the elevations in use by public utilities adjacent to the project.

.6 Verify accuracy of site dimensions shown on Drawings.

.7 Provide to the Consultant a survey plan indicating location of building on site.

02 32 00 – GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION A Geo-technical Investigation for the project is included in the appendix of this specification for information. This report includes the

following; .1 Geotechnical Investigation and Design Recommendations, prepared by Englobe dated January 19, 2019, 46 pages, is

available and can be issued if requested. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating construction activities as required to address the content of the

geotechnical report. The report was carried out for the Owner for guidance in design and construction of the new building. Given the scope of the proposed

new building the report contain relevant geotechnical information and is appended to this Section for information purposes only. This report does not form part of the Contract Documents. It to be understood that such examination to be for reference only and

comments and recommendations contained therein to not be taken as superseding the requirements of the Contract Documents. No responsibility is assumed by the Consultant or by the Owner for the scope or accuracy of the bore hole logs, and the soil

investigation of this site. The Contractor to satisfy himself with regards to matters relating to sub-surface conditions. Article GC 6.4 of Canadian Standard Construction Document 2 2008 to govern if the subsurface conditions are found to differ from the

geotechnical report or assumptions articulated on the drawings. During excavation, existing soils conditions will be reviewed by a geotechnical engineer. Copies of the completed geotechnical site

review reports will be distributed to the Contractor for information.

02 41 00 – DEMOLITION – NOT USED.

02 42 00 – REMOVAL AND SALVAGE OF MATERIALS – NOT USED


Page 33 of 141

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE Refer to structural drawings prepared by A2S Engineering for additional Division 03 requirements.

03 15 00 – CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

General: Scope: This section includes the following types of concrete accessories:

.1 Expansion/contraction joint filler. Submittals:

.1 General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contract and Division 1 Section 01 33 00

.2 Submit manufacturer's product data and application instructions. Delivery, Storage and Handling:

.1 Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.

.2 Store materials in a clean, dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage.

Products: Manufacturers:

.1 W. R. Meadows, Inc.

.2 Or approved equivalent. Materials:

.1 Fibre Expansion Joint Resilient, flexible, non-extruding, expansion-contraction joint filler. Cellular fibers securely bonded together, uniformly saturated with asphalt. Joint filler shall conform to the following standards and have the following requirements: .1 ASTM D1751, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural

Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). .2 AASHTO M 213, Expansion Joint Filler. .3 FAA Spec Item P-610-2.7. .4 COE CRD-C 508. .5 Resilience: When compressed to half of original thickness, recover to a minimum of 70% of original thickness. .6 Thickness: 12.7mm (1/2”)

.2 Approved Product: Fibre Expansion Joint by W. R. Meadows, Inc. or approved equivalent. Accessories:

.1 Joint Sealants: as recommended by manufacturer in accordance with application and locations of expansion joint.

Execution: Examination:

.1 Examine areas to receive expansion/contraction joint filler. Notify architect if areas are not acceptable. Do not begin application until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.

Installation: .1 Install expansion-contraction joint filler in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .2 Position joint filler against forms, at interrupting objects or columns, and against abutting structures before concrete placement. .3 Install joint filler 1/2” below concrete surface. .4 Prior to sealing, slide expansion joint cap over the expansion joint. .5 Place concrete and screed to finish grade. .6 Allow concrete to cure. .7 Insert screwdriver through the top of expansion joint cap, pull free, and discard. .8 Seal with pavement joint sealant.

Protection: .1 Protect pavement joint sealant from traffic until fully cured.

03 35 01 – CONCRETE FLOOR HARDENING + SEALING Scope: Provide labour and material to supply and install new concrete floor hardener and sealer to concrete floors as scheduled. Materials:

.1 Concrete Sealer and Hardener to be ‘Euclid Diamond Hard (hardener) and Eculid Ultraguard (polish)’. At a minimum provide one coat of each material in order to match recently completed work in adjacent areas. Use for floor areas with the abbreviation “SC” as indicated on the drawings. Refer to Room Finish Schedule.


Page 34 of 141

.2 Control Joint Sealant to be Sika Loadflex Polyurea. Use at new and existing control / expansion joints in areas where new concrete sealer is scheduled on the drawings. Colour to be selected from the manufacturer’s standard colour range by the Owner at a later date.

Installation - Concrete Floor Hardener / Sealer: .1 Existing Concrete Floor Preparation:

.1 Before commencing with the work, examine floors to be sealed. Remove sealers, glues from the existing concrete surface. Grind floor to remove materials that will inhibit the sealer / hardener from penetrating the concrete floor. If required neutralize the floor as recommended by the manufacturer.

.2 At existing concrete slabs and areas where concrete sealers have been applied, provide grinding of floor. Grind floor to expose existing aggregate in floor slab to the satisfaction of the Architect / Owner. Use a terrazzo style grinder with vacuum assisted dust collection system as required to remove adhesive remaining on the floor after the removal of the carpet. Use of solvent based cleaners is not acceptable. Grind floor with the following grit sequence; 30 diamond, 80 diamond, 50 resin, 100 resin, 200 resin. Then wash floor and apply hardener. Once hardener has set continue to grid floor using 400 diamond, and 800 diamond and 1800 diamond grit. Apply polish layer after the completion of 1800 grit in all areas. Coordinate floor grinding with Contractor. Do not proceed with floor grinding until adequate hoarding is in place to protect occupied sections of the existing building. After grinding is complete clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation of concrete hardener / polish layers. If construction equipment must be used for application, diaper components that might drip oil, hydraulic fluid or other liquids.

.3 Grinding at new concrete slabs is not required.

.4 If a curing compound is used on the new concrete slab it must be fully removed prior to installation of the hardener / sealer.

.2 Application: .1 Apply materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions and recommendations with respect to this

project. Apply product with low pressure sprayer only. Do not use airless sprayers, as they atomize the material, allowing inhalation which may pose a health hazard.

.2 Apply materials in dust-free conditions suitable for achieving good results. Apply sealer in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed directions. Apply sealer to present uniformly-coloured surfaces, free from runs, bubbles, brush marks, crawls, dirt or dust particles, or other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

.3 Saturate the surface with concrete sealer and hardener so that the entire surface is wet for 30 minutes.

.4 If after 30-40 minutes the majority of the concrete sealer / hardener has been absorbed into the surface, broom or squeegee any excess sealer / hardener (while still in its liquid form) from low spots and puddles so that remaining is entirely absorbed into the concrete or totally removed from the surface.

.5 If after 30-40 minutes the majority of the sealer / hardener is still on the surface, wait until it becomes slippery underfoot, then thoroughly flush the entire surface with clear water and squeegee completely dry to remove sealer hardener residue.

.6 If the material becomes slippery prior to the 30 minute period, lightly mist the surface with water. This can be done with either a low-pressure power sprayer or with a hose and nozzle (nozzle should be adjusted to create a mist). This step will resolubilize the concrete sealer / hardener so that it is no longer slippery or gel-like. Agitate the floor with a broom to aid the penetration of the sealer/hardener. Wait for the sealer / hardener to become slippery or gel-like a second time.

.7 At this point, thoroughly flush the surface with water. During the flushing process, the floor should be agitated with brooms to help loosen and remove excess concrete sealer from the surface.

.8 Thoroughly squeegee the slab dry by pushing the water ahead of you off the slab edge. At this point, the floor should look like bare concrete with nothing on it. During the squeegee process, there may be some slippery patches. This is an indication that excess concrete sealer is still on the surface. These areas should be re-flushed and squeegeed again until the entire surface is dry.

.9 Applications can be accomplished with the use of an auto-scrubber. The auto-scrubber should be equipped with four pneumatic tires to prevent damage to the concrete surface. Driving across saw-cut joints at an angle will reduce the stress on the joint edges

.10 Continue grinding as described in section (1) to 800 – 1800 resin grit levels as specified.

.11 Repeat application process with polish layer.

.12 Buff floor with high RPM electrical floor polisher to provide reflective sheen floor finish.

.13 Install protective hoarding layers as described in section (3). .3 Protection:

.1 Where required by the Owner, protect floor surface with 6mil poly with taped joints and 12.7mm (1/2”) plywood throughout the construction of the project in order to avoid staining and damage of the specified finish.

.2 Do not allow traffic on floors for three (3) hours after application.

.3 Do not allow parking of vehicles on concrete slab.

.4 If vehicles must be temporarily parked on slab, place drop cloths under vehicles during entire time parked.


Page 35 of 141

.5 Do not allow pipe cutting using pipe cutting machinery on concrete slab.

.6 Do not allow temporary placement and storage of steel members on concrete slabs.

.7 Clean up spills immediately and spot-treat stains with degreaser or oil emulsifier.

.8 Clean floor regularly in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

.9 When plywood and poly is removed, inspect floors. Clean floors and remove and stains left from construction activities. Where required provide additional polish and / or buffing to provide a consistent sheen on floors.

03 39 23 – MEMBRANE CONCRETE CURING – EXTERIOR

General: Scope: Provide labour and material to supply and install new concrete floor sealer to concrete floors as scheduled.

Materials: Materials:

.1 Concrete curing and sealing compound to conform to ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, products of the following manufacturers, conforming to the requirements of the specifications are acceptable: .1 Seal Cure (VOC) as manufactured by WR Meadows. .2 Or approved alternate.

Execution: Installation:

.1 Apply as soon as all surface water has disappeared and the concrete surface will not be marred by walking workers. Surface to receive sealer must be dry and free of contaminants. Remove all stains or discolourations.

.2 Install as per manufacturers written instructions.

03 39 23 – MEMBRANE CONCRETE CURING – INTERIOR

General: Scope: Provide labour and material to supply and install Water-Based, Acrylic, Concrete Curing and Sealing Compound to concrete

floors as scheduled. References:

.1 AASHTO M 148 Type 1, Class A and B

.2 ASTM C 309 Type 1, Class A and B

.3 Complies with all current federal, state, and local maximum allowable VOC requirements, including National EPA VOC Emission Standard for Architectural Coatings, CARB, LADCO, OTC Phase I and II, and SCAQMD.

.4 Dried film is USDA accepted. Shop Drawings:

.1 Shop drawings to be stamped and sealed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the province of Ontario. Warranty:

.1 Submit manufacturer’s limited warranty.

Materials: Materials:

.1 SC1: Concrete curing and sealing compound to conform to ASTM C 309 Type 1 Class A and B, products of the following manufacturers, conforming to the requirements of the specifications are acceptable: .1 VOCOMP 20 as manufactured by WR Meadows. .2 Or approved equal.

.2 SC2: Concrete curing and sealing compound to conform to ASTM C 309 Type 1 Class A and B, products of the following manufacturers, conforming to the requirements of the specifications are acceptable: .1 LIQUI-HARD with BELLATRIX as manufactured by WR Meadows, or approved equal.


.1 Apply as soon as all surface water has disappeared and the concrete surface will not be marred by walking workers in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Surface to receive sealer must be dry and free of contaminants. Remove all stains or discolourations.

.2 Install in strict accordance with manufacturers written instructions.

.3 Re-apply as per manufacturer’s instructions. Clean-up:

.1 As per manufacturer’s instructions.


Page 36 of 141

DIVISION 04 – MASONRY

04 26 13 – MASONRY VENEER

General: Scope: Provide labour and materials to provide brick masonry systems in accordance with the following;

Products: Materials:

.1 Brick veneer to be selected by the Owner at a later date, brick veneer to have the following characteristics; .1 Face brick to conform to CAN/CSA-A165.2. .2 Face brick size to be minimum 3.5” (90mm) deep. .3 Brick patterns to be defined by the Owner. .4 Provide concave mortar joints to match existing mortar joint profile.

.2 Cavity Wall / Thru Wall Flashing: to be modified bitumen reinforced with glass scrim, ‘Blueskin TWF’ as manufactured by Henry Company Inc. Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and in accordance with CAN/CSA-A371-04 in the following locations; under exterior masonry bearing on foundation walls, slabs, intermediate steel supports at floor levels, steel Iintel angles over openings and at roof/wall intersections. Carry flashings from front edge of masonry and/or stone veneer under and up backing minimum 6” (150mm). Extend flashing onto roofs minimum 8” (200mm) and up backing at exterior walls minimum 8” (200mm).

.3 Mortar for brick masonry to be Type N mortar to CSA A179. Mortar colour to be selected by the Owner at a later date.

.4 Brick Veneer Ties: .1 (To Metal Stud) Shall be BLOK-LOK Series BL 407 or approved equal, 8” projection, 11gaugestainless steel base

plate, 3/16” dia. stainless steel wire complete with stainless steel, #8 screws x 2-1/2” long. Provide brick veneer ties at intervals of 16” horizontally and 16” vertically and fasten directly to metal studs. Provide shop drawings stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the province of Ontario.

.2 (To Existing or New Concrete) Brick Veneer Ties: shall be the following: .1 BL-362 11-guage Stainless Steel Gripstay Channel furnished with built-in end clips for attachment to masonry

as manufactured by BLOK-LOK or approved equal. .2 BL-363 14-guage x 1-1/4” Stainless Steel Flexible Gripstay Anchor as manufactured by BLOK-LOK or

approved equal. .5 Horizontal Ladder Reinforcement: to be BLOK-LOK Series BL 10, 2 -9gaugediameter, stainless steel cross and side rods,

spaced to suit 3.5” brick masonry width. Provide prefabricated corners and tees as required. Provide ladder type horizontal reinforcement at 32” o/c vertically, offset from brick ties by one course of brick masonry.

.6 Weep Hole Vents: purpose-made of non-ferrous metal, designed to drain cavities to exterior equal to ‘Cellvent” by Blok Lok, 3/8” thick x 3 3/8” wide x 3 ½” tall. Locate at base and top of exterior masonry walls and at lintels over doors and windows located in exterior walls at maximum horizontal spacing of 32” o/c.

Submittals: .1 Provide shop drawings for brick ties and reinforcing required for the project. Shop drawings for brick ties to be stamped by an

engineer licensed to practice in the province of Ontario. .2 Provide samples of brick, brick ties, reinforcing and weep hole vents for review by the architect.

Execution: Do masonry work in accordance with CAN/CSA-A371-04, except where specified otherwise. Mortar and grout materials to be in accordance with the requirements of CSA A179-04 (R2009). Masonry Connectors to conform to CAN/CSA-370-14 – Connector for Masonry. When laying masonry in ambient temperature below 5 degC use heat and maintain temperature of masonry materials and protect

completed work from freezing for a period of at least 72 hours after installed. Build masonry plumb, level and true to line, with vertical joints in alignment and in patterns as indicated on drawings. Provide temporary bracing of masonry where required. Provide control joints at a maximum 25’-0” on centre. Field verify locations with Architect. Clean finished masonry work to remove excess mortar, efflorescence or other debris / discolouration. Coordinate three (3) mortar cube test for each 500m2 of wall or portion there, for each storey to confirm strength of mortar is

acceptable. Testing to be paid for by the Owner. Coordinate two (2) cylinder test for each 20m3 of grout or less used on the project to confirm strength of grout is acceptable. Testing to

be paid for by the Owner.


Page 37 of 141

DIVISON 05 – METALS Refer to structural drawings prepared by A2S Engineering for additional Division 05 requirements.

05 40 00 – COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

General: Scope: Provide engineering, labour and materials required to design and provide cold formed galvanized steel items; the windloaded

metal stud systems at all exterior walls including windloaded metal studs, exterior grade sheathing, thermal clips, subgirts and plenum channels, and at interior walls (above 2.4m high), soffits, z girts systems, c channels, and miscellaneous ties and connections for the project in locations as scheduled and / or detailed on the drawings.

Design Criteria: Design of system to be based on Limit States Design using factored loads and resistances. .1 Building systems to comply with environmental loads as defined by the Ontario Building Code 2012 and the proposed building

location, for a building with an importance category of ‘normal’. .2 Loads and load factors to be in accordance with the Ontario Building Code. For wind load calculations, the reference velocity

pressure, q, to be based on a 1 in 30 probability of being exceeded in any one for strength design and 1 in 10 for deflection. .3 Resistances and resistance factors to be determined in accordance with the National Building Code of Canada, CSA-S136. .4 Stud depths and sizes of z girts are indicated on Drawings. Adjust stud material thicknesses and spacing, as required by the

design criteria. Use greater or lesser stud depths only if approved by the Consultant. .5 Space wall studs at 16” (400mm) maximum. Use lesser stud spacing’s if required by design criteria. .6 Studs to be minimum 0.05” (1.27mm) (18 ga) thick. Use greater stud / z girt / c- channel design thicknesses if required by

design criteria. .7 The minimum design thickness for bridging to be 0.05” (1.27mm) (18 ga). Use greater bridging channel design thickness if

required by design criteria. .8 The minimum design thickness for clip angles to be 0.0625” (1.59mm) (16 ga). Use greater clip angle thickness if required by

design criteria. .9 Maximum deflections under specified wind loads to be L/240. .10 Design connections to accommodate vertical deflection movement of the structure, frame shortening and vertical tolerances

without imposing axial loads onto the framing. Leave a minimum gap of 1/2” (12.7mm) unless required otherwise to accommodate specified erection tolerances of the structure and/or structural movement.

.11 Design bridging to prevent member rotation and member translation perpendicular to the minor axis. Provide for secondary stress effects due to torsion between lines of bridging. Do not rely on collateral sheathing to help restrain member rotation and translation perpendicular to the minor axis. Provide bridging at 5’-0” (1500mm) o.c. maximum. Space bridging at equal intervals over the span length of the member.

.12 Design anchorage and splice details for bridging.

.13 Design for local loading due to anchorage of exterior cladding systems; refer to section 07 42 00 metal cladding and trim, and section 07 42 13 – metal wall panels, exterior grade sheathing, thermal clip systems and interior / exterior wall mounted fixtures where required.

.14 Connections between wind bearing steel stud members to be by bolts, welding or sheet metal screws.

.15 Provide head, sill and jamb members and connections to frame openings larger than 4” (100mm) in any direction.

.16 Anchor top and bottom track to the structure at a maximum spacing of 2’-8” (800mm) o.c. Closer spacing’s may be required to satisfy structural requirements.

Shop Drawings: .1 Retain a Professional Structural Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario to design cold formed steel items; the wind

bearing steel stud wall assemblies, thermal clips, subgirts, z-girts, plenum channels and miscellaneous C-channels, L sections. Engineer shall prepare, seal and sign shop drawings for system including load bearing and/or force-resulting components and perform field review of installed assemblies. Shop Drawings to indicate both design and installation requirements.

.2 Indicate design loads, member sizes, description of materials, design thickness / gauge, exclusive of coatings, connection and bracing details, screw sizes and spicing, and anchors as well as other pertinent data and information, for Consultant's review before fabrication.

.3 Indicate locations, dimensions, openings and requirements of related work.

.4 Indicate welds by welding symbols as defined in CSA W59.

.5 Submit copies of engineering calculations or data verifying the capacity of the members and the ability of the assemblies to meet the design requirements.

.6 Field Review: The wind bearing steel stud framing system engineer, responsible for the production of shop drawings, to provide periodic field review during construction to verify that the work has been erected in accordance with the reviewed shop drawings. Reports to be submitted to the Consultant. The costs of this field review to be paid for by the Contractor.


Page 38 of 141

Products: General: Steel studs, z girts, c channels to be free from defects which impair strength or durability, or which are visible. Metals to be

new, of best quality, and free from rust, or waves, or buckles, clean, straight, and with sharply defined profiles. Steel: to meet the requirements of CAN/CSA-S136. Galvanized coating to be structural quality to a minimum G90 (Z275) designation

zinc coating. Identify as to specification, type, grade and mechanical properties. Stainless Steel: Type 304 alloy conforming to ASTM A167, No. 4 finish. Welding Materials: to CSA W59 and certified by Canadian Welding Bureau. Screws: stainless steel pan head, self-drilling, self-tapping sheet metal screws with 0.008mm of zinc coating, as required, length to

suit engineered design. Anchors: concrete expansion anchors or other suitable drilled type fasteners, with 0.008mm of zinc coating as required, length to suit

engineered design. Bolts, Nuts, Washers: to conform to ASTM A307 or ASTM A325: hot dipped galvanized, size and type to suit engineered design. Touch up primer: zinc rich, to CAN/CGSB 1.181. Sub-framing Thermal Spacer: System2 extruded aluminum clip EA ‘T200’ Thermal System, as manufactured by Engineered

Assemblies Inc., (tel 888 591 7021, www.engineeredassemblies.com) having the following characteristics; .1 Thermal Clip: fabricated from 6061-T6 aluminum extrusions shop punched for up to 3 self drilling screws per clip and shop

faced with type 6T thermal break at subgirt and type 6U thermal break at stud side. Nominal depth shall be 203 mm nominal. .2 Thermal Breaks: type 6U at subgirt; ‘1659X’ firm, high-tensile cork neoprene tape by Jacobs& Thompson, 1.6 x 40 x65mm

pad, R value for pad is 0.15, shop installed with self-adhesive backer, and type 6T at metal stud; thermablok high performance silica aerogel insulation pad by Acoustiblok, 10x40x100 pad, R value for pad is 3.6, shop installed with self-adhesive backer.

.3 Clip Fasteners at subgirt: #12-14 x 25mm hexhead self-drilling screws, corrosion coating

.4 Clip Fasteners at metal stud: #1/4-14 x 38mm hexhead self-drilling screws, corrosion coating

.5 Subgirt: fabricated from minimum 1.26mm (0.050”) 18 ga x 50mm, Z275, grade A, galvanized steel plenum subgirts

.6 Vertical Plenum Channels: fabricated from minimum 1.26mm (0.050”) 18 ga x 25mm deep, Z275 grade A galvanized steel plenum subgirts painted both sides with ‘perspectra series QC18262 Black’

.7 Vent Screening: fabricated from 4’x10’x 0.040” perforated aluminum sheet pre-painted black. Perforation pattern shall be 3/16” dia. At ¼” staggered centres for 50% net free area.

Exterior Grade Sheathing: Shall be non-combustible conforming to CAN ULC S114, Type X, weather resistant with fibreglass matt face and back and water resistant treated core, 13mm (1/2”) thick equal to Dens Glass Fireguard Sheathing by Georgia Pacific, CGC Securerock or approved equal. Secured to wind loaded metal stud framing with bugle head fine thread corrosion resistant drill point drywall screws at spacing as defined by shop drawings prepared for this section, min size: #6, min. length: 32mm (1 ¼”).

Execution: Inspection of Site: Take site measurements to ensure that work is fabricated to fit surrounding construction around obstructions and

projections in place, or yet to be put in place to suit service locations, and inaccuracies of construction. General:

.1 Do welding in accordance with CSA W59.

.2 Do work in accordance with Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute, Lightweight Steel Framing Design manual, 2nd Edition.

.3 Erection: Erect components to requirements of reviewed shop drawings.

.4 Anchor tracks securely to structure at 2’-8” (800mm) o.c. maximum, unless lesser spacing prescribed on shop drawings.

.5 Erect studs plumb, aligned and securely attached with two (2) screws minimum, or welded in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

.6 Install studs at not more than 2” (50mm) from abutting walls, openings, and each side of corners and terminations with dissimilar materials.

.7 Touch up welds with coat of zinc rich primer.

.8 Erection Tolerances: Plumb: not to exceed 1/500th of member length. Camber: not to exceed 1/100th of member length. Spacing: not more than 1/8” (3mm) from design spacing.

Windloaded Metal Stud Installation .1 Install windloaded metal studs including top, bottom and deflection tracks, and horizontal blocking where required. .2 Locate windloaded metal stud system in accordance with architectural drawings and details. .3 Maximum spacing shall be 16” (400mm) on centre. .4 Comply with erection tolerances. .5 Comply with shop drawings that define system components and the type, location and spaces of fasteners. .6 All fasteners shall be countersunk

Exterior Grade Sheathing Installation .1 Install exterior grade sheathing on outside face of windloaded metal studs. .2 Comply with erection tolerances.

http://www.engineeredassemblies.com/


Page 39 of 141

.3 Comply with shop drawings that define system components and the type, location and spaces of fasteners.

.4 Where required cut panels to suit.

.5 Install panels in accordance with manufacturer detailed installation instructions.

.6 Provide tight joints between panels, not larger than ¼” (6mm) in width.

Subframing Thermal Spacer Installation .1 Install thermal spacers in accordance with the manufacturer’s detailed instructions. .2 Review installation of air / vapour barrier by section 07 27 13. Do not commence installation of the thermal clips until

installation of the vapour barrier is completed and has been reviewed by the Architect. .3 Locate clips to conform with shop drawings and coordinate with cladding systems to be applied to the building. .4 Align thermal clips with metal studs and install at locations and with fasteners as defined by the shop drawings. .5 Install subgirts to thermal clips using fasteners and at spacings as defined by the shop drawings. .6 Install mineral fibre insulation in accordance with section 07 21 00. Ensure joints between panel are tight and without an air

space. Do not install plenum channels or other materials that would cover up the installation of the insulation until the installation of the insulation has been reviewed by the Architect.

.7 Coordinate installation of the air barrier as defined by section 07 23 13.

.8 Install plenum channels to the subgirts using fasteners and at spacing as defined by the shop drawings. Final installation shall provide a 25mm deep venting plenum that is clear and open for air movement from the base to the top of the exterior wall.

.9 Form and install vent screens where required and detailed on the drawings.


Page 40 of 141

05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS

General: Scope: Provide required labour and materials to supply and install miscellaneous metals items and described on the drawings

including all miscellaneous metal items listed herein. Submittals:

.1 Retain a Professional Structural Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario to design miscellaneous metals items; to prepare, seal and sign shop drawings for system including load bearing and/or force-resulting components and perform field review of installed assemblies. Shop Drawings to indicate both design and installation requirements.

.2 Indicate design loads, member sizes, description of materials, design thickness / gauge, exclusive of coatings, connection and bracing details, screw sizes and spicing, and anchors as well as other pertinent data and information, for Consultant's review before fabrication.

.3 Indicate locations, dimensions, openings and requirements of related work.

.4 Indicate welds by welding symbols as defined in CSA W59.

.5 Submit copies of engineering calculations or data verifying the capacity of the members and the ability of the assemblies to meet the design requirements.

Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340, of all the work of this Section, including large-scale detail of

members and materials, of connection and jointing details, and of anchorage devices, dimensions, gauges, thicknesses, description of materials, metal finishing, as well as all other pertinent data and information, for Consultant's review before fabrication.

.2 Shop drawings of all load bearing and or force bearing, seismic (as defined by part 4 of the Ontario Building Code and item OBC 4.1.8.17) and/or force-resulting components shall bear the seal and signature of a Professional Structural Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario.

Product Delivery, Storage, and Protection: .1 Maintain protection provided for work of this Section from time of installation until final finishes are applied or to final clean up. .2 Protect prime-painted surfaces from damage. .3 Protect exposed surfaces of prefinished metal work which does not receive site finishing with protective coatings or wrappings.

Use materials recommended by finishers or manufacturers of metals, to ensure that method is sufficiently protective, easily removable, and harmless to the finish.

Products Products: Miscellaneous metals products to have the following characteristics;

.1 Welding must conform to CSA W59, S16.1 and W47.1. Protect combustible materials and finishes during welding operations.

.2 Reinforcing steel to conform to G30.18-M92 – Grade 400.

.3 Provide structural steel as noted on the drawings. Structural steel to conform to CAN/CSA G40.21M. .1 Wide Flanges: Grade 350W. .2 HSS Sections: Grade 350W, Class H for 102mm (4”) or larger sections, Class C for smaller sections. .3 Anchor Bolts: Grade 300W. .4 Other Steel: Grade 300W.

.4 Metals: .1 Steel: Structural: hot rolled to meet requirements of CAN3-G40.21, Grade 350W for plates, tubes and hollow sections.

Sheet: cold-rolled furniture steel, double annealed, mill stretched and levelled, and fully pickled. Otherwise, steel shall be hot-rolled or cold-rolled of alloy to suit needs of fabrication, use, and appearance.

.2 Exterior Steel: Hot dip galvanized conforming to CSA G164, minimum Z350 coating.

.3 Stainless Steel: Type 304 alloy conforming to ASTM A167, No. 4 finish. .5 Drilled concrete anchors (DCA) to be Hilti Kwik Bolts or equivalent. Drilled masonry anchors (DMA) to be Hilti SVA sleeve

anchors or equivalent. Pull test anchors to rated capacity and report results. .6 Provide 1/4” thick steel saddles at steel columns which support wood beams and lintels. .7 Submit shop drawings for miscellaneous structural steel and reinforcing for review prior to commencing fabrication. .8 Make field measurements necessary for fabrication and erection. .9 Prepare and submit shop drawings of miscellaneous metals items. Steel components and connections must be designed by a

Professional Engineer licensed in the province of Ontario and retained by the Contractor. Shop drawings for connection details must be submitted with the Engineer’s seal and signature.

.10 Bituminous Paint: Alkali-resisting to meet specified requirements of CAN/CGSB-1.108, Type 2.


Page 41 of 141

Design and Fabrication: .1 Generally:

.1 Fabricate work of this Section with machinery and tools specifically designed for the intended manufacturing processes, and with skilled tradesmen.

.2 Fit and assemble work in the shop. When this is not possible, make a trial shop assembly. .2 Construction:

.1 Fabricate work with materials, component sizes, metal gauges, reinforcing, anchors, and fasteners of adequate strength to withstand intended use, and with allowable design factors imposed by Jurisdictional Authorities.

.2 Ensure that work will remain free of warping, buckling, opening of joints and seams, distortion, and permanent deformation.

.3 Assembly: .1 Accurately cut, machine, and fit joints, corners, copes and mitres so that junctions between components fit together

tightly, and in true planes. .2 Fasten work with concealed methods, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. .3 Weld all connections where possible, and bolt where not possible, and cut off bolts flush with nuts. Countersink bolt

heads and provide method to prevent loosening of nuts. Ream holes drilled for fastenings. .4 Make welded joints tight, flush, and in true planes with base metals, and continuous at joints where entry of water into

building or into voids of members or assemblies is possible. Continuously grind and make smooth welds in exposed locations.

.5 Provide for differential movements within assemblies and at junctions of assemblies with surrounding work.

.6 Fabricate shims of steel of sizes required. .4 Finish Work:

.1 Provide holes and connections for work installed under other Sections of this Specification.

.2 Cleanly and smoothly finish exposed edges of materials, including holes.

.3 Cap open ends of sections exposed to view, such as pipes, channels, angles, and other similar work. .5 Prime Painting of Steel: Clean all loose mill scale, rust, dirt, weld flux, and spatter from work after fabrication. Grind smooth

sharp projections. Prepare for prime painting by blast cleaning to SSPC-SP6. Apply to steel a shop prime coat of paint. Work paint into corners, and onto open areas smoothly. Deliver work to site with primer undamaged. Paint all surfaces except those to be welded in field. Paint surfaces that are inaccessible to finish field painting with two coats of primer.

.6 List of Miscellaneous Metals: This Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: .1 Concealed support elements, anchors, bolts, inserts, sleeves, angles or other shapes cast in concrete, hangers,

supports, sleeves for work in this Section only. .2 Folding Partition supports as required by manufacturer. .3 Roof Ladder. .4 Lintels if not specified elsewhere. .5 Metal roof deck closers. .6 Steel plate vapour barrier tie-ins at new structural steel.

Execution: Inspection of Site:

.1 Take site measurements to ensure that work is fabricated to fit surrounding construction around obstructions and projections in place, or yet to be put in place to suit service locations, and inaccuracies of construction.

Installation: .1 Install work plumb, true, square, straight, level, and accurately and tightly fitted together and to surrounding work. .2 Work includes anchor bolts, bolts, washers and nuts, lag screws, expansion shields, toggles, straps, sleeves, brackets, clips,

shims and other items necessary for secure installation, as required to support and/or resist loads and forces, and as required by Jurisdictional Authorities.

.3 Provide anchors at 24” (600mm) o.c. for cast-in-place work unless shown otherwise.

.4 Attach work to wood by screws through countersunk holes in metal.

.5 Attach work to masonry with lead plugs and non-corrosion fastenings to support load with a safety factor of three (3).

.6 Insulate between dissimilar metals, or between metals and masonry or concrete with bituminous paint to prevent electrolysis. Patching and Refinishing:

.1 After erection, touch up prime paint finishes damaged or removed during installation.

.2 Remove damaged, dented, defaced, defectively finished, or tool-marked components and replace with new.

.3 Refinish shop-applied finishes in field only with approval of Consultant.

.4 Clean off dirt on surfaces resulting from installation work. Miscellaneous Items:

.1 Generally: .1 This schedule does not list all items included in work of this Section. Items not listed are shown on Drawings.


Page 42 of 141

.2 Ensure that all Drawings and Specification Sections, including those for structural, mechanical, and electrical work as applicable are consulted to establish the limits of work included in this Section.

.2 Support Elements and Framing: .1 Supply and install all support elements and framing as shown on the Drawings except where framing is part of building

structural steel. Construct supports from rolled steel sections assembled by welding. .2 Design supports to withstand, within acceptable deflection limitations, their own weight, the weight of the items to be

supported, loads imposed by the motion of supported items, where applicable, and all live loads, static and dynamic which might be applied to the supported items in the course of their normal function. Design supports with a safety factor of three (3). Design supports further as required to accommodate structural deflection.

.3 Provide all accessories, inserts and fixings necessary for attachment of supports to building structure. Drill supports, as required, to receive attachment of supported items. Arrange supports to avoid conflicts with pipes, ducts, connections, thermal and vapour barrier construction, framing provided under other sections, and such that supports and their fixings are fully concealed from view within the finished work.

.3 Exterior Roof Ladder and Cage: .1 Provide painted roof ladder and cage in location and in accordance with details indicated on the drawings.

05 51 00 - METAL STAIRS, HANDRAILS AND GUARDS

General: Scope: Provide engineering, labour and materials required to provide the metal stairs, handrails and guards systems for the project in

locations as scheduled and / or detailed on the drawings. .1 Design: Design work to comply with the Ontario Building Code. .2 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for work, including large-scale detail of members and materials, of connection and

jointing details, and of anchorage devices, dimensions, gauges, thicknesses, description of materials, metal finishing, as well as other pertinent data and information, for Consultant's review before fabrication. Shop drawings for work of this section to bear the seal and signature of a Structural Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario.

Products: General: Metals to be free from defects which impair strength or durability, or which are visible. Metals to be new, of best quality, and

free from rust, or waves, or buckles, clean, straight, and with sharply defined profiles. Select materials for surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes when exposed to view in finished unit. Exposed-to-view surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, "oil-canning", stains, discolourations, dents or other imperfections on finished units will not be acceptable.

Steel: For structural sections hot rolled to meet requirements of CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 350W or better. For sheet, cold-rolled furniture steel, double annealed, mill stretched and levelled, and fully pickled. Otherwise, steel to be hot-rolled or cold-rolled of alloy to suit needs of fabrication, use, and appearance.

Primers and Coatings: Interior Steel in Dry Areas: Quick drying oil alkyd conforming to CISC/CPMA 2.75. Fastenings: Nuts and bolts to conform to ASTM A307, A325, and A563 as applicable. For interior work: cadmium-plated fastenings

where other protection is not specified. Anchors and Shims: For exposed anchorage of steel, use stainless steel and otherwise to match metal anchored. For non-exposed

work, anchors and shims may be galvanized steel. Pipe and Tube: Ferrous steel pipe: to ASTM A53 / A53M, Type S- Seamless, Grades A and B. Ferrous steel square tube: to ASTM

A519, cold drawn, seamless and welded. Non-Shrink Grout: Where required provide CPD non-shrink grout, premixed, manufactured by CPD Construction Products Stair Nosing: Provide cast-in-place nosing inserts with photoluminescent strips, Provide continuous stair nosing set in concrete at

each landing and tread. .1 Approved product: ‘SA1071 Black Non-Slip’ by ECOGLO, Division of Kinesik Engineered Products.


.1 Design and Fabrication Requirements. .1 Fabricate this work with machinery and tools specifically designed for the intended manufacturing processes, and with

skilled tradesmen. .2 Fit and assemble work in the shop. When this is not possible, make a trial shop assembly. .3 Materials, component sizes, gauges of metals, anchorage and fastenings to be of adequate strength to withstand the

intended use within allowable design factors, as required by the Ontario Building Code, to ensure that work is free of warping, buckling, opening of joints and seams, distortion and permanent deformation. Stairs, ladders and handrails to support applicable live loads specified in the Ontario Building Code.


Page 43 of 141

.4 The details on the drawings show the general arrangement of components to provide the desired appearance. The fabricator to employ an Ontario Professional Structural Engineer to design the details of the guards, handrails and stairs, and the connections to the building structure, to satisfy the requirements of the Ontario Building Code.

.5 Ensure that work will remain free of warping, buckling, opening of joints and seams, distortion, and permanent deformation.

.2 Assembly: .1 Accurately cut, machine, and fit joints, corners, copes and mitres so that junctions between components fit together

tightly, and in true planes. .2 Fasten work with concealed methods, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. .3 Weld connections where possible, and bolt where not possible, and cut off bolts flush with nuts. Countersink bolt heads

and provide method to prevent loosening of nuts. Ream holes drilled for fastenings. .4 Make welded joints tight, flush, and in true planes with base metals, and continuous at joints where entry of water into

building or into voids of members or assemblies is possible. Continuously grind and make smooth welds in exposed locations.

.5 Provide for differential movements within assemblies and at junctions of assemblies with surrounding work.

.6 Fabricate shims of galvanized steel of sizes required. .3 Prime Painting of Ferrous Steel: Clean loose mill scale, rust, dirt, weld flux, and spatter from work after fabrication. Grind

smooth sharp projections. Prepare for prime painting by blast cleaning to SSPC-SP6 standard. Apply a shop prime coat of paint. Work paint into corners, and onto open areas smoothly. Deliver work to site with primer undamaged. Paint surfaces except those to be welded in the field, or those encased in concrete. Give surfaces that are inaccessible to finish field painting two (2) coats of primer.

.4 Finish Work: .1 Provide holes and connections for work installed under other Sections of this Specification. .2 Cleanly and smoothly finish exposed edges of materials, including holes. .3 Cap open ends of sections exposed to view, such as pipes, channels, angles, and other similar work.

.5 Railings Handrails and Guardrails .1 Provide handrails, railings, guardrails, clips, rod pickets, flanges and brackets to details shown. Minimum wall

thickness 12 gauge. .2 Form rail-to-end post connections and changes in rail direction by mitred joints or radius bends as applicable. .3 Remove burrs from exposed cut edges. Form bends and wall returns to uniform radius, free from buckles and twists,

with smooth finished surfaces, or use prefabricated bends. .4 Close exposed ends of pipe and tube by welding metal closure in place or by use of prefabricated fittings. .5 For posts set in concrete, furnish matching sleeves. .6 Work to be one piece or in as long lengths as possible. Join pipe sections using concealed connectors. .7 Weld field joints, grind and polish smooth to match base metal. .8 Extend handrails horizontally at sides of stairs and ramps in accordance with Article 3.4.7.5 of the O.B.C.

.6 Stairs: .1 The method of stair construction to conform to the Consultant's drawings and reviewed shop drawings. Framing to not

restrict required width or headroom. Weld connections where possible; where not possible, bolted connections will be permitted, but bolts to be cut off flush with nuts and made as inconspicuous as possible.

.2 Fabricate stairs to facilitate erection as building is ready to receive them.

.3 Provide carborundum strips at stair nosing as detailed. .7 Inspection of Site: Take site measurements to ensure that work is fabricated to fit surrounding construction around obstructions

and projections in place, or yet to be put in place to suit service locations, and inaccuracies of construction. .8 Installation:

.1 Install work plumb, true, square, straight, level, and accurately and tightly fitted together and to surrounding work.

.2 Work includes anchor bolts, bolts, washers and nuts, lag screws, expansion shields, toggles, straps, sleeve brackets, clips, shims and other items necessary for secure installation, as required to support and/or resist loads and forces, and as required by Jurisdictional Authorities.

.3 Insulate between dissimilar metals, or between metals and masonry or concrete with bituminous paint to prevent electrolysis.

.4 Provide temporary supports and bracing required to position stair assemblies. .9 Patching and Refinishing:

.1 After erection, touch up prime paint, and shop applied coatings and finishes damaged or removed during installation.

.2 Remove damaged, dented, defaced, defectively finished, or tool-marked components and replace with new.

.3 Clean off dirt on surfaces resulting from installation work.


Page 44 of 141

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS + COMPOSITES

06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

General: Rough Carpentry systems and materials to be provided in accordance with the following;

.1 Scope: Provide required labour and materials to supply and install rough carpentry items and described on the drawings including the rough carpentry items listed herein.


.1 Except as indicated or specified otherwise lumber to be softwood S4S, SPF Species moisture content (MC) not greater than 19% at time of installation in accordance with the following standards; .1 CSA 0141. .2 NLGA Standard grading rules for Canadian Lumber.

.2 Machine stress - rated lumber is acceptable for purposes.

.3 Lumber: .1 S-DRY, graded and stamped to National Lumber Grades Authority, Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber.

.1 Studs: No. 1/No. 2 (SPF), 121c. "STUD".

.2 Blocking, furring, strapping, battens, nailers, bracing, and bridging: spruce, pine or fir (SPF), standard or better grade.

.4 Plywood: Canadian softwood plywood conforming to CSA 0151, "G1S". .1 Pressure Treated Plywood: Pressure treated plywood conform to CSA 0151, “G1S”.

.5 Nails, Spikes, Staples and Other Connectors: to CSA B111, galvanized for exterior work, interior highly humid areas and for treated lumber; plain finish elsewhere.

.6 Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Screws and Pin Type Fasteners: Hot dip galvanized to CAN/CSA G164 for exterior work. Elsewhere for sight exposed surfaces, prime paint. Use surface fastenings of following types, except where specified type is indicated: .1 To hollow masonry, gypsum board and panel surfaces use toggle bolts. .2 To solid masonry and concrete use expansion shield with lag screw, or lead plug with wood screw.

Fabrication: .1 Comply with CAN3-086 or CAN3-086.1 for fabrication and assembly of structural components off site, or on site. .2 Design construction details for expansion and contraction of materials. .3 Machine sand surfaces exposed in the finished work. Hand sand to an even smooth surface free from scratches. .4 List of Rough Carpentry Items: This Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

.1 Concealed support elements, anchors, bolts, inserts, sleeves for work in this section.

.2 Wood Blocking for Millwork: Provide wood blocking on and within partitions as required to support millwork and other wall mounted specialty items.

.3 Plywood Roof Sheathing: Provide 12.5mm thick T+G plywood exterior grade sheathing and required fasteners over roof truss system as detailed on the drawings. Refer to Structural Documents.

.4 Provide 19mm thick exterior grade plywood sheathing at fascia as detailed in the drawings.

.5 Provide 16mm exterior grade plywood sheathing and 2” x 6” pressure treated wood framing at windowsill, jambs and heads as detailed on the drawings.

.6 Pressure treated lumber; 2” x 4”, 1”x 6” for the construction of the garbage enclosure.

.7 Wood framing at window openings: Provide 16mm thick exterior grade plywood sheathing and pressure treated wood framing in dimensions as detailed on the drawings around window opening.

Execution: Examination

.1 Examine areas of work of this section, report any discrepancies and unsatisfactory conditions to the consultant, commencement of work implies acceptance of conditions.

General: .1 Lay out work carefully and to accommodate work of others. Cut and fit accurately. Erect in position indicated on drawings.

Align, level, square, plumb and secure work permanently in place. Join work only over solid backing. .2 Bore holes true to line, and to same size as bolts. Drive bolts into place for snug fit, and use plates or washers for bolt heads

and nut bearings. Turn up bolts and lag screws tightly when installed, and again just before being concealed by other work or at completion of work.

.3 Co-operate with work of other Sections to ensure that unity of actions will ensure orderly progress to meet construction schedule.


Page 45 of 141

.4 Provide anchors, bolts and inserts required for attachment of the work of this Section to those performing the work of other Sections, and who are responsible for their installation.

.5 Work to include such rough hardware as nails, bolts, nuts, washers, screws, clips, hangers, connectors, and strap iron required for installation of work, and operating hardware required on work of this Section for temporary work.

Grounds, Blocking, Strapping, Furring, Sleepers and Nailers: .1 Do not regard grounds, blocking, furring, and such other fastening provisions as shown on drawings as exact or complete.

Provide required provisions for fastenings, located and secured to suit site conditions and adequate for intended support. .2 Cut fastening work into lengths as long as practicable, and with square ends. Erect work plumb, in true planes, and fastened

rigidly in place. .3 Provide wood furring and strapping for applied facings, caseworks, etc. .4 Except where steel is specifically shown, provide wood blocking and supports in metal stud partitions for fastening of items

anchored to stud partitions. Provide wood blocking and supplementary supports in metal studs supporting counters and similar items.

.5 Co-ordinate with Section 09 21 16, for the installation of wood blocking for fastening of wall mounted accessories and casework.

06 20 00 – FINISH CARPENTRY

General: Scope: Provide required labour and materials to supply and install finish carpentry items and described on the drawings. Submittals:

.1 Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings to Consultant in accordance with Section 01 33 00, for casework, and casework hardware,

handrails, guards and other fabrications. .2 Clearly indicate the material being supplied and show connections, attachments, reinforcing, anchorage and location of

exposed fastenings. .2 Samples:

.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

.2 Submit samples of exposed hardware, plywood veneers, plastic laminate Quality Standard:

.1 Millwork to conform to the Premium Grade requirements of the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC), Quality Standards For Architectural Woodwork, latest edition, except where more stringent requirements are specified otherwise.

.2 For conditioning and storage of plastic laminate materials, manufacturing techniques, and choice of appropriate glues to suit atmospheric conditions to be encountered, conform to CSA Standard CAN3-A172-M79.

Single Source Responsibility: .1 It is the intent of this section to establish a single, competent source to be responsible for the supply and installation of finished

panels which conform to the flame spread rating requirement specified. Qualified Architectural Millwork Shops:

.1 Qualifications: Work of this Section to be executed by manufacturer and tradesmen with experience in successful manufacture and installation of this type of work and of quality as indicated on drawings and as specified. Submit proof of such experience, with list of installations, upon request by Consultant.

Job Conditions: .1 Visit premises and take field measurements necessary to ensure proper fitting of the work of this Section with field conditions

in the building. .2 Do cutting and fitting and prepare components to receive and accommodate work of other Sections.

Delivery, Storage And Handling: .1 Provide protective coverings of suitable material for plastic laminate items; take special precautions at corners. .2 If required, store millwork items in temperature and humidity controlled area until delivery. .3 Do not permit delivery of millwork to Site until area is sufficiently dry so that woodwork will not be damaged by excessive

changes in moisture control. Warranty:

.1 Submit a warranty covering the maintenance, repair or replacement of defective work for a period of one (1) years from the expiration of the standard one (1) year warranty included in the Contract under the General Conditions.

.2 Structural failure, loosening, fading, discolouration, deforming and failure of millwork units to be judged as defective work.

.3 Total warranty period to be two (2) years.


Page 46 of 141


.1 General: .1 Where the designation "NLGA" appears hereinafter, it to mean NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber,

approved by the Canadian Lumber Standards Accreditation Board. .2 Kiln dry lumber to maximum 8% moisture content.

.2 Casework Framing: Pine, NLGA 115a, No. 1 common.

.3 Nailing Strips, Blocking, Furring and Strapping: NLGA 122c, "Standard" light framing.

.4 Hardwood Plywood: Conform to CSA 0115.

.5 Core for Plastic Laminate and Melamine: Plywood conforming to CSA 0121, G2S.

.6 Nails, Spikes and Staples: To CSA B111. Galvanized for exterior work, interior highly-humid areas and for treated lumber; plain finish elsewhere. Use spiral thread nails, except where specified otherwise.

.7 Glue for Wood Furniture and Assemblies: CSA O112.4 M, polyvinyl adhesive.

.8 Glue for High Humidity Areas: CSA O112.5 M, Type II, moisture resistant urea formaldehyde resin adhesive.

.9 Tempered Hardboard: To CAN/CGSB 11-GP-3-M87, Type 2. Plastic Laminate:

.1 Conforming to CAN3-A172, General Purpose - standard grade (GP-S), 1.6mm (1/16") thick for tops, Post Forming - Standard Grade (PF-S) 1.6mm (1/16") thick for post forming. Balance panels with 0.75mm (1/32") backing sheet (BK).

.2 Use waterproof adhesive capable of holding materials together without failure.

.3 Finish to be "Satin" or "Suede" by Arborite or equivalent manufactured by Formica Canada Inc., Wilsonart Canada, Nevamar or Pionite.

.4 Plastic Laminate colour to be selected by the Architect at a later date.

.5 Provide post formed countertops and backsplashes in accordance with the drawings. Hardwood Trim:

.1 Hardwood trim to be white birch, in dimensions as noted on the drawings. Hardwood trim to be 6mm thick x width of plywood. Hardwood Veneer Plywood:

.1 Hardwood veneer to be white birch, rift cut veneer flitches only. Rotary cut birch flitches will not be accepted. Cabinet Hardware:

.1 Hardware for 19mm (3/4") thick flush overlay doors: .1 Hinges: Blum 90 Series or equal by Hafele or Richelieu, fully concealed adjustable, articulated, metal hinges, screw-on

type, models as applicable for door type opening swing, etc. Supply 170 opening hinges unless specifically indicated otherwise or unless cabinet details make impractical (i.e. inside 90 degree corners with adjacent doors).

.2 Door Pulls: 8mm (5/16”) diameter x 100mm (4”) length, satin stainless steel as manufactured by Blum or equivalent by Richelieu or Hafele.

.2 Hardware for Shelves: .1 Typical adjustable shelf supports: For adjustable shelving in cabinets indicated and where shelves have abutting end

supports provide steel pilaster strips equivalent to Knape & Vogt 255 in lengths to suit complete with Knape & Vogt 256 pilaster clips.

.2 Adjustable supports for exposed millwork shelves: For adjustable shelving in exposed gables provide 3/16” (5mm) diameter plug-in pins complete with stop equivalent to Hafele Catalogue No. 282.42.702.

.3 Hardware for Drawers: .1 Drawer Pulls: 5/16” (8mm) diameter x 4” (100mm) length, satin stainless steel as manufactured by Canadian Builders

Hardware or equivalent by Richelieu, Gallery, or Stanley. .2 Drawer Extensions: drawers up to 3” (75mm) deep and 16” (400mm) wide to be fitted with single extension box drawer

slide equivalent to Knape & Vogt 8300. Other drawers to be fitted with full extension file drawer slide equivalent to Knape & Vogt 8500.

.3 Closet Rod and Flanges: Provide in closets as indicated 1-1/4” (31mm) o.d. stainless steel coat rod equivalent to Canadian Builders Hardware CBH 762 complete with CBH 752 mounting flanges and intermediate supports as required.

.4 Grommets: Richelieu Martin cable entry plug Model "60.2700.90", or Doug Mockett and Company type "SG" distributed by Trillium Hardware, colour black, 2” (50mm) diameter. Allow for twenty (20) to be installed in locations as directed by Consultant.

.5 Exposed Fasteners: for securing plywood guards, panelling, etc. as indicated to be 3/8” (10mm) diameter stainless steel hex socket cap bolts and domed cap nuts complete with cup washers.

.4 Locks: .1 Locks for cabinet doors to be Rim Lock, pin tumbler, solid brass, and nickel finish, with striker plates and duplicated

keys, locks in one room to be keyed alike, product no 346510180 as manufactured by Richelieu, www.richelieu.com. .2 Locks for drawer units to be Drawer Lock, pin tumbler, solid brass, and chrome finish, with striker plates and duplicated

keys, locks in one room to be keyed alike, product no 313153140 as manufactured by Richelieu. www.richelieu.com.


Page 47 of 141

Hardware for solid core wood doors in millwork: .1 Refer to hardware schedule in Section 08 71 00 – Finish Hardware.

Fabrication: .1 General Workmanship:

.1 Fabricate work in accordance with the best practice by skilled craftsmen of companies specializing in the work specified and to the requirements of other trades.

.2 Use running members in greatest lengths obtainable.

.3 Machine-dressed work to be slow fed using sharp cutters and the finished work to be free from drag, feathers, slivers or roughness of any kind. Remove machine marks by sanding.

.4 In finished work, machine-sand exposed surfaces in the shop and hand-sand on the job to even smooth surfaces, free from scratches, ready for finishing.

.5 Frame materials with tight joints rigidly held in place. Use glue blocks where necessary.

.6 Assemble work in shop and deliver to job ready for installation as far as practicable. Leave ample allowance for fitting and scribing on the job.

.7 Take care to prevent the opening up of glue lines in the finished work.

.8 Joints made on the on the job to be equal in quality and workmanship to joints made in the shop.

.9 Finish exposed edges of plywood and particleboard with matching veneer edge banding typical, glued in place. Use 1/4” (6mm) solid stock where indicated.

.10 Glue and blind screw or nail work unless otherwise specified. Set surface nails and plug surface screws with wood plugs of material to match surface.

.11 Glues to be waterproof and of type suitable for work to be joined. Refer to glue manufacturer's recommendations for lumber moisture content, glue shelf life, pot life, working life, mixing, spreading, assembly time, time under pressure and ambient temperature.

.12 Moisture content of interior woodwork to be not less than 4% nor more than 8%.

.13 Accurately scribe, cope, and mitre members where required.

.14 Erect work plumb, level, square, and to the required lines.

.15 Fabricate finished woodwork in the building free from bruises, blemishes, mineral marks, knots, shakes and other defects.

.16 Be responsible for methods of construction, and for ensuring that materials are rigidly and securely attached and will not be loosened by the work of other trades.

.17 Take field dimensions and fabricate work to suit field dimensions.

.18 Fasten wood nailers, blocking, framing, and strapping solidly to adjacent materials in true planes.

.19 Do not permit delivery of this work to the site until the area is sufficiently dry so that woodwork will not be damaged by excessive changes in moisture content.

.20 Provide blocking coming in direct contact with millwork in accordance with applicable provisions set forth herein.

.21 Provide drilled holes at 1-1/4” (32mm) o.c. vertically in fitment gables scheduled to receive pins for adjustable shelves. .2 Millwork:

.1 Construct units as detailed and specified herein.

.2 Fit drawers with stops to prevent tipping or complete withdrawal.

.3 Use plywood for countertops, fronts, backs, bottoms, gable divisions, shelves and doors.

.4 Drawer sides, backs and bottoms to be 1/2” (13mm) thick veneer plywood as scheduled and detailed. Drawer fronts to be 5/8” (16mm) thick veneer plywood as scheduled and detailed.

.5 Provide veneer edge banding on four sides of drawer fronts and doors and adjustable shelves; exposed edges of fixed shelving; exposed edges of cabinets including those behind drawer fronts and swing doors.

.6 Provide miscellaneous cut-outs in backs of millwork to accommodate electrical cords, telephone cords, etc., and provide purpose-made grommets.

.3 Veneered Panels and Millwork: .1 Material for interior millwork to be hardwood plywood with wood veneer, as shown, and specified herein, for gables,

shelves, backs, and division’s tops and wherever sheet laminated material is shown, unless indicated to be of plastic laminate, and solid wood to match adjacent veneer, where solid material is indicated. Note veneer plywood panels at guards to be plywood core.

.2 To prevent warping use a backing veneer of same thickness as face. Apply backing veneer using the same application techniques such as application rate, method of application, drying techniques and finish. Provide backing sheet of sufficient thickness to compensate stresses caused by facing sheet. Apply uniform coating of sealer on exposed veneered edges.

.3 Semi Exposed Parts: Interior of cabinetwork except drawers, but including drawer fronts, to match exposed parts except where indicated otherwise on Drawings or in schedules and except where specified otherwise. Drawer bottoms and dividers to be oak plywood unless noted otherwise. Semi exposed drawer fronts to match exposed species and drawer fronts to cover spaces between gables and drawer sides.


Page 48 of 141

.4 Doors and Drawer Fronts: to be 3/4” (19mm) thick with veneered plywood. Door and drawer faces to be of same species and cut as exposed plywood used for case. Provide edge bands on four sides of doors as specified. Face veneer to be vertical. Drawers to be fitted with sliding hardware and to be fully removable.

.5 Provide cut-outs as required for inserts, fixtures and fittings. Use radius corner and chamfer edges around cut-outs.

.6 Use specified exposed mechanical fasteners to attach wood panels to strapping in walls in accordance with details. .4 Plastic Laminate Faced Work:

.1 Provide cores of not less than 5/8” (16mm) nominal thickness.

.2 Apply backing sheet to laminated flatwork. Supply uniform coating of sealer on exposed edges. Provide backing sheet of sufficient thickness to compensate stresses caused by facing sheet.

.3 Self-edge, straight line edging with 1/16" (1.6mm) standard material and radius corners with post forming material, apply with same adhesive as facing sheet. Chamfer edges uniformly at approximately 20 degrees, using machine router.

.4 Locate joints at 8’-0” to 10’-0” (2400mm to 3000mm) o.c. At 'L' shaped corners mitre plastic laminate, to outside corners. Accurately fit member together to provide tight and flush butt joints, in true planes. Provide 1/4” (6mm) blind spline and approved type draw bolts. Provide one (1) draw bolt for widths up to 6” (150mm). For width exceeding 6” (150mm), provide draw bolts at maximum 10” (250mm) centres. Colour match adjoining units.

.5 Provide cut outs as required for inserts, fixtures and fittings. Use radius corners and chamfered edges around cut outs to avoid chipping laminate.

.6 Post form laminate work to details indicated. Provide same core and laminate profiles to provide continuous support and bond for entire surface.

.7 Assemble work, true and square. Arrange adjacent parts of continuous laminate work to match in colour and pattern. Factory Applied Millwork Finish:

.1 Maple veneer millwork, wood veneer panels and solid wood fitments to have factory applied finish installed in accordance with Part 5 of the AWMAC Quality Standards.

.2 Finish to be semi-transparent stain in custom colour selected by the Architect and consisting of: One (1) coat oil stain, one (1) coat sanding sealer, sanded lightly. Apply two (2) finish coats of clear standard or catalysed lacquer, at architectural woodwork manufacturer’s option, satin finish.

.3 Submit to the Consultant two (2) – 12” x 24” (300mm x 600mm) representative sample panels illustrating finish for approval. Shop finished surfaces to closely match the approved samples in respects.

.4 Apply finishes evenly, and consistently throughout with no lighter or darker areas or blotches.

.5 Sheen to be consistent throughout.

.6 Fill nail holes and blemishes to closely match and blend with finish so as to be as inconspicuous as possible.

.7 Surfaces to be consistently smooth and even with no "orange peel", runs, sags, skips, drips, or rough areas.

.8 To prevent warping of veneer panels apply finish to surfaces including backs and edges.

.9 Prior to shipment to the site suitably protect millwork and fitments from possible damage prior to installation. Maintain protection of millwork on site after installation.


.1 Strips and Blocking: .1 Where wood is to be fastened to masonry, supply metal nailing plugs to masonry section, for building into masonry

joints. .2 Provide and install wood strips required for attaching the work of other Sections. .3 Provide and install wood blocking required.

.2 Carpentry and Millwork: .1 Install carpentry and millwork items as detailed. .2 Execute installations and assemble work on the job using skilled forces, under supervision of competent joinery

foreman. .3 Adequately fasten units and secure in place with concealed fixings wherever possible. Include grounds and furring

where required. .4 Install casework level, plumb, true, and complete in respects. Shim as necessary with concealed shims. Accurately

scribe and closely fit face plates, filler strips and trim to irregularities of adjacent surfaces. .5 Installation to conform to AWMAC and latest revision of specified standards. .6 Install casework finish hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

.3 Plastic Laminate: .1 Apply plastic laminate coverings in accordance with CSA Standard CAN3-A172-M79 and manufacturer's directions.

Finish exposed edges around cut outs such as sinks, in plastic laminate. Apply laminate backing sheets on back face of material on which plastic laminate facing sheets are applied to minimize twist. Use the same adhesive and


Page 49 of 141

application techniques such as application rate, method of application, drying techniques, for bonding front and back laminates.

.2 Bond plastic laminate using urea formaldehyde glue to 3/4" (19mm) thick, 7 ply, poplar-faced, phenolic-bonded plywood or high-density particleboard. Self-edging to be 3/32" (2mm) material, electro-pressure-sealed and with edges bevelled.

.3 Joints in plastic laminate will not be permitted except in pieces exceeding 8’-0” (2400mm) in length. Butt joints tightly together, and reinforce with 1/4” (6mm) hardwood blind spline. Lock securely with draw bolt type fasteners at maximum of 3” (75mm) from edges. Apply backing sheet to plywood.

.4 When cutting holes in plastic laminate work, corners to be rounded and filed smooth.

.5 Do not remove paper protection until final cleaning.

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL + MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 10 00 – WATERPROOFING

General: Provide labour and materials as required to supply and install waterproofing membrane as follows:

Products: Waterproofing Membrane: Apply ‘Blueskin WP 200’ self-adhesive, SBS rubberized asphalt waterproofing membrane as

manufactured by Henry Company or approved equal, conforming to the requirements of CCMC 13297-R. System to have the following characteristics; .1 Thickness: 60mill (1.5mm) .2 Application temp (min): -3 degC .3 Water vapour permeance: 0.02 perms; ASTM E96 / E96M. .4 Tensile strength; 325psi; ASTM D903.

Primer: Before applying primer ensure surface is dry and free from dust, dirt, grease, oil, excess mortar/grout and other foreign matter. Prime surface with ‘Aquatac Emulsion Primer’ as manufactured by Henry Company. Apply with spray and/or roller at a rate of 7m2/litre (300ft2/3.78L can). Allow for manufacturer’s recommended dry time. Primed surfaces not covered by membrane during the same working day must be reprimed. Install at temperatures above –3degC.

Protection Board: Provide Henry DB Drain Boards covering waterproof membrane.

Execution: Brush clean surface. Surfaces must be clean of oil, wax, pigments, dust and excess mortar. Concrete / grout must be free of frost and cured for a minimum of 7 days prior to installation of waterproofing. Pre-treat cracks in surface 1.5mm to 3mm wide with Henry 925 BES Sealant filling crack. Surface must be smooth and without large voids, spalled areas, sharp protrusions or discontinuous surfaces. Remove protrusions. Strike masonry joints full-flush. Fill voids and smooth discontinuous surfaces with non-shrink, dry packed grout. Allow grout to set completely. Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions for waterproofing membrane. Provide 65mm (2.5”) laps at both sides and 75mm (3”) at ends. Inside Corners: Horizontal to vertical inside corner transition areas are to be pretreated with Henry 925 BES Sealant fillet extending

19mm (3/4”) vertically and horizontally from the corner. Apply a 225mm (9”) wide strip centered at this joint. Outside Corners: outside corner transition areas are to be pretreated with a 225mm (9”) wide strip centered at this joint. Drains: At drains, apply waterproofing membrane collar centered on drain and extend 6” beyond flange onto deck. Apply field

membrane in full width centered over drain. Apply clamping ring in a 60-mil bed of 925 BES Sealant Projections: Extend waterproof membrane tight to projection and seal with 925 BES Sealant extending 2” along projection and 2” onto

waterproof membrane. Apply waterproofing membrane to prepared substrate in lengths of 8’ or less. Apply vertical rows in a shingle fashion. Roll laps with a counter top roller to effect seal. Provide 2 ½” laps at both sides and ends. Position for alignment and remove protective film. Press firmly into place. Promptly roll laps

with a counter top roller to effect seal. If more than one length is required on a vertical surface, apply a shingle fashion. Terminate membrane using 925 BES Sealant and as indicated. Laps are to be sealed with 925 BES Sealant. Install at temperature above -5 degC. Install protection board to cover parts of the installed waterproof membrane prior to placing backfill.


Page 50 of 141

07 11 13 – BITUMINOUS DAMPROOFING

General: Provide labour and materials as required to supply and install bituminous dampproofing as follows in this Section.

Products: Bituminous Dampproofing: Apply ‘Henry / Henry Company 700-01 Waterproofing Asphalt Emulsion’ or equal by WR Meadows, in

locations as noted on the drawings. System to have the following characteristics; .1 Reference standard: CAN/CGSB 37.2 - Emulsified Asphalt, Mineral Colloid Type, Unfilled, For Dampproofing and

Waterproofing and for Roof Coatings. .2 Weight: 1.0kg / l (8.3 lbs./US Gallon). .3 Coverage 0.5 to 1.5l/m2. .4 Application temp (min): 5 degC. .5 Water vapour permeance: 0.14 perms; ASTM E96.

Execution: Install in accordance with reference standard CAN/CGSB-37.3 - Application for Emulsified Asphalts for Dampproofing or

Waterproofing and in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

Maintain air temperature and substrate temperature at dampproofing installation area above 5C for 24 hours before, during and 24 hours after installation.

Do not proceed with work when wind chill effect would tend to set bitumen before proper curing takes place, or would prevent thorough adhesion of bitumen.

Brush clean surface. Surfaces must be clean of oil, wax, pigments, dust and excess mortar. Concrete / grout must be free of frost and cured for a minimum of 7 days prior to installation of primer. Do not apply dampproofing in wet weather or when surfaces are not free of frost and/or ice. Dry surfaces should be dampened with water just prior to application of the coating to improve bond. Apply 700-01 at the rate of 1.5 l/m2 and let dry. Terminate top of dampproofing 100mm (4”) below finished grades as shown on drawings. Extend dampproofing down to base of

footing. Apply coatings leaving no pinholes, breaks, or other defects. Apply two (2) additional coats to vertical corners and construction joints for a minimum width of 200mm (8") on each side, and around

and for 200mm (8") along pipes passing through walls. Protect from freezing until material has cured. Work of this Section to be inspected and approved by Consultant prior to application of insulation or backfilling of foundation walls.


Page 51 of 141

07 16 00 – CHRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING – BARRIER LIFT PIT WATERPROOFING

General: Scope:

.1 Provide crystalline waterproofing mix to floor and inside wall surfaces of elevator pit.

.2 Apply water-stop to cold joints in concrete.

.3 Seal oversize cracks and seal around foundation penetrations. References:

.1 ASTM C39/ C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens;.

.2 ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete;.

.3 ASTM C666 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing;.

.4 BS 5075-2: – Concrete Admixtures: Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures.

.5 ASTM E329 – Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction; 1998a.

.6 COE CRD-C 48 - Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Concrete.

.7 AASHTO T277 – Standard Method to Test for Rapid Determination of Chloride Permeability of Concrete.

.8 NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. Submittals:

.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.

.2 Product Literature: Manufacturer’s descriptive product literature to be submitted and consist of detailed specifications, available performance test data and instructions for additive addition.

.3 Certified Laboratory Test Reports – Before delivery of materials, provide copies of reports of tests specified herein or in reference publications for review.

.4 Test reports will be accompanied by certificates from the manufacturer certifying that the previously tested material is of the same type, quality and make as that proposed for this project.

.5 References: Product must have a history of over 15 years of successful use and must be accompanied by a list of job sites of a similar nature.

Quality Assurance: .1 Prior to installation, hold a meeting of relevant parties required for successful installation of waterproofing products to verify

installation methods and warranty requirements. Relevant parties may include the waterproofing installer, installers of adjacent work or work penetrating waterproofing, manufacturer’s representative and project engineer/architect.

Environmental Requirements: .1 Maintain air temperature and structural base temperature at waterproofing installation area above 5 degC for 72 hr. before,

during and 72 hr. after installation. .2 Take personal safety precautions when handling and installing materials. .3 Schedule work such that membrane will not be left exposed to weather for longer than that recommended by the manufacturer.

Delivery, Storage And Handling: .1 Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged packages bearing the manufacturer’s name, brand

designation and batch number. .2 Store materials in a dry storage area to avoid contact with moisture.

Warranty: .1 Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty document authorized by manufacturer’s representative for 25-year material warranty

from date of substantial completion.

Products: Applied Waterproofing Systems:

.1 Crystalline slurry compound: non-shrink compound composed Portland cement, very fine, treated silica sand and various active proprietary chemicals to be applied to horizontal floor surface in elevator pits. .1 Approved products:

.1 “Xypex Concentrate” by Xypex Chemicals (Canada) Ltd.

.2 “Krystol T1 AND T2” by Kryton Group of Companies.

.3 Or approved alternative. .2 Water Stops: Waterstop Tapes at horizontal and vertical construction cold joints and around perimeter of each slab pour area.

.1 Approved Product: .1 "Xypex Concentrate" by Xypex .2 "K-322" Waterstop Grout by Kryton .3 “Waterstop XP” by Cetco .4 or approved alternative.


Page 52 of 141

.3 Seal for Through-wall Penetrations: Hydrophilic waterstop, single component grey urethane paste, wrap around exterior near the centre of penetrations through concrete. .1 Approved products: Ultra Seal P-201by ADEKA or approved alternates .2 Use Ultra Seal MC-2005T by ADEKA if pipe diameter exceeds 300mm (12”) or use MC-2010MN if diameter is greater

than 600mm (24”). .4 Plugs: for sealing cracks and tie-holes.

.1 Approved products: .1 "Patch 'n Plug" by Xypex. .2 “Krystol Crack Repair” by Kryton.

.5 Portland cement: to CAN3-A5-M83.

.6 Silica sand: to CAN3-A23.1-M77.

.7 Water: potable.


.1 Concrete must be cured a minimum of 28 days before applying paint or other coatings. Surface preparation and application should follow guidelines supplied by the paint/coating’s manufacturer.

Surface Perpetration: .1 Clean surfaces to receive waterproofing. Remove dust, dirt, wax, oil and grease.

.1 Fill in surface irregularities.

.2 Cut out tie wires to a depth of 38mm (1/2”).

.3 Rake out holes, honeycombs, open joints and porous areas.

.4 Make cuts square or under cut to a depth of 25mm to 38mm (1” to 1-1/2”).

.5 Cut cracks to a minimum width of 25mm (1”).

.6 Do not cut V-grooves or cone shaped recesses.

.7 Clean out areas thoroughly with wire brush and by vacuuming.

.8 Moisten thoroughly with water.

.9 Fill openings solidly with plugging mix or dry pack mix. .2 Provide cementitious patching at the following locations:

.1 Form tie holes (cones).

.2 Any cracks in foundation walls or slab on grade.

.3 Any faulty construction joints.

.4 Walls and floors of elevator shafts to top of slab at grade.

.5 Apply dry pack mix to form cove at junctions of floor/wall and floor/column.

.6 Pack continuous grooves around pipe and drain penetrations with dry pack and strike flush. Barrier Free Lift Pit:

.1 Perform waterproofing work in accordance with manufacturer’s written application instructions.

.2 Continuously dampen surface to receive initial waterproof brush coat for minimum of 1 hour before application.

.3 Curing between coats: spray each coat with fine fog spray to keep damp during crystallization period.

.4 Apply slurry coat to floor of elevator pit sloping toward drain.

.5 Apply with stiff bristle brush. Work coat into surface. Minimum interval between coats, 24 hours. Do not apply subsequent coat until previous coat has completely cured.

.6 Waterproofing brush coats: minimum total surface coverage rate of 1 kg/m2 for concentrated first coat and 0.8 kg/m2 for second coat.

.7 Heavy Duty Application (Vertical and Horizontal Applications) .1 Apply a prime coat of primary waterproofing membrane diluted by 25% by volume with clean water at the rate of

approximately 1.2 gal/100ft2 and allow to dry. .2 Apply a full and continuous coat of primary waterproofing membrane at approximately 1.2 gal/100ft2 and embed fabric

reinforcement into coating ensuring no fishmouths or wrinkles are created and allow to set. .3 Extend and overlap fabric reinforcement 2 inches at joints. Allow membrane to fully cure/dry prior to subsequent

application coatings. .4 Apply second full and continuous coat of primary waterproofing membrane at 2.4 gal./100ft.2 and allow to cure. .5 At corners, angles and junctions of foundation walls & footings, reinforce with 2 extra plies of fabric embedded in wet

mastic. Construction Joints:

.1 Form construction joints in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings. Where additional joints not indicated on Shop Drawings are required, obtain approval in advance from the Consultant.

.2 Locate joints where they least impair strength and appearance of structure.

.3 Construction joints: Comply with requirements of CSA Standard A23.1, Clause 20.


Page 53 of 141

.4 Provide a key at vertical construction joints, at perimeter of slab at foundation wall and internal slab joints between pours and at column construction joints.

.5 Clean horizontal joints and roughen. Roughen control joints to depth of 13mm (1/2”) minimum. Provide key between footing and foundation wall.

.6 Reinforcing steel to be continuous across joints unless otherwise noted.

.7 Surface of concrete at joints to be thoroughly cleaned and laitance removed.

.8 Provide waterstop as specified at construction joints prior to building formwork.

.9 Install waterstops at cold joints lapping each strip within pour area and with adjacent pours where they intersect. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s latest written instructions.

Cracks, Tie Holes and Penetrations: .1 Clean surfaces to receive waterproofing. Remove dust, dirt, wax, oil and grease.

.1 Fill in surface irregularities.

.2 Cut out tie wires to a depth of 38mm (1-1/2”).

.3 Rake out holes, honeycombs, open joints and porous areas.

.4 Make cuts square or under cut to a depth of 25mm to 38mm (1” to 1-1/2”).

.5 Cut cracks to a minimum width of 25mm (1”).

.6 Do not cut V-grooves or cone shaped recesses.

.7 Clean out areas thoroughly with wire brush and by vacuuming.

.8 Moisten thoroughly with water.

.9 Fill openings solidly with plugging mix or dry pack mix. .2 Provide cementitious patching at the following locations:

.1 Form tie holes (cones).

.2 Any cracks in foundation walls or slab on grade.

.3 Any faulty construction joints.

.4 Walls and floors of elevator shafts to top of slab at grade.

.5 Apply dry pack mix to form cove at junctions of floor/wall and floor/column. .3 Pack continuous grooves around pipe and drain penetrations with dry pack and strike flush. Ties left in the concrete to be

minimum of 38mm (1-1/2”) back from the concrete surface. Tie Systems will not leak. .4 Remove ties and cones with a special tool as recommended by the manufacturer. .5 Through Wall Penetrations and Sleeves:

.1 Pre-wrap waterstop seal around exterior of sleeves prior to placement in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

.2 Ensure sleeves are firmly held in place to prevent dislocation, misalignment, damage to waterstop, or plugging of sleeve during concrete pour.

Curing: .1 Protect crystallizing waterproofing against rapid loss of moisture for minimum of 3 days by approved method. Protect from

direct sun rays. Field Quality Control:

.1 Manufacturer’s Site Services: Provide manufacturer’s site services consisting of product recommendations and site visits to verify batching and installation procedures when required by manufacturer.

.2 Where applicable, water test structures capable of holding water for 24 hours after conclusion of curing period. Repair identified leaks and repeat water testing until structure is watertight.

Cleaning and Protection: .1 As the work progresses promptly clean up and remove any surplus material and rubbish resulting from the work of this section. .2 Protect waterproofed concrete from damage during construction. .3 When backfilling occurs less than 7 days after installation, use moist backfill material.


Page 54 of 141

07 21 00 – BUILDING INSULATION

General: Scope: Provide fibreglass batt, blanket and mineral wool semi-rigid thermal insulation with accessories. References:

.1 CGSB 71 GP 24M, Adhesive, Flexible, for Bonding Cellular Polystyrene Insulation

.2 CSA A451.1, Polystyrene Insulation Adhesives

.3 CAN/ULC S102, Surface Burning Characteristics

.4 CAN/ULC S114, Standard Method of Test for Determination of Non-Combustibility in Building Materials.

.5 CAN/ULC S124, Standard Method of Test for the Evaluation of Protective Coverings for Foamed Plastic.

.6 CAN/ULC S701, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering.

.7 CAN/ULC S702, Thermal Insulation Mineral Fibre for Buildings

.8 CAN/ULC S705.2, Standard for Thermal Insulation – Spray Applied Rigid Polyurethane Foam, Medium Density - Application

.9 CAN/ULC S770-03, Standard Test Method for Determination of Long-term Thermal Resistance of Closed-Cell Thermal Insulating Foams.

.10 ASTM C 665, Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.

.11 ASTM C 518, Test Method for Steady State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter.

.12 ASTM C423, Test Method for Sound Absorption Coefficient by the Reverberation Room Method

.13 ASTM D2842, Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics

.14 ASTM D1621, Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics

.15 ASTM E 84, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

.16 ASTM E 136, Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 C.

.17 ASTM E139, Standard Test Methods for Conducting Creep, Creep-Rupture, and Stress-Rupture Tests of Metallic Materials. Submittals:

.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

.2 Product Data: For each product provide data on published "R" value for thicknesses of insulation, product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and fire ratings, if required.

.3 Submit research and evaluation reposts for foam plastic insulation where required by authorities having jurisdiction.

.4 Safety Data Sheets: .1 Submit WHMIS safety data sheets for inclusion with project record documents. Keep one copy of WHMIS safety data

sheets on site for reference by workers. Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling:

.1 Handle and store material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and Industrial Health and Safety Regulation requirements.

.2 Materials will be delivered to job in their original packages and containers bearing manufacturer's labels intact and clearly visible.

.3 Do not expose rigid insulation board to sunlight after installation. Protect with black polyethylene or tarpaulin cover as recommended by manufacturer if permanent covering is not completed within twenty-four (24) hours.

.4 Store materials off ground in dry, watertight areas, under cover away from direct sunlight.

.5 Protect to prevent damage by other trades. Project Conditions:

.1 Environmental Limitations: Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation.

Products: Rigid Insulation:

.1 For use below slabs / grade beams / finished grade and as indicated on the drawings insulation to be closed-cell, expanded, extruded polystyrene complying with CAN/ULC-S701.1-17, Type 4, and the following minimum requirements: .1 Thermal resistance: RSI 0.87 per 25mm (R 5.0 per 1 inch) thickness. .2 Compressive strength: 207 kPa (30 p.s.i.). .3 Water absorption: less than 0.70% by volume. .4 Water vapour permeance: 90 ng/Pa s m2 (1.5 perms). .5 Provide insulation in thicknesses as indicated on drawings. .6 Where required secure to structure with Dekfast fastener, #15 High Strength Phillips Head, 13 tpi, drill point with Grey

Sentre XP coating. Predrill holes in structure where required. Cut fasteners if required to suit thickness of insulation and depth of penetration into predrilled holes in structure. Sharpen tips with grinder as required.

.2 Acceptable manufacturers: .1 “Styrofoam Brand SM” by Dow.


Page 55 of 141

.2 “Foamular C-300” by Owens-Corning.

.3 Or approved equal. Low Expansion Spray Foam Joint Insulation:

.1 ‘Froth Pak’ by DOW, with min aged R value of 4.5 per inch or equal as approved by Architect. Ensure product is compatible with adjacent materials.

Mineral Fibre Cavity Wall / Rainscreen Insulation: .1 Mineral fibre cavity wall / rain screen installation board and installation to be ‘CavityRock’ as manufactured by Rockwool, or

approved equal having the following characteristics; .1 Compliance with CAN /ULC –S702 – Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation for Buildings, Type 1. .2 Compliance with CAN4 S114 – Test for Non-combustibility – noncombustible. .3 CAN ULC S102 Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame Spread – 0, Smoke Developed – 0. .4 Thermal Resistance – R4.3 / inch .5 Density to ASTM C303 –

.1 1,1.5” thick - 5.3 lb/ft3 (85 kg/m3)

.2 2” thick - 4.4 lb/ft3 (70 kg/m3)

.3 .2.5” thick - 6.2 lb/ft3 (100 kg/m3) .6 Dimensions –16” x 48” x thicknesses as noted on the drawings, .7 Reaction to Moisture: Moisture Sorption 0.07% - ASTM C1104, Water Vapour Transmission 27 Perm - ASTM E96. .8 Insulation Hangers: 12 gauge x length as required, stainless steel, Perforated Tactoo Insulation Hangers.

Mechanically fastened to windloaded metal studs with stainless steel fasteners. Install purpose made galvanized washers; 2 per stick pin to hold insulation on pin, as manufactured by Continental (www.constud.com – Rene Grunet 416 573 7539).

Mineral Fibre Exterior Wall Cladding Insulation: .1 For use as cladding on the exterior wall of the building shall be mineral fibre cavity wall / rain screen installation board and

installation to be ‘Comfortboard 110’ as manufactured by Rockwool, or approved equal having the following characteristics; .1 Compliance with CAN /ULC –S702 – Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation for Buildings, Type 1. .2 Compliance with CAN4 S114 – Test for Non-combustibility – noncombustible. .3 CAN ULC S102 Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame Spread – 0, Smoke Developed – 0. .4 Thermal Resistance – R4 / inch .5 Density to ASTM C303 – 11 lbs/ ft3 .6 Dimensions –16” x 48” x thicknesses as noted on the drawings, .7 Reaction to Moisture: Moisture Sorption 0.28% - ASTM C1104, .8 Water Vapour Transmission 35 Perm, 2160 ng/Pa.s.m2 - ASTM E96. .9 Compressive Strength 584psf (28 Kpa) @ 10% compression to astm C165

Mineral Fibre Batt Insulation: .1 Mineral fibre batt insulation shall be ‘Comfortbatt’ as manufactured by Rockwool, or approved equal having the following

characteristics; .1 Compliance with CAN/ULC – S702 – Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation for Buildings, Type 1. .2 Compliance with CAN/ULC – S114 – Test for Non-combustibility – noncombustible. .3 CAN ULC S102 Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame Spread – 0, Smoke Developed – 0. .4 Thermal Resistance – R24.0 / 6” inch (6” thick batt) or R15.05 3.5” inch (3.5” batt). .5 Density to ASTM C612-00- Actual - 2.0 lbs./ft3 (32 kg/m3). .6 Dimensions – 16.25” x 28” x 6” (413mm x 1219mm x 152mm) or 16.25” x 28” x 3.5” (413mm x 1219mm x 194mm).

Size the batt to suit the thickness of the wall construction as scheduled. Fibreglass Batt Insulation:

.1 For use at exterior walls, roof insulation at attic spaces and or interior walls where acoustic insulation is scheduled; Fibreglass batt insulation shall be ‘Ecotouch Pink Fiberglass’ as manufactured by Owens Corning, or approved equal having the following characteristics;

.1 Compliance with CAN/ULC – S702 – Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation for Buildings – Type 1.

.2 Compliance with CAN/ULC – S114 – Test for Non-combustibility – noncombustible.

.3 CAN ULC S102 Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame Spread – 0, Smoke Developed – 0.

.4 Thermal Resistance – R24.0 / 6” inch (6” thick batt) or R14 / 3.5” inch (3.5” batt) or R54 / 16” (16” batt)

.5 Compliance with CAN/ULC – S114 – Test for Non-combustibility – noncombustible.

.6 Dimensions – .1 16” x 47” x 5.5” (413mm x 1194mm x 152mm) .2 16” x 47” x 3.5” (413mm x 1194mm x 194mm) .3 24” x 48” x 16” (610mm x 1219mm x 406mm) .4 Size the batt to suit the thickness of the wall / truss construction as scheduled. .5

http://www.constud.com/


Page 56 of 141

Sound (Acoustical) Insulation: .1 Fibreglass or mineral fibre sound blanket insulation to thickness indicated on Drawings, .2 Approved Products:

.1 ‘QuietZone’ by Owens-Corning Canada.

.2 ‘Thermafiber’ by CGC Gypsum, Division of CGC Inc.

.3 ‘Safe‘n’Sound’ by Rockwool.

.4 ‘NoiseReducer’ by CertainTeed.

.5 Or approved equal.

Execution: Installation (Cavity Wall):

.1 Install stick pins and mechanically fasten to windloaded metal studs at 16” o/c horizontally and vertically using two (2) metal screws per fastener.

.2 Install first layer of insulation and install galv. washer.

.3 Install second layer of insulation and install gavl. washer.

.4 Fit boards neatly around beams, pipes, ducts, openings and corners, reinforcing and bonding ties, and other obstructions.

.5 Use the largest module of insulation possible where cutting is necessary, to reduce the number of joints. Patch holes and tears with the same material.

.6 Insulation installations to be reviewed and approved by the Consultant prior to the installation materials that cover the insulation.

Installation (Exterior Wall Cladding): .1 Ensure substrate and air barrier are installed are ready for application of continuous insulation board. Surface shall be flat and

free of imperfections. Air barrier shall be installed, and sealed to prevent air flow from entering the building. Identify deficiencies in these items and have deficiencies corrected prior to the start of the installation of the insulation.

.2 Install continuous board insulation in thicknesses as noted on the drawings.

.3 Install boards with tight joints between panels. Where required cut boards with an exacto knife to suit size required.


.5 Use the largest module of insulation possible where cutting is necessary, to reduce the number of joints. Patch holes with the same material.

.6 Secure insulation boards with 1”x 2”: wood strapping at 16” o/c using stainless steel screws sized to suit application.

.7 Insulation installations to be reviewed and approved by the Consultant prior to the installation materials that cover the insulation.

Installation (Mineral Fibre and Glass Fibre Batt): .1 Fit boards neatly around beams, pipes, ducts, openings and corners, reinforcing and bonding ties, and other obstructions. .2 Use the largest module of insulation possible where cutting is necessary, to reduce the number of joints. Patch holes and tears

with the same material. .3 Insulation installations to be reviewed and approved by the Consultant prior to the installation materials that cover the

insulation. Installation (Rigid Installation):

.1 Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the Work of this section.

.2 Ensure concrete has been cured for a minimum of fourteen (14) days. substrates to be clean of oil or excess dust, pigments and waxes; masonry joints struck flush; concrete surfaces to be free of large voids, spalled areas or sharp protrusions.

.3 Ensure existing granular material is flat and compacted.


.5 Butt insulation boards together and stagger joints. Apply firm hand pressure to level insulation boards

.6 Use the largest module of insulation possible where cutting is necessary, to reduce the number of joints. Patch holes and tears with the same material.

.7 Permanently seal vapour barrier at points where it is impaled by screws, staples, masonry reinforcing, or other fastening devices.

.8 Insulation installations to be reviewed and approved by the Consultant prior to the installation of covering materials.


Page 57 of 141

07 25 00 - WEATHER BARRIER SHEATHING SYSTEM

General Scope: This section defines requirements for the outer layer of exterior grade sheathing and integral air barrier systems and includes

the following; .1 Work of this section includes coated fiberglass-mat gypsum sheathing board system with integral weather-resistant barrier

(WRB) and air barrier (AB) features, and all accessory materials required for covering sheathing joints, fasteners, penetrations, rough openings, and material transitions, for use under exterior wall claddings.

.2 Fluid-applied membrane air barrier

Definitions .1 Air Barrier (AB): Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively air impermeable but moisture vapor permeable, with sealed

joints and penetrations, and with terminations sealed to adjacent surfaces. .2 Weather-Resistant Barrier (WRB): Water-shedding barrier made of material that is moisture-resistant, installed to shed water,

with sealed joints and penetrations, and with terminations sealed to adjacent surfaces. .3 Rough Openings: Openings in the wall to accommodate windows and doors. .4 Material Transitions: Areas where the WRB / AB coated fiberglass-mat gypsum sheathing connects to beams, columns, slabs,

parapets, foundation walls, roofing systems, and at the interface of dissimilar materials.

Reference Standards .1 ASTM C473 Standard Test Method for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products. .2 ASTM C1177 Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. .3 ASTM C1280 Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing. .4 ASTM D3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental

Chamber. .5 ASTM E72 Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction. .6 ASTM E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. .7 ASTM E119 Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. .8 ASTM E136 Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 C. .9 ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. .10 ASTM E2178 Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials. .11 ASTM E2357 Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies. .12 ICC ES AC212 Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Coatings Used as Water-Resistive Barriers over Exterior Sheathing. .13 AAMA 714 Voluntary Specification for Liquid Applied Flashing Used to Create a Water Resistive Seal Around Exterior Wall

Openings in Buildings.

Submittals .1 Submittals: Submit in accordance with Division 1 requirements. .2 Product Data and Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s product data including sheathing and accessory material

types, composition, descriptions and properties, installation instructions and substrate preparation recommendations. .3 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating locations and extent of WRB / AB system, including details of typical

conditions, special joint conditions, intersections with other building envelope systems and materials; counter flashings and details showing bridging of envelope at substrate changes, details of sealing penetrations, and detailed flashing around windows and doors

.4 Test Reports: Submit test reports indicating compliance with specified performance characteristics and requirements

.5 Sample warranty: Submit a sample warranty identifying the terms and conditions of the warranty as herein specified.

.6 Evaluation reports: Accredited laboratory testing for materials

Warranty .1 Provide manufacturer’s exposure warranty that offers twelve (12) months of coverage against in-place exposure damage

(delamination, deterioration) beginning with the date of installation of the product. .2 Provide manufacturer's standard warranty for sheathing to be free of manufacturing defects that make it unsuitable for its

intended use. Warranty period shall be Ten (10) years from the date of purchase of the product. .3 Any eligible DensElement Barrier System when properly installed in such structure as part of an architecturally specified EIFS,

will effectively drain incidental moisture between the DensElement Sheathing and insulation board of the architecturally specified EIFS for a period of twelve (12) years from the date of installation of the system in such structure provided all of the EIFS manufacturer’s moisture drainage details and accessories are followed and used.

.4 Material Warranty: Provide material manufacturer’s standard product warranty, for a minimum three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion.


Page 58 of 141

Quality Assurance – Mock Up .1 Install WRB / AB sheathing with sealed joints, penetrations and integration with openings in a mock-up, minimum size 10’x

10’+/- in location as directed by the Architect. Mock-up panel to include components of the wall system and if approved by Architect may be incorporated in to finished work. Notify 72 hours before installation of mock-up for inspection by Architect. Do not proceed with work of this section until mock-up has been approved.

Delivery, Storage, And Handling .1 Store WRB / AB coated fiberglass mat gypsum sheathing under cover and keep dry and protected against weather,

condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack sheathing flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.

.2 Protect fluid applied material, primers and accessory materials from damage, weather, excessive temperatures and construction traffic.

.3 Store fluid applied material and primers at temperatures of 40 degrees F or above.

.4 Apply fluid applied material to clean surfaces free of contaminants. Chemical residues, surface coatings or films may adversely affect adhesion. Pressure-treated wood and other contaminated surfaces should be cleaned with a solvent wipe before application.

Field Conditions .1 Application standards where applicable are in accordance with Gypsum Association Publication GA-253 for gypsum sheathing

and ASTM C1280. .2 Do not install sheathing that is moisture damaged. Indications that panels are moisture damaged include, but not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. .3 Allow installed sheathing to be dry to the touch before sealing joints, penetrations, rough openings, and material transitions. .4 Do not attempt to seal joints, corners, penetrations, rough openings, and material transitions when installed sheathing surface

is frozen or has frost on the surface. .5 Do not apply sealing materials to sheathing when air or surface temperature is below 40F for fluid applied materials. .6 Sequencing. Do not install air barrier material before the roof assembly has been sufficiently installed to prevent a buildup of

water in the interior of the building. .7 Compatibility. Do not allow air barrier materials to come in contact with chemically incompatible materials. .8 Ultra-violet exposure. Do not expose air barrier materials to sunlight longer than as recommended by the material

manufacturer.

Products

Weather Barrier Assemblies .1 Acceptable products: DensElement Barrier System as manufactured by Georgia-Pacific Gypsum, LLC.

.1 Sheathing: DensElement Sheathing.

.2 Fluid-applied flashing materials: Fluid-applied flashing as approved by Georgia-Pacific Gypsum, LLC.

.3 Primers, backer rods and accessory materials: As approved by Georgia-Pacific Gypsum, LLC.

.2 System Description: Weather-Resistant Barrier and Air Barrier assembly installed at exterior stud walls under exterior cladding, consisting of the following components as herein specified: .1 Sheathing: WRB / AB coated fiberglass mat gypsum sheathing. .2 Fluid-applied flashing to seal sheathing joints, inside and outside corners, penetrations, rough openings, and material

transitions. .3 Primer to seal raw gypsum edges before applying fluid applied flashing. .4 Backer rods and accessory materials.

Weather-Resistant Barrier (Wrb) And Air Barrier (Ab) Gypsum Sheathing .1 Description: Coated fiberglass mat gypsum sheathing with integral weather-resistant barrier (WRB) and air barrier (AB)

complying with applicable requirements of ICC-ES AC212, ASTM E2178, ASTM E2357. .2 Vapor Permeability: When tested as system in accordance with ASTM E96 (water method) the WRB and AB system has a

minimum vapor permeance of 20 perms with sealed joints and fasteners. .3 The WRB and Air Barrier Gypsum Sheathing has a moisture absorption rate < 6% .4 Air Barrier performance requirements:


Page 59 of 141

.1 Air permeance of sheathing: Sheathing with an air permeability not greater than 0.001 cfm/ft2 (0.02L/s/m2) when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178.

.2 Air permeance of assembly: Assembly of sheathing and sealing components with an average air leakage not greater than 0.04 cfm/ft2 (0.2L/s/m2) when tested in accordance with ASTM E2357.

Fluid-Applied Flashing And Accessory Materials For Joints, Inside And Outside Corners, Fasteners, Rough Openings, And Material Transitions .1 Substrate requirements:

.1 Sheathing joint and transition gaps to receive fluid-applied flashing shall be less than 1/4" (6.4 mm).

.2 Gaps that are more than 1/8” and less than ¼” shall be filled with a backer rod to support the fluid applied flashing at the transition joint.

.3 For gaps larger than 1/4" use fluid-applied flashing as approved by Georgia-Pacific Gypsum, LLC.

.2 Fluid applied flashing for panel joints, inside and outside corners, and penetrations .1 Description: Water based fluid applied flashing. .2 Properties:

.1 Acceptable substrate: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC DensElement Sheathing.

.2 Adhesion to fiberglass mat faced sheathing: No delamination from face of sheathing.

.3 Applied wet film thickness: 16 mils.

.4 Air permeance: meets 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot (0.02L/s/sq m), maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178.

.5 Water vapor permeance: >10 perms (287 ng/(Pa s sq m)), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.

.6 Ultraviolet and weathering resistance: Approved for 12 months weather exposure.

.7 Comply with applicable requirements of AAMA 714 .3 Primer: Provide primer to seal the cut edges of gypsum sheathing.

.3 Fluid applied flashing for sealing fasteners: .1 Description: Water based fluid applied flashing. .2 Properties:

.1 Acceptable substrate: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC DensElement Sheathing.


.3 Applied wet film thickness: 16 mils.

.4 Air permeance: meets 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot (0.02 L/s/sq m), maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178.

.5 Water vapor permeance: >10 perms (287 ng/(Pa s sq m)), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M.

.6 Ultraviolet and weathering resistance: Approved for 12 months weather exposure.

.7 Comply with applicable requirements of AAMA 714. .4 Fluid applied flashing for sealing rough openings

.1 Fluid applied flashing: Water based fluid applied flashing.

.2 Primer: Water based primer to seal the cut edges of gypsum exposed in rough openings for windows and doors. Apply primer to raw gypsum board edges by brushing on a thin, uniform coat.

.3 Properties: .1 Acceptable substrate: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC DensElement Sheathing. .2 Flashing adhesion to fiberglass mat faced sheathing: No delamination from face of sheathing. .3 Applied wet film thickness: 16 mils. .4 Flashing air permeance: meets 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot (0.02 L/s/sq m), maximum, when

tested in accordance with ASTM E2178. .5 Flashing water vapor permeance: >10 perms (287 ng/(Pa s sq m)), minimum, when tested in accordance with

ASTM E96/E96M. .6 Ultraviolet and weathering resistance: Approved for 12 months weather exposure. .7 Flashing comply with applicable requirements of AAMA 714.

.5 Material transitions using fluid applied flashing: .1 Refer to substrate requirements for treatment of gaps as specified herein. Gaps from 1/8” to ¼” shall be filled with a

backer rod prior to applying fluid applied flashing. Gaps greater than ¼” shall be sealed with fluid-applied flashing as approved by Georgia-Pacific Gypsum, LLC

.2 Fluid applied flashing for material transitions: Water based fluid applied flashing.

.3 Properties: .1 Acceptable substrate: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC DensElement Sheathing.


Page 60 of 141


.3 Applied wet film thickness: 16 mils

.4 Air permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per minute per square foot (0.02L/s/sq m), maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178

.5 Water vapor permeance: >10 perms (287 ng/(Pa s sq m)), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M

.6 Ultraviolet and weathering resistance: Approved for 12 months weather exposure

.7 Comply with applicable requirements of AAMA 714

Execution PREPARATION

.1 Remove projections, protruding fasteners, loose or damaged sheathing material at edges of panel that might interfere with proper installation to seal joints, corners, fasteners, penetrations, openings, or material transitions.

.2 Wipe down the sheathing surface to receive sealing materials with a clean cloth.

.3 Ensure field conditions are met as outlined in Part 1 – General Requirements.

INSTALLATION OF WEATHER-RESISTANT BARRIER (WRB) AND AIR BARRIER (AB) SHEATHING .1 WRB / AB Coated fiberglass mat sheathing:

.1 Install and fasten DensElement Sheathing according to manufacturer’s detailed installation instructions

.2 Fastener and penetration treatment: Treat all countersunk fasteners (penetrating through the fiberglass mat) with specified fluid applied flashing used for sealing joints.

FLUID APPLIED FLASHING FOR SEALING SHEATHING JOINTS, INSIDE AND OUTSIDE CORNERS, FASTENERS, ROUGH OPENINGS, AND MATERIAL TRANSITIONS .1 Sealing DensElement Sheathing Joints using specified Fluid Applied Flashing

.1 Apply fluid applied flashing over the joint in a zig-zag or ribbon pattern dispensed from a tube type container. Cover a minimum of 1” on both sides of the joint.

.2 With a 4 or 6” straight edge knife or trowel, spread evenly over the sheathing joint.

.3 Apply at a rate to achieve a wet mil thickness of 16 mils over the entire joint area. .2 Sealing DensElement Sheathing Vertical Corners using specified Fluid Applied Flashing

.1 Prime exposed gypsum edges with specified primer.

.2 Apply fluid applied flashing over the inside and/or outside corner in a zig-zag or ribbon pattern dispensed from either a tube type container. Cover a minimum of 2” on both sides of the corner.

.3 With a 4 or 6” straight edge knife or trowel, spread evenly over the sheathing corner.

.4 Apply at a rate to achieve a wet mil thickness of 16 mils over the corner area. .3 Sealing DensElement Sheathing Fasteners using specified Fluid Applied Flashing: Apply the fluid applied flashing material to

fasteners, and wipe down with a straight edge tool; provide a minimum 16 mil thick coating over the fastener. .4 Sealing DensElement Sheathing Rough Openings using specified Fluid Applied Flashing

.1 Prime exposed gypsum edges with specified primer

.2 Apply a bead of fluid applied flashing into the entire width of the inside corners of the opening dispensed from a tube type container.\

.3 Apply fluid applied flashing onto: .1 Sills of openings .2 Jambs of openings .3 Headers of openings

.4 Apply fluid applied flashing 2” over the entire width of the opening sill, jamb, and header on exterior set windows and doors. Apply fluid applied flashing over the entire width of the opening sill, jamb, and header on interior set windows and doors. Apply in a zig-zag or ribbon pattern dispensed from a tube type container.

.5 Apply fluid applied flashing over the sheathing adjacent to the opening sill, jamb, and header in a zig-zag or ribbon pattern dispensed from a tube type container. Cover a minimum of 2” of the sheathing surface adjacent to the opening.

.6 With a 4 or 6” straight edge knife or trowel, spread fluid applied flashing over entire width of the sill, jamb, header, and sheathing surface adjacent to the opening.

.7 Apply at a rate to achieve a wet mil thickness of 16 mils over the opening area. .5 Sealing DensElement sheathing material transitions using specified Fluid Applied Flashing

.1 Sheathing joint and transition gaps to receive fluid-applied flashing shall be less than 1/4" (6.4 mm).

.2 For gaps larger than 1/4" use shall be sealed with fluid-applied flashing as approved by Georgia-Pacific Gypsum, LLC

.3 Gaps that are more than 1/8” and less than ¼” shall be filled with a backer rod to support the fluid applied flashing at the transition joint.

.4 If necessary, prime the adjacent material with primer per the material manufacturer’s recommendations.


Page 61 of 141

.5 Apply fluid applied flashing over the sheathing and adjacent material in a zig-zag or ribbon pattern dispensed from a tube type container. Ensure the flashing is a minimum of 2” on each substrate material surface.

.6 With a 4 or 6” straight edge knife or trowel, spread fluid applied flashing over material transition joint.

.7 Apply at a rate to achieve a wet mil thickness of 16 mils.

.6 SEALING EXTERIOR WALL PENETRATIONS .1 Exterior wall penetration shall be sealed to prevent air and water infiltration. Penetrations may be sealed with fluid

applied flashing. .2 For round or square pipe/duct penetrations use specified fluid applied flashing, refer to DensElement Barrier System

Technical Guide for instructions for proper sealing.

.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .1 Do not cover installed WRB / AB assembly until required inspections have been completed and installation has been

accepted. .2 Where applicable, allow for owner’s inspection and air barrier testing and reporting.

.8 PROTECTION

.1 Protect WRB / AB assembly from damage during installation and during the construction period.


Page 62 of 141

07 27 13 - Weather Barrier Membranes

General: Scope: Provide labour and materials required to provide weather membranes as indicated on the drawings.

Products: Air Barrier Membrane: shall be “Novawrap Aspire” as manufactured by Intertape Polymer Group, having the following characteristics;

.1 Air Penetration Resistance; to ASTM E2178, cfm/ft2 @ 1.57psf is < 0.004

.2 Water Vapor Transmission: to ASTM E90-05, method A = 56 perms

.3 Water Penetration Resistance: to ATTCC 127 =250cm

.4 Basis Weight: to TAPPI T-410 = 1.8 oz/yd2

.5 Breaking Strength: to ASTM D882 = 30/30 lbs/in

.6 Tear Resistance: to ASTM D1117 = 8/6 lbs

.7 Surface Burning Characteristics: to ASTM E84, flame spread rating-15, smoke develop index - 15

.8 Ultra Violet Light Exposure (UV): 120 days .2 Vapour Barrier– Joint Tape: Minimum 4” (100mm) wide, pressure sensitive, self-adhesive, “Novaflash SA” as manufactured

by Interlope Polymer Group, or Stego Tape and / or Stego Claw as manufactured by Stego Industries Ltd. or approved equal and for use in sealing vapour retarder seams and attachment to footings, foundation walls, protrusions, etc.

Underslab Vapour Barrier:

.1 Vapour Barrier - Membrane: ‘Perminator’, 15 mil polyethylene vapour barrier as manufactured by WR Meadows Inc. (www.wrmeadows.com), Stego Wrap as manufactured by Stego Industries Ltd. (www.stego.com) or approved equal.

.2 Vapour Barrier– Joint Tape: minimum 4” (100mm) wide, pressure sensitive, self-adhesive, “Perminator Tape” as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, or Stego Tape and / or Stego Claw as manufactured by Stego Industries Ltd. or approved equal and for use in sealing vapour retarder seams and attachment to footings, foundation walls, protrusions, etc.

Execution: General Requirements:

.1 Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for storage and application of air / vapour barrier sheet.

.2 Permanently seal air/vapour barrier at points where it is penetrated by screws, masonry reinforcing, or other fastening devices.

.3 Ensure all sheet metal closures, cover plates, etc. are neatly and securely installed prior to installation of air/vapour barrier membrane.

Air / Vapour Barrier Preparation / Installation: .1 Inspect all surfaces to receive membrane and flashing. Repair defects which may impair the performance of the membrane. .2 Ensure concrete has been cured for a minimum of seven (7) days and is clean, dry, smooth and sound. Concrete curing

compounds and form release agents shall be free of oil, pigments and waxes. .3 Install membrane when all substrate defects have been corrected. .4 Apply to clean, dry, smooth and sound surfaces. Remove moisture, grease and all foreign materials which may adversely

affect proper adhesion. .5 If required apply primer with a brush or roller and allow to dry. Prime only areas to be covered in a working day. Primed areas

not covered within a working day must be re-primed. .6 Apply sheet air/vapour barrier membrane when primer is dry using self-adhesive method for self-adhesive type. Ensure

complete bond for full extent of membrane. .7 Lap joints to a minimum of 2” (50mm) and fully heat seal. .8 Apply heavy pressure using a blunt object or small hand roller to the top and bottom end terminations, to ensure positive

adhesion at the edges. .9 Using a small hand roller, roll membrane immediately after each length of membrane is applied. .10 Using a trowel or gun, apply a bead of mastic to all terminations of the membrane. .11 Before covering membrane, inspect thoroughly and repair immediately. Repair punctures with a patch large enough to

completely cover damaged area. Seal edges of patch with mastic. .12 Fill all joints, gaps and cracks wider than 1/4” (6mm) with mastic and reinforce with a 12” (300mm) strip of membrane, prior to

the application of the full membrane. .13 Take extra care to ensure continuity of the air/vapour barrier at all detail areas. Use 12” (300mm) reinforcing strips at all inside

and outside corners. .14 Be responsible for the continuity of the air/vapour barrier across the wall at joints between exterior grade sheathing panels,

from the wall to the roofing system, windows, curtain wall, aluminium windows, hollow metal frames, anchors, structural steel, as required to complete the building envelope. Ensure compatibility prior to starting work.

.15 The continuity of the air / vapour barrier must be carefully inspected prior to installation of insulation.

.16 Perform all repairs to the air / vapour barrier as required.

mailto:cfm/[email protected]

http://www.wrmeadows.com/


Page 63 of 141

.17 Seal all breaks, holes and wall ties with liquid air/vapour barrier. Underslab Vapour Barrier Preparation / Installation:

.1 Install underslab vapour barrier in accordance with the requirement listed below.

.2 The drawings do not indicate every situation where an air / vapour barrier is required, however it is a requirement in the design of the building to provide an integral monolithic impermeable air / vapour barrier that prevents water leakage and the diffusion of water vapour and air movement under the action of a difference in vapour and air pressure, at the inner face of the insulation. Exercise extreme care to ensure that a fully continuous air/vapour barrier will be maintained over the entire insulated area and that it extends across all junctions between different materials.

.3 Conform with manufacturer's recommendations for storage and application of vapour barrier sheet.

.4 Permanently seal vapour retarder at all penetration, punctures, etc. using vapour barrier membrane and/or joint sealant tape.

.5 Unroll vapour barrier membrane over the area where slab-on-grade is to be poured or at inside face of exterior wall. Cut to size, as required.

.6 Overlap all joints / seams, both lateral and butt, minimum 6” (150 mm) and seal with joint tape. The joint tape area shall be free from dust, dirt and moisture to allow maximum adhesion of tape.

.7 Extend underslab membrane up wall from the bottom to the top of the slab.

.8 Seal vapour retarder to vertical walls with joint tape

.9 Install the steel reinforcing for the slab on grade and radiant floor heating system above the vapour retarded membrane.

.10 Protect membrane from puncture prior to pouring of the concrete slab on grade.


Page 64 of 141

07 46 33 – WOOD SIDING AND TRIM

General: Scope: Provide labour and materials for the complete installation of horizontal wood siding and trim as per manufacturer’s strict

installation instructions. Warranty: Provide the limited manufacturer’s warranties for the following aspects of the wood siding. Provide all labor and materials

required to process claim, administer and complete work related to a claim and required / applicable warranty work associated with the claim. Limited Manufacturer’s warranty’s for the wood siding include the following; .1 Labour + Material: 5 years from substantial completion .2 Wood Decay: 50 years prorated limited warranty on material from substantial completion .3 No Fade Finish: 30 years prorated limited from substantial completion

Products: Wood Siding:

.1 Manufacturer: Diamond Kote Siding (www.diamondkotesiding.com)

.2 Type: RidgeStack Siding + Grooved Panel + Soffit Panels (perforated and non perforated)

.3 Installation System Type: Use 2” stainless steel nails. Use blind nailing approach at all horizontal siding.

.4 Dimensions: RidgeStack Siding: 3/8” x 12” x 16’-0”, Grooved Panel: 4’-0” x 10’-0” x 7/16” with 8” o/c grooves, Soffit Panels: 11” x 3/8” x 14’-0” with perforations 1/8” wide , 3.5” x 8” sections at 24” o/c for the length of the soffit.

.5 Species; strand type composite material

.6 Finish: prefinished cedar texture

.7 Dryness: max moisture content 12-16%, Provide purpose made expansion spacers where required and recommended by the manufacturer.

.8 Colours: Colour to be selected by the Architect at a later date. Allow for two (2) colours selected from manufacturer’s standard colour range.

.9 Ventilation and Drainage Accessories: .1 ventilated universal ‘L’ strip: ¾” x 1 ½” galvanized steel , perforated metal, 50% open, located continuously at base

of siding .2 ventilated J strip: 1 7/8” x 2 ¾” prefinished, perforated 50% open galv steel, colour – white, located continuous at

siding / soffit intersection .10 Trim: Provide protective trim system at the following locations;

.1 Interior and exterior corners; one piece corners with exposed face of 2 ½ “ inside 3 ½” exterior on both faces x 1” thick min. complete with nailing fin.

.2 Around all windows and doors; 3 1/2” wide x 1” thick min. .11 Trim Fasteners: use stainless steel nails in lengths as required (2 1/2” minimum) to suit installation. .12 Caulking: Provide exterior grade caulking in colures to match siding colours .13 Paint touch ups: Provide paint as recommended and supplied by the manufacturer for cut ends and touch ups to match

siding colours.

Prefinished Metal Soffit, Flashing and Trim: .1 Sheet Metal Flashings: shall be fabricated from minimum 26 gauge (0.6 mm) base metal thickness, pre-finished, zinc coated

steel sheet, commercial quality. Zinc coating shall conform to ASTM A525, latest edition, with Z275 zinc coating designation. Cleats and Starter Strips shall be a minimum 16 gauge (0.06”) (1.6 mm) thick zinc coated steel, minimum 2” (50 mm) wide; starter strips continuous. Form in profiles as detailed on the drawings. Provide alkali resistant bituminous paint. Colour shall be selected by the Architect at a later date.

.2 Prefinished Aluminum Soffit and Trim: shall be 16” wide, 2 panel vented soffit, 4.02 in2 per linear foot of clear ventilation, as manufactured by Gentek. Colour to be chosen by Architect at a later date from the manufacturers standard colour range. Provide standard prefinished aluminum trims to suit soffit requirements.

Wood Siding and Trim Installation:

.1 Installation to be by skilled carpenters, and in strict accordance with system manufacturer's printed directions.

.2 System to be installed plumb, straight and true to adjacent work. Co-operate with other trades to ensure proper installation and anchorage of this Work. Maximize lengths.

.3 Ensure base wall and furring are constructed in accordance with the documents.

.4 Plan locations of, and install ventilation and drainage accessories in sequence to ensure there is a clear ventilation path for air flow behind all parts wood siding.

.5 Reseal cut edges of siding and trim prior to installation.

http://www.diamondkotesiding.com/


Page 65 of 141

.6 Install purpose made expansion spacers where required and recommended by the manufacturer at ends of long lengths of horizontal siding pieces.

.7 Where using nails to secure trim, ensure nails are long enough to penetrate a min of 1” into solid substrate. Nail head shall be driven to sit flush on the surface of the trim.

.8 Use stainless steel nails to secure siding to substrate. Ensure nail penetrate solid substrate by 1” minimum.

Prefinished Metal Soffit Installation: .1 Install soffit trim to suit project. .2 Neatly cut and install prefabricated soffit in location as indicated on the drawings.

Prefinished Metal Flashing Installation: .1 Provide bent mental flashing in location and in profiles as noted on the drawings and details.


Page 66 of 141

07 42 00 - METAL CLADDING AND TRIM

General: Scope: Provide design, labour and materials as required to provide metal cladding and trim. These systems to comply with the

following requirements; .1 Compliance with the following reference standards;

.1 CSA-S136 for the design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.

.2 ASTM A653/A 653M-001; Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

Design Requirements: The design of the metal roofing system to comply with the following; .1 Building systems to comply with environmental loads as defined by the Ontario Building Code 2012 and the proposed building

location, for a building with an importance category of ‘normal’. .2 Design metal cladding a trim to withstand wind loads and uplift. .3 Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling,

overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. Temperature Change (Range): 20 degC, ambient; 40 degC, material surfaces.

.4 Siding to be installed vertically ensuring that lapping of material prevents penetration of water. (i.e., start installation from bottom and work to the top).

Submittals: .1 Submit shop drawings. Clearly indicate type of metal cladding being supplied, wall elevations, materials, gauges, profiles, trim

and closure pieces, flashings, dimensions, layouts, types and locations of fastenings and installation details. Indicate provisions for structural and thermal movement between metal cladding, structural systems and other adjacent materials. Drawings to be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer, attesting to the ability of the metal panel’s assembly to withstand the specified loads.

.2 Samples: Provide a 300mm x 300mm sample of the metal cladding and fasteners mounted on a 12.5mm plywood backing.

.3 Maintenance Data: Provide maintenance data for cleaning and maintenance of panel finishes for incorporation into project manual. Submit instructions for repair and removal of panels.


.1 Metal Cladding: to be 2-2/3” x 7/8” Corrugated as manufactured by VicWest or approved equal with the following characteristics;

.1 To be formed of structural quality, hot-dipped galvanized (zinc coated) steel conforming to ASTM A653. Galvanized coating to be applied to preformed metal cladding in conformance with to ASTM A653SQ, grade 33, Z275.

.2 Profile to be 2-2/3” x 7/8”) Corrugated, 24 gauge,

.3 Colour to be chosen at a later date from the manufacturers standard range. .2 Sealants: Colour to match exterior face sheets where exposed. .3 Exposed Trim, Closures, Corner Flashings and Cap Pieces: Of same material and colour as metal cladding. Provide accessory

trim sections, etc. at vertical reveals and/or as required or recommended by manufacturer to complete installation. .4 Miscellaneous Clip Angles, Z-Girts and Notched Z-Girts: to be roll formed from minimum 16 gauge (1/16”) (1.6mm) thick steel

except where design of wall and/or soffit system requires heavier members, galvanized to Z275 (G90). Members to be appropriately slotted to minimize through metal conductivity. Z Girts to be 100mm deep galvanized metal z-girts, isolated from concrete block with bituminous coating. Gauge, location, spacing and fastening requirements of the Z-girts and other miscellaneous clip angles as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

.5 Accessories: Miscellaneous clips, splicers, carriers, connectors, screws, nails, and other standard accessories to be zinc-coated, be of strength and design compatible with the system specified. Provide special accessories to complete the work.

.6 Fasteners: Type and physical characteristic of fasteners to be as recommended by the manufacturer. As a minimum provide concealed fasteners to be stainless steel with flat head.

.7 Metal Flashing at Parapet + Miscellaneous Metal Flashings: to be 20 gauge material of same colour as the metal cladding. Provide Isolation coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint, Cleats and Starter Strips: minimum 16 gauge (0.06”) (1.6mm) thick zinc coated steel, minimum 50mm (2”) wide; starter strips continuous. Locations of flashings are identified on the drawings.


.1 Fabricate preformed steel cladding to provide a continuous, protected, waterproof, dustproof, sealed side joint. Roll form panel sheets. Press braking is not acceptable. Fabricate sheet metal material for flashings, closures and accessories for panels to the same material, gauge and finish as the exterior panels unless otherwise specified or called for on the drawings. Closures are to be placed at the top and bottom of panel runs or as indicated.


Page 67 of 141

.2 Insulation Systems: Install metal building cladding systems to manufacturer's recommendations. Coordinate installation of metal cladding as required over secondary layer of metal building insulation system and air barrier.

.3 Co-operate with trades to ensure rapid installation of metal panels and flashings as soon as preceding work is ready to receive same. Give timely instructions and information in writing of the requirements necessary for surfaces, materials or bases prepared and/or supplied by other trades which will affect the work of this section. This Contractor to bear the cost of any cutting, patching or making good required as a result of failure to carry out the provisions of this Clause.

.4 Roll form profiled panels and other Work unless impossible because of special design. Use other forming methods only with Consultant’s approval. Form bends sharp and true. Fabricate to conform to reviewed shop drawings, and to allow for structural movement within system. Fabricate cladding system to prevent entry of water into building and from collecting within wall assembly, and to prevent infiltration or exfiltration of air through cladding system.

.5 Cladding Installation: .1 Installation to be by skilled mechanics, and in strict accordance with system manufacturer's printed directions, to

produce a first-class flush-finished surface, in true planes. .2 Install preformed metal cladding horizontally, and liner panels vertically, plumb, straight and true to adjacent work by

the manufacturer's erection forces. Subcontracting or assigning of the erection of these materials will not be allowed unless express written consent is received from the Consultant.

.3 Erect metal components and accessories in strict accordance with reviewed shop and erection drawings and manufacturer’s written instructions. System to be installed plumb, straight and true to adjacent work. Co-operate with other trades to ensure proper installation and anchorage of this Work.

.4 Where face sheets cover solid masonry or concrete, fasten notched "Z" girts to masonry or concrete walls with masonry type anchors sized and spaced to suit engineered design.

.5 Maximize lengths of cladding sheets. .6 Trim and Closures: Supply and install trim and closures of metal gauge and finish to match adjacent surfaces. .7 Sheet Metal Flashings:

.1 Fabricate metal flashings and sheet metal work to profiles as indicated or detailed. Sheet metal work to be watertight under conditions.

.2 Install sheet metal work with concealed fastenings. Exposed fastenings will be permitted only with approval of Consultant, when concealed fastenings are impossible. If used, install to a weathertight condition, and evenly and neatly locked. Do not use pop rivets.

.3 Provide continuous starter strips to present true leading edge. Anchor to backup to provide rigid, secure installation. Conceal fastening.

.4 In general, join sheet metal by "S" seams, to permit thermal movement. Fill joints with sealant as flashing is being installed. Subsequent to installation clean off excess visible material. Space joints evenly where exposed, or as otherwise shown on drawings or approved by the Consultant. Lock seam and seal. Make corners by means of raised lock seams. Locate joints at 2440mm (8’-0”) maximum spacing. Make allowance for expansion at joints.

.5 Make surfaces free from distortions, buckling, warp, wave, dents, oil canning or other defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Make corners square and surfaces straight and in true planes.

.6 Double back exposed edges on underside at least 12.7mm (1/2”) for appearance and stiffness. Dovetail, mitre, lock joint and seal corners. Apply sealant to open sheet metal joints and at juncture with other materials.

.7 Provide underlay or isolation coating to sheet metal surfaces that come into contact with masonry, concrete or another kind of metal.

.8 Prepare and touch up scratches on pre-painted finish with air drying formulation of the coil coating paint. Replace material at no cost to the Owner, if touching up is not acceptable to the Consultant.

.9 Coordinate and provide supply of flat stock to roofing trade for fabrication of metal flashing for the project. Cleaning of Preformed Metal Cladding: Upon completion of the installation, clean down preformed metal cladding and soffit and

leave work installed under this section clean. Use only cleaning agents recommended by the cladding manufacturers.


Page 68 of 141

07 40 00 – PREFORMED METAL SOFFIT

General: Design Requirements:

.1 The preformed metal soffit system shall be designed in accordance with Reference Standards specified herein and to the following requirements: .1 Positive wind load support: 1.915 kPa (40 psf). .2 Negative wind load support: 1.436 kPa (30 psf). .3 Deflection: not to exceed 1/180 of the span. .4 Tensile stress: 138 MPa (20,000 psi) for the steel exterior element but in any case shall not exceed the values

permitted by CSA S136. .2 In addition to the design parameters indicated, design all preformed metal soffits to withstand wind uplift.

Shop Drawings: .1 Submit preformed metal soffit shop drawings for the fabrication and installation of metal soffit in accordance with Section 01 33

00, Submittal Procedures. .2 Clearly indicate type of metal soffit being supplied, materials, gauges, profiles, openness, types and locations of fastenings

and installation details. .3 Shop drawings shall bear the Seal of a Professional Structural Engineer registered in the Province of Ontario verifying the

structural capabilities of the system. .4 Samples: Submit to the Consultant in accordance with Section 01 33 00, two (2) 300mm x 300mm prepainted sample sections

of metal soffit. Finished work shall match samples in colour, gloss and texture. Delivery, Handling and Storage:

.1 Protect the work of this Section from damage. Protect other work from damage resulting from this work. Damaged work which cannot be satisfactorily repaired shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

.2 Store materials on site in a manner to prevent damage thereto, or deterioration of finish. Galvanized surfaces which show evidence of "white rust" will not be accepted.

.3 Stockpile panels tilted to provide water run-off, free from ground contact on firm, level, non-staining supports extending full width of sheet and spaced not more than 450mm apart. Cover components with opaque polyethylene sheet to protect from direct sunlight and moisture penetration. Vent to allow air movement.

.4 Conduct transport of materials to the job site storage compound in such a manner to prevent in-transit damage. These measures shall include, but not limited to crating, polyethylene wrapping system, etc.

Products: Prefinished Metal Soffit:

.1 AD300R, 39mm deep x 300mm wide sheet width, min. 30% open air perforation, as manufactured by VicWest Steel or equivalent profile as manufactured by Peerless or Canadian Metal Rolling Mills.

.2 Or alternate approved by Consultant. Painted Finishes - Typical

.1 Prior to fabrication all preformed perforated soffit sheets and accessories shall be cleaned and pre-treated prior to application of an inhibitive primer and shall receive a paint finish equal to the following: .1 VicWest Colorite HMP Series, ceramic pigmentation, polyester paint coating, and wash coat on reverse (hidden) side. .2 Alternate approved by Consultant.

.2 Colour shall be selected by Owner. Accessories:

.1 Sealants: In accordance with Section 07 72 00, Joint Sealants. Colour to match exterior face sheets where exposed.

.2 Wood Strapping: S-DRY, graded and stamped to National Lumber Grades Authority, Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber. .1 Strapping: spruce, pine or fir (SPF), standard or better grade.

.3 Accessories: Miscellaneous clips, splicers, carriers, connectors, screws, nails, and other standard accessories shall be zinc-coated, be of strength and design compatible with the system specified. Provide all special accessories to complete the work.

.4 Fasteners: Concealed fasteners shall be stainless steel with hex head.


.1 Co-operate with all trades to ensure proper installation of metal soffit panels and flashings as soon as preceding work is ready to receive same.

Fabrication: .1 Roll form profiled panels and other Work unless impossible because of special design. Use other forming methods only with

Consultant’s approval. Form bends sharp and true.


Page 69 of 141

.2 Fabricate to conform to reviewed shop drawings, and to allow for structural movement within system.

.3 Fabricate system to prevent entry of water into building and from collecting within wall assembly, and to prevent infiltration or exfiltration of air through system.

Installation: .1 Installation shall be by skilled mechanics, and in strict accordance with system manufacturer's printed directions, to produce a

first-class installation, in true planes. .2 Erect metal components and accessories in strict accordance with reviewed shop and erection drawings and manufacturer’s

written instructions. System shall be installed plumb, straight and true to adjacent work. Co-operate with other trades to ensure proper installation and anchorage of this Work.

Cleaning: .1 Upon completion of the installation, clean down all preformed metal cladding and soffit and leave all work installed under this

section clean. .2 Use only cleaning agents recommended by the cladding manufacturers.


Page 70 of 141

07 52 00 – MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING

General: Scope: Provide labour and materials required to provide waterproof membranes at the following locations; New roofing systems to

comply with the following requirements; .1 Comply with the following reference standards;

.1 Canadian Roofing Contractors Association “CRCA Roofing Specifications Manual” – Current Edition.

.2 CAN/CGSB-37.50-M89; Hot Applied, Rubberized Asphalt for Roofing and Waterproofing

.3 CGSB 37-GP-56M; Membrane, Modified, Bituminous, Prefabricated, and Reinforced for Roofing

.4 CAN/ULC-S701-11; Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering. .2 Work of this Section shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:

.1 Provide all required wood and plywood blocking at parapets as required to support installation of the asphalt built up roofing systems - refer to details.

.2 Provide deck sheathing over metal deck and install using adhesive.

.3 Provide a kraft, asphalt/kraft lamination vapour barrier.

.4 Provide sloped roof insulation in layers / thickness as scheduled installed using hot asphalt.

.5 Provision of fibreboard roof overlay sheathing, cant strips and counter slopes at parapets, mechanical equipment or other roof penetrations installed using hot asphalt.

.6 Provision of membrane flashings at roofing / wall intersections and mechanical curbs installed.

.7 Provision of new vent stack flashings at all existing stack locations.

.8 Provision of prefinished metal flashing at all parapets, roof / wall intersections, mechanical / other penetration through the proposed roofing membranes.

.9 Provide EPDM flashings / metal flashings to lap over existing flashings and roofing membranes (scrape back existing pea gravel) at adjacent roof tie-ins. New EPDM flashing to extend up and over parapet wall and extend to edge of sloped horizontal plywood cap.

.10 Provide pea gravel, hot flood coat of rubberized asphalt.

.11 Temporarily shore mechanical unit as required for installation of roofing.

.12 Provide new roof drains as detailed on the drawings.

.13 New roof drains are to be protected from debris during construction. Quality Assurance:

.1 Ensure roofer is qualified and approved by membrane manufacturer

.2 Roofing contractor is to be an active member in good standing with Ontario Industrial Roofing Contractors Association (OIRCA).

Warranty: .1 Provide to owner a written warranty covering any actual leaks in the roofing membrane or membrane flashings resulting from

faulty workmanship for a period of two (2) years commencing from the date of completion of roofing. Ensure warranty is submitted on OIRCA’s “standard form of warranty”.

.2 Provide a warranty for the roofing systems that complies with the following; .1 Warranty to cover the repair or replacement of defective work, starting at substantial completion of the project. .2 Leaking, failure to stay in place, undue expansion, deformation, blistering, and splitting seams will be judged as

defective work. .3 Provide a Total Workmanship Warranty for a period of five (5) years for components of the roof. .4 Provide a Manufacturer’s Warranty for a period of fifteen (15) years covering the repair or replacement of any portion

of the roofing and waterproofing membrane resulting from defects in the manufacture of the membrane materials. Manufacturer’s Warranty to start at the date of substantial completion of the project. Manufacturer’s warranty to cover labour and materials and include repair and replacement, to extent required, of work of this Section in event of leaks or other failure if such failure results from defects and deficiencies of membrane and flashings.

.5 Arrange for roofing manufacturer to conduct periodic visual inspections of roof surface during the second, fifth and tenth years after Substantial Performance of the Work.

.6 Record noted deficiencies and arrange for their proper repair under warranty. Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling:

.1 Package and store roofing and terrace materials identified with attached labels of the manufacturer, showing brand, contents, weight as applicable, and product and specification numbers. Deliver materials to Site, protected, with manufacturer's seals and labels intact. Unload and place in temporary storage in manner to prevent damage.

.2 Package and Store roofing materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions and in a manner to prevent damage to new materials and completed work. Repair or replacement of materials or the completed work attributed to the improper product delivery, storage or handling shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.


Page 71 of 141

Environmental Conditions:

.1 Do not apply any part of the roofing system over damp materials, nor during a period of damp weather.

.2 Apply roofing materials only when air and surface temperature are above 4C, have been so for at least 48 hours, and are not

likely to go below 4C until work is completed.

.3 Proceed with winter work during the months of November to March inclusive, and otherwise when temperatures are below

4C, only with the mutual documented agreement of Contractor and manufacturer of built-up bituminous roofing membrane

that with materials and methods used, specified installation under conditions of warranty will be successfully achieved. Protection:

.1 Ensure that stored porous materials absorb no moisture. Remove wet materials from project site.

.2 Protect surrounding work from damage during roofing and terrace operations. Protect walls with tarps in order to prevent damage.

.3 Be responsible for repair of damage caused by work of this Section.

.4 Provide special protection against damage from traffic or work performed on top of completed roofing waterproofing.

.5 Seal exposed edges of membranes to prevent water infiltration into the system at the end of each day’s work. Waste Management and Disposal:

.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Waste and Materials Management and Waste Reduction Work plan

.2 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.

.3 Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children. Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with Waste Management Plan.

.4 Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.

.5 Plan and coordinate insulation work to minimize generation waste.

.6 Collect and separate plastic and/or paper packaging for recycling

.7 Give preference to suppliers who take back mineral fibre insulation waste for reuse or recycling.

.8 Use the least toxic sealants and adhesives necessary to comply with requirements of this section.

.9 Close and seal, tightly, all partly used sealant and adhesive containers and store protected in well ventilated, fire-safe area at moderate temperature.

.10 Place used hazardous sealant tubes and adhesive containers in areas designated for hazardous materials.

.11 Collect, package and store partly used or unused containers of asphalt, sealing compounds, primers and roofing felts for recycling, and return to recycler in accordance with Waste Management Plan.

Roof Slopes: .1 Prior to application of roofing, Trade Contractor and Contractor shall review constructed roof slopes and ensure that no area

on the roof shall permit the ponding of water. Should ponding occur on the roof identify condition to Architect prior to demolition of existing roof and coordinate adjustments to provide tapered fibreboard counter slopes to eliminate standing ponds of water.

.2 After the roof is installed the Trade Contractor and the Contractor shall review the final roof and ensure that no area on the roof permits the ponding of water. Should ponding occur provide tapered fibreboard counter slopes to eliminate standing ponds of water.

Products: Materials: Use the following materials:

.1 Asphalt Primer: non-fibrated, asbestos free, and asphalt cutback primer, to CGSB 37-GP-9Ma as recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer.

.2 Deck Sheathing: 12.7mm (1/2”) Densdeck Firecode C manufactured by Georgia Pacific, complete 'Low Rise Foam' adhesive as manufactured by Tremco. Board manufacturer to approve fastening prior to installation. Adhesive must meet Factory Mutual 4470 Standard for Class I-90 wind uplift.

.3 Vapour Barrier: Two (2) plies of no.15 asphalt felts. Vapour barrier to demonstrate a typical moisture transmission rate of 30 ng/Pa s m2 (0.5 perms) according to ASTM E96. Install vapour barrier in a mopping of type II asphalt at a rate of 25lbs/sf. The vapour barrier shall be applied with the manufacturers approved adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer printed instructions. Vapour barrier shall be installed on 1/2" (12.7mm) thick Dens deck as manufactured by Georgia Pacific when located over steel deck.

.4 Roof Insulation: rigid polyisocyanurate foam insulation with integrally laminated facers conforming to CGSB 51.26 with minimum compressive strength of 20 psi. Provide roof insulation in multiple layers, consisting of 50mm (2”) – refer to drawings for thicknesses. .1 Acceptable materials shall be equal to ‘Energy 3’ as manufactured by Johns Manville.

.5 Fibreboard: to be 11mm (7/16”) high density asphalted impregnated fibre board as manufactured by IKO or approved equal.

.6 Base Sheets (Modified Bitumen Sheet Membrane): ‘Modiflex MP-180-SS 3.0’ as manufactured by IKO, or approved alternate.

.7 Bitumen: Type II bitumen in conformance with CSA A123.4-M79

.8 Elastomeric Flashing: polyester reinforced EPDM / SBR elastomeric sheeting suitable for adhering with hot applied flashing adhesive, equal to TRA/elastomeric, as manufactured by Tremco Canada Ltd.


Page 72 of 141

.9 Elastomeric Flashing Adhesive (for installation of elastomeric flashing located below membrane): Tremlar Adhesive Horizontal by Tremco. Install at a rate of 20 sf/gallon.

.10 Hot Flood Coat: elastomeric modified bitumen, mopping grade; equal to Thermastic 80 manufactured by Tremco.

.11 Ballast: Snow white Roofing stone by Coloured Aggregate (6 - 13mm diameter) or Marble White stone by Agrebec (5-10mm diameter), free of fines, long splinters, dust or foreign matter.

.12 Roof Pavers: heavyweight, hydraulically pressed, concrete units, with top edges beveled 5mm, (3/16 inch) factory cast for use as roof pavers; 5 percent maximum absorption to ASTM C 140; no breakage and maximum 1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance to ASTM C 67, [610 x 610mm (24 x 24 inch) size, 50mm (2 inch) thick, precast concrete paver units; smooth pattern. Provide rigid insulation base in thickness as indicated on drawings equal to ‘Styrofoam brand SM’ as manufactured by DOW.

.13 Sheet Metal Flashings: to be fabricated from minimum 26 gauge (0.6mm) base metal thickness, pre-finished, zinc coated steel sheet, commercial quality. Zinc coating to conform to ASTM A525, latest edition, with Z275 zinc coating designation. Cleats and Starter Strips to be a minimum 16 gauge (0.06”) (1.6mm) thick zinc coated steel, minimum 2” (50mm) wide; starter strips continuous. Form in profiles as detailed on the drawings. Provide alkali resistant bituminous paint. Colour to match existing flashing.

.14 Gas Pipe Flashings: to be pre-manufactured, spun aluminum gas pipe flashing complete with perforated collar and removable, vandal proof cap with EPDM pressure grommet seals to suit existing piping, Model MEF-9 as manufactured by Thaler Metal Industries Ltd., equivalent as manufactured by Lexsuco Canada Limited, or alternate approved by Consultant. Co-ordinate to suit the requirements of mechanical drawings.

.15 Vent Stack Flashings: shall be pre-manufactured, spun aluminum vent stack covers complete with integral insulation and vandalproof cap, Model SJ-38 as manufactured by Thaler Metal Industries Ltd., equivalent as manufactured by Lexsuco Canada Limited, or alternate approved by Consultant. Co-ordinate to suit the existing vents.

.16 Flexible Piping / Conduit Flashings: shall be pre-manufactured, gooseneck shaped aluminum conduit flashings, Model MEF-2A Series as manufactured by Thaler Metal Industries Ltd., equivalent as manufactured by Lexsuco Canada Limited, or alternate approved by Consultant. Co-ordinate to suit the requirements of Mechanical and Electrical Specifications / Drawings.

.17 Roof Drains: Provide spun aluminium roof drain inserts complete with backflow preventors; Hercules RetroDrain as manufactured by OMG Roofing Products (www.olyfast.com).

.18 Cant Strips: Purpose made asphalt impregnated wood fibreboard, 75mm x 75mm (3" x 3") size.

.19 Fasteners: .1 Screws: Minimum 1-1/2” (38mm) #10 cadmium plated hex head with neoprene and steel washers. .2 Nail Fasteners: Corrosion resistant metal fasteners to penetrate underside of deck minimum 1/2” (12.7mm). .3 Mechanical Fasteners (for securing membrane to nailers): 1” (25mm) round top cap nails complying with CSA B111

Standard Table 12, galvanized steel, long enough to penetrate wood blocking by at least 3/4” (19mm).


.1 General: .1 Contractor is to complete all work in conformance with OIRCA/CRCA recommendations and this specification. .2 The roofing contractor to co-ordinate the installation of the roofing so that each area is made watertight at the end of

each work period. .3 Inspect existing conditions to ensure they are suitable for roofing work to begin. Do not proceed until unacceptable

conditions are corrected. .4 Before proceeding with roofing application, ensure that:

.1 Roof and/or drains are below roofing level, and are connected.

.2 Deck is clean, free of ice and snow. Do not use salt or calcium to remove ice or snow. Ensure deck is sufficiently dry for application under specified warranty.

.3 Adjacent construction and installation of work of others incorporated with roof is completed.

.4 Materials are free of cracks that are wider than bridging ability of materials.

.5 New work that penetrates existing roofing has been installed.

.6 Wood blocking has been installed on deck surfaces, as required. .5 Apply roofing materials in accordance with drawings, specifications, material manufacturer's printed directions, and

requirements of Jurisdictional Authorities. .6 Apply as soon as possible after deck is finished on a continual basis, and to meet project construction schedule. .7 Adjustments to specified procedures caused by weather and site conditions to be made only with Consultant's

approval. .8 Maintain equipment in good working order, to ensure control of operations and protection of work. .9 Lay plies free from wrinkles, air pockets, fish-mouths, tears, and prominent lap joints. Imbed them in a uniformly spread

layer of bitumen. .10 Extend roofing sheets to outer edges of roof and up vertical surfaces.

http://www.olyfast.com/


Page 73 of 141

.11 Maintain constant supervision of kettles to ensure that bitumen is not overheated. Check temperature of bitumen in kettle every 10-15 minutes with an accurate thermometer constantly available at, but not attached to, each kettle. Do not use bitumen which is outside of specified temperature range. Dispose away from site overheated bitumen that is either on roof or at kettle.

.12 Complete entire roofing system up to line of termination of each day's work. .2 New Roof Systems:

.1 Asphalt Primer Application: Prime surfaces that are to be covered with asphaltic based roofing materials. Primer to be applied at the rate of 3.7 - 5.0 m2/litre (150 -200 sq. ft. / gallon). Ensure primer does not enter building through cracks and other openings.

.2 Deck Preparation: Remove any protrusions and ensure that deck is secure and free of damage, rot, or other deterioration. Ensure surface is clean, dry and free of any loose or unadhered materials.

.3 Installation of Deck Sheathing (at metal deck): Apply low rise foam adhesive to each top flat section of the steel deck at a rate (3/4” wide continuous beads at a minimum 12” o/c) and as recommended by the manufacturer to achieve wind up lift requirements identified in ‘materials’ section of this specification. Once adhesive begins to rise, install deck sheathing. Walk on boards to full to press them into the wet adhesive.

.4 Roof Vapour Barrier Application (at metal deck): .1 Apply two (2) ply’s’ of No. 15 felt solidly mopped in place in a uniform and continuous mopping of bitumen.

Adhesive application rate 1.0 - 1.2 kg/m2 (20 - 25 lbs. /square). .2 Lay sheets in greatest widths and lengths practical. Side laps to be 4” (100mm) and end laps to be 6”

(150mm). Stagger end laps 36” (900mm) minimum. .3 Leave sufficient material to wrap exposed ends of insulation 100mm (4 inches) with the vapour retarder at roof

edges and terminations. .4 Seal roof openings / penetrations with asphalt mastic.

.3 Insulation Panel Installation: .1 Before laying insulation, inspect vapour barrier and repair damages if any. .2 At metal roof decks mechanically fasten insulation to metal deck using a minimum of 12 fasteners for each 4’ x 8’

sheet of deck sheathing and as required to meet Factory Mutual 4470 Standard for Class I-90 wind uplift. Stagger joints and butt boards in moderate contact.

.3 Install insulation to maintain continuity of thermal envelope. Fit insulation tight around roof penetrations firmly butt each insulation board to surrounding boards. Do not force sheets of insulation into place. Do not jam or deform boards. Use largest possible pieces to minimize joints.

.4 Minimize elevation variation between boards at joints to provide level surface to accommodate subsequent roofing.

.5 Stagger joints at least 12” (300mm). Leave no voids at blocking, penetrations, walls, or parapets.

.6 Lay no more insulation at one time than can be covered by roofing in the same roofing period. Seal edge of insulation at the end of each working period. Remove seal at commencement of next working period.

.7 Add 25mm thick x 600mm wide layer of insulation at parapets and joints with vertical surfaces to provide positive drainage away from parapets.

.4 Roof Overlay Sheathing Installation: Install roof overlay board consisting of Asphalt Impregnated Fibreboard over insulation by means of a full mopping of type II asphalt.

.5 Fibre Cants: Install fibreboard cants at parapets and intersections of roofing and vertical surfaces as indicated on Drawings. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, in continuous bed of hot asphalt applied to roof sheathing overlay. Lay true to line, level and with flush, butt joints and accurate corner mitres.

.6 Membrane – 2 Ply Asphalt Built-up Application: .1 Install plies running perpendicular to the insulation’s long joint. .2 Bitumen application rate to be minimum 25 lbs. /100 sq. ft. (1.2 kg/m2). .3 Starting at the low point, install in single ply, and one (1) layer of modified bitumen base sheet. Embed ply in solid

mopping of type II asphalt. Lap base ply ends 4” (100mm) minimum and stagger end laps 36” (915mm) minimum. .4 Starting at the low point, install the second ply of modified bitumen base sheet in shingle fashion overlapping

succeeding plies 20” (500mm). Use 24” (610mm) wide plies to start and finish roof membrane along roof edges and terminations. Place ply sheets to ensure water will flow over or parallel to; but, never against exposed edges.

.5 Apply bitumen no more than 3 metres (10 feet) ahead of each roll being embedded.

.6 Immediately after installation broom and/or roll each ply before asphalt cools from unmopped side. Ensure complete and continuous seal and contact between bitumen and ply sheets, including ends, edges, and laps without wrinkles, fish mouths, or blisters.

.7 Apply uniform and continuous pressure to exposed edge and end laps to ensure complete adhesion. Lap ply sheet ends 6” (150mm) minimum and stagger end laps 36” (915mm) minimum.

.8 Avoid walking on plies until adhesive has set.

.9 Overlap previous day's work 24” (610mm).


Page 74 of 141

.10 Ply sheet to never touch ply sheet even at roof edges, laps, tapered edge strips, and cants.

.11 Cut out fish mouths / side laps which are not completely sealed; patch. Replace sheets which are not fully and continuously bonded.

.12 Cut plies off at the top of the cant.

.13 Do not install plies as phased construction. Multiply plies to be installed in continuous layered application. .7 Membrane Flashings Application:

.1 Extend reinforced elastomeric sheeting over outside face of cant and extend a minimum 1” (25mm) over the fascia blocking. Mechanically fasten with 1-1/2” (38mm) common roofing nails, 8” (200mm) on centre.

.2 Extend reinforced elastomeric sheeting down over cant strip and embed in flashing adhesive from top of cant to at least 6” (150mm) beyond toe of cant onto roof.

.3 Ensure complete bond and continuity without wrinkles or voids. Lap sheeting ends 4” (100mm); and adhere with flashing adhesive.

.4 Flashing adhesive application rate to be 25 lbs. / 100 sq. ft. (1.2 kg / m2).

.5 Over the lapped joints (vertical seams and corners) apply a layer of stripping mastic and embed a strip of stripping membrane followed by another layer of stripping mastic. Apply at a rate of 1 gallon per 12.5lf.

.6 Tie in leading edge of sheeting with stripping ply membrane embedded between alternate courses of stripping ply adhesive.

.8 Roof Drains: .1 Depress the roof insulation minimum 25mm for a distance of 2400mm (8'-0) around roof drains. .2 Install new drain assemblies and rain water leader as per manufacturer's instructions, plug / seal drain to prevent water

entry until service connection is completed. .3 Provide 1200 x 1200mm (4'-0 x 4'-0) elastomeric sheeting reinforcement to drain. Center sheeting over drain. Adhere

sheeting with continuous application of flashing adhesive. .4 Adhere sheeting with continuous application of flashing adhesive. Apply mastic to exposed edge of membrane inside

the drain opening. .5 Reclamp flashing collar to drain in bed of flashing adhesive. Trim membrane to inside face of drain and seal. .6 Overcoat lap edges and corners with end lap stripping adhesive and membrane. Tie in leading edge of sheeting with

stripping ply membrane embedded between alternate courses of stripping ply adhesive. .7 Refer to Mechanical Drawings for locations of Roof Drains.

.9 Gravel Surfacing Application: .1 Prior to application of surface treatment system, contractor to inspect roof with the consultant. .2 Ensure surface is clean and dry. Flood coat entire roof with specified flood coat rubberized bitumen at the rate of 55

lbs. / 100 sq. ft. (2.7 kg/m2). .3 Immediately broadcast minimum 600 lbs. /100 sq. ft. (19.5 kg/m2) of new, clean, dry roofing gravel. Cover flood coat

material completely. .4 Rake out gravel to provide a neat even surface.

.10 Sheet Metal Flashings: .1 Sheet metal work to be watertight under conditions. .2 Backpaint sheet metal that comes into contact with another kind of metal, or masonry with two (2) coats of isolation

coating. In any case, do not backpaint sheet metal where it comes in contact with single ply roof and flashing membrane. Remove and replace back painted metal flashing where installed over single ply membrane at no cost to the Owner.

.3 Install sheet metal work with concealed fastenings. Exposed fastenings will be permitted only with approval of Consultant, when concealed fastenings are impossible. If used, install to a weather-tight condition, and evenly and neatly locked. Do not use pop rivets.

.4 Join sheet metal by "S" seams, to permit thermal movement. Fill joints with sealant as flashing is being installed. Subsequent to installation clean off excess visible material. Space joints evenly where exposed, or as otherwise shown on drawings or approved by the Consultant. Lock seam and seal. Make corners by means of raised lock seams.

.5 Do not form open joints or pockets that fail to drain water.

.6 Apply sealant to open sheet metal joints and at juncture with other materials.

.7 Install sheet metal flashings where detailed on drawings, and for components and equipment that penetrate roofing. Provide counter-flashing over curbs for mechanical and electrical equipment.

.8 Prepare and touch up scratches on pre-painted finish with air drying formulation of the coil coating paint. Replace material at no cost to the Owner, if touching up is not acceptable to the Consultant.

Field Quality Control: .1 The Owner may engage an inspection company to inspect installation of roofing and to verify its completeness in accordance

with this Specification. .2 Notify Consultant, modified bituminous membrane Representative and Inspection Company at least 72 hours before roofing

operations commence, and arrange for a job site meeting to be held the day before the roofing starts, with the following


Page 75 of 141

present: the Consultant or his representative, the roofing manufacturer's representative, the Contractor's Superintendent, Roofing Inspector, and a principal of the Roofing Subcontractor's firm.

.3 Subsequently, give two (2) working day's prior notice to the Inspector of the commencement of each phase of the work, and provide him with materials and installation information as required.

Flood Testing: .1 Temporarily plug drains and dam horizontal surface areas to be tested and flood with water to minimum depth of 150mm.

Maintain flooded depth for [24] hours. If leaks occur repair roof and retest. Remove water at end of test. Cleaning:

.1 Clean work in accordance with Division 01. Clean to Consultant's approval, soiled surfaces, spatters, and damage caused by work of this Section.

.2 Check drains to ensure cleanliness and proper function, and remove debris, equipment and excess material from site.


Page 76 of 141

07 61 00 – SHEET METAL ROOFING

General: Scope: Provide design, labour and materials as required to provide metal roof systems. These systems to comply with the following

requirements; .1 Compliance with the following reference standards;

.1 CSA-S136 for the design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members .2 Design Requirements: The design of the metal roofing system to comply with the following;

.1 Building systems to comply with environmental loads as defined by the Ontario Building Code 2012 and the proposed building location, for a building with an importance category of ‘normal’.

.2 Design roof system to resist snow loads, snow build-up and rain load, snow piling adjacent higher roofs, snow build up resulting from use of snow guards, expected in this geographical region, wind loads, positive and negative, expected in this geographical region. The roof panels to be UL-90 rated in accordance with UL 580 test for wind uplift performance of roof assemblies. Refer also to structural drawings for loading requirements summary.

.3 Deflection: Deflection of the roof system is not to exceed 1/240th of the span for the specified live loading.

.4 Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. Temperature Change (Range): 20 degC, ambient; 40 degC, material surfaces.

.3 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings. Indicate arrangement of pre-finished Roof Sheet, including joints, types and locations of supports, fasteners, flashing, gutters, mitres, and metal components related to the roof installation. Drawings to be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer, attesting to the ability of the metal panels’ assembly to withstand the specified loads.


.1 Roof System: Single Skin TSR on metal deck by Vicwest or approved alternate.

.2 Clip and Fastening System: TSR Clip, sized to suit installation, purpose-made, sliding clip designed to accommodate expansion and contraction of the roof sheet. Made from galvanized material, thickness to suit design parameters. Provide Thermal Blocks between clips.

.3 Roof Fasteners: As specified by manufacturer, to resist wind uplift and sliding snow forces.

.4 Prefinished Roof Sheet, exposed to exterior. Profile: TSR, Seamed joint at 610mm (24 inches) c/c with standing seams a minimum of 50mm (2 inches) above the bottom of the ribbed profile. Panel: AZ150 Galvalume, sheet steel conforming to ASTM A792M Grade 340, having a nominal core thickness 0.76mm (0.030”).

.5 Panel Finishes: AZ180 Galvalume Plus, interior and exterior of the panel.

.6 Closures: Foam and metal closures to suit profiles selected, to manufacturer's recommendations.

.7 Sealants: In accordance with manufacturer's recommendation.

.8 Waterproofing: as defined in Section 07 10 00, Waterproofing.

.9 Snow guards: Snow guard shall be manufactured by S-5! Provide design / engineering and snow guard systems to prevent snow and ice from sliding off the roof at building perimeter locations. Snow guards design and system to generally have the following characteristics; .1 Provide engineering to determine number and position of snow guard’s rows, number and type of nonpenetrating

fasteners and snow dams to be located on roofs in order to resist snow loads. Drawings indicate required locations for snowguards. Development of shop drawings by Contractor shall confirm number of rows required.

.2 Contractor to confirm profile of existing roof standing seam and coordinate with required non-penetrating clip system.

.3 Provide engineered calculations that indicated total snow load per linear foot based on environmental conditions at the building location as described by the Ontario Building Code, capacity of each nonpenetrating clip, capacity of snow guard system.

.4 Submit shop drawings of system indicating components and the location and number of rows, connectors, horizontal snow bars, and snow dams. Shop drawings to be stamped by an engineer licensed to practice in the province of Ontario.

.5 System components to include the following: .1 nonpenetrating clip system to the standing seam roof; solid, milled aluminum block with round nose sets

screws, designed to suit standing seam profile for the new and existing roof profiles, .2 2.15” high x 1.5” wide, T shaped, horizontal aluminum bar with punched holes to accommodate the versaclip

and nonpenetrating clip system, continuous round slot to allow attachment of snow dams and a slotted face for decorative metal cladding (provide 22 gauge metal cladding to match colour / finish of roof system in this slot) – ColorGard system by S-5!.


Page 77 of 141

.3 3” wide aluminum section snow dam complete round clip system and neoprene gasket foot – SnoClips III by S-5!.

Execution: Installation procedure to include the following:

.1 Insulation Systems: Install metal building insulation systems to manufacturer's recommendations. Coordinate installation of metal roof system support clips as required prior to installation of the secondary layer of insulation.

.2 Install exterior prefinished roof panels on panel support clips, using manufacturer's proper construction procedure. Ensure batten is positively locked for full length of roof. Close interlocking side joints by using a purpose-made seaming machine, as supplied by the manufacturer.

.3 Where indicated on approved shop drawings, secure the end-lap of metal roofing sheets in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications and details to provide a weather-tight seal. Exposed fasteners to match colour of the roof sheet.

.4 Provide notched and formed closures, sealed against weather penetration, at changes in pitch, and at ridges and eaves, where required.

.5 Install companion flashing gutters, ventilators as shown on the shop drawings. Use concealed fasteners when possible. Exposed fasteners to match colour of roof sheet.

.6 Lock end joints and caulk to provide a weather tight seal. Clean-Up:

.1 Remove protective film from panels. Clean exposed panel surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Repair and touch up with colour matching high grade enamel minor surface damage, only where permitted by the Architect and only where appearance after touch-up is acceptable to Architect. Replace damaged panels and components that, in opinion of the Architect, cannot be satisfactorily repaired.


Page 78 of 141

07 72 00 – JOINT SEALANTS

General Scope: Provide sealants of the following types and at the specified locations. Provide sealant backing as conditions require. Provide

cleaning materials as required to remove excess sealant from adjacent material without damage. Protect the work from damage.

Products: Schedule:

.1 Type A – exterior, non-traffic bearing weather side of construction, multi component urethane based chemical curing sealant conforming to ASTM C920 Type S, Grade NS, Class 35; Dymonic FC manufactured by Tremco Limited, or approved equal. Provide sealant at joints between window / door frames and adjacent wall construction, at control joints in masonry, between and at other exterior locations as noted on the drawings.

.2 Type B – interior, non-traffic bearing, one component, interior polyurethane sealant conforming to CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87; Sikaflex 1a manufactured by Sika. Provide sealant at joints between interior window / door frames and adjacent wall construction and at other interior locations as noted on the drawings.

.3 Type C – interior sanitary caulking: one (1) component, chemical curing, mildew resistant, silicone conforming to CAN/CGSB-19.22-M, containing non-toxic fungicidal age nts; DC786 as manufactured by Dow Corning Canada Limited, Sanitary 1700 as manufactured by GE Silicones Canada or Proglaze as manufactured by Tremco Limited. Provide sealant at joints between washroom vanities, urinals, toilets, counters and backsplashes and adjacent wall / floor surfaces in kitchens, washrooms, kitchens and wet areas and as noted on the drawings.

Provide wood planks or other approved, non-staining means of protection for the completed caulking and sealants installations where required to protect the work from mechanical, thermal, chemical and other damage by other construction operations and traffic. Maintain protection securely in place until project completion.


Page 79 of 141

07 84 00 – FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALS

General: Scope: Provide tested firestop systems conforming to ‘CAN/ULC-S115 – Fire test of Fire Stop Systems’ at penetrations / joints at fire

separations in the project. Firestop systems to have ‘F’ type rating not less than value required of a closure located in the fire separation. For fire separation with a fire resistance rating of 45min, a closure or ‘F’ rating of 30 minutes (minimum) is required.

Refer to drawings for the location of fire separations. Provide cUL or ULC shop drawings for tested firestop solutions that match existing conditions of penetrations and articulate required

materials and components required to achieve required F rating. Where no cUL of ULC tested assembly is available provide and ‘engineered judgement’ prepared by the systems manufacturer and signed and sealed by an engineer licensed in the province of Ontario. Refer to Submittal Schedule.

Products: Materials to include Intumescent Firestopping Systems and related components and manufactured by Hilti. Hilti (Canada) Corporation,

Mississauga, Ontario, 1-800-363-4458/www.ca.hilti.com or equals by Tremco or AD Fireproofing.


Page 80 of 141

07 95 00 – EXPANSION CONTROL

General: Scope: Provide labour, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for complete installation of Expansion

Control and related work as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. The work of this section to include, but not be limited to the following: Wall / ceiling expansion joint cover assemblies, exterior expansion joint seals, specialty expansion joint systems, fire barrier systems. Expansion joint systems to comply with the following; .1 Shop Drawings: Submit the following data for each product, for Consultant's review before fabrication; .2 Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer’s latest published literature for materials specified herein for approval, and

obtain approval before materials are fabricated and delivered to the site. Data to clearly indicate movement capability of cover assemblies and suitability of material used in exterior seal for UV exposure.

.3 Certificates: Material test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of fire-rated expansion joint assemblies with requirements indicated.

.4 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for work specified herein for approval and obtain approval prior to fabrication and shipment of materials to the job site. Shop drawings showing full extent of expansion joint cover assemblies; include large-scale details indicating profiles of each type of expansion joint cover assembly, splice joints between sections, joinery with other types, special end conditions, anchorage’s, fasteners, and relationship to adjoining work and finishes. Include description of materials and finishes and installation instructions.

.5 Samples: Samples of materials specified herein to be submitted for approval, and approval obtained before materials are delivered to the site. Samples to include the following: Samples for each type of metal finish indicated on metal of same thickness and alloy to be used in work. Where normal colour and texture variations are to be expected, include two (2) or more units in each set of samples showing limits of such variations. Samples of each type of flexible seal to be used in work with colour samples as above.

.6 Quality Assurance: Materials and work to conform to the latest edition of reference specifications specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. Fire Performance Characteristics: Fire Resistance – Where indicated, provide expansion joint cover assemblies identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance and cycling capability has been determined per UL 2079. Fire rating not less than the rating of adjacent construction.

.7 Project Conditions: Where necessary, check actual locations of walls and other construction to which work must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings and coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work.

Products: Materials: Expansion joint cover assemblies specified herein and indicated on the drawings to be manufactured by Construction

Specialties, Inc., (T 416.740.2090), www.c-sgroup.com, or other manufacturer with prior written approval. Aluminum: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B209, alloy 6061-T6 for sheet and plate. Protect aluminum surfaces in

contact with cementitious materials with heavy metal free high solids primer or chromate conversion coating. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, Type 304 with 2B finish, unless indicated otherwise, for plates, sheets and strips. Extruded Preformed Seals: Single or multi-layered rubber extrusions as classified under ASTM D2000, designed with or without

continuous, longitudinal, internal baffles and formed to fit compatible frames, in colour indicated or if not indicated, as selected by architect from manufacturer’s standard colours.

Fire Barriers: Designed for indicated or required dynamic structural movement without material degradation or fatigue in accordance with ASTM E1966. Tested in maximum joint width condition as a component of an expansion joint cover in accordance with UL 2079 including hose stream testing of wall assemblies at full-rated period by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard anchors, fasteners, set screws, spacers, flexible vapour seals and filler materials, drain tubes, adhesives, and other accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or required for complete installations.

Fabrication: General – Provide expansion joint cover assemblies of design, basic profile, materials, and operation indicated. Select units comparable to those indicated or required to accommodate joint size, variations in adjacent surfaces, and structural movement. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize number of end joints. Provide hairline-mitered corners where joint changes directions or abuts other materials. Include closure materials and transition pieces. Tee-joints, corners, curbs, cross-connections and other accessories as required to provide continuous joint cover assemblies.

Metal Finishes: Comply with NAAM “Metal Finishes Manual” for finish designations and application recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory after products are fabricated. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces with protective covering before shipment. Aluminum Finishes: Clear Anodize Finish: AA-C204R1; medium matte etched finish with 0.4 mil minimum thick anodic coating.

Types: Provide the following expansion joint types as noted on the drawings; .1 EJ-1: to be a wall mounted interior expansion joint cover, as manufactured by CS specialties; FWS-200. .2 EJ-2: to be an interior expansion joint system composed of mechanical joint system fire block and aluminum joint covers, as

manufactured by CS specialties; RFX-2W. System to have a one (1) hour fire resistance rating.

http://www.c-sgroup.com/


Page 81 of 141

.3 EJ-3: to be corner aluminum exterior wall joint covers, comprised of extruded aluminum components, and duroflex gaskets where the cover plates contact adjacent surfaces, as manufactured by CS specialties; ASMC-200X.

Execution: Examination: Make a thorough examination of surfaces receiving the work of this section and before starting the installation, notify the

architect, in writing, of any defect which would affect the satisfactory completion of the work of this section. Preparation:

.1 Examine the contract drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness of the work required under this section.

.2 Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this section with the work of related trades, with particular attention given to the installation of items embedded in concrete and masonry so as not to delay job progress.

.3 Provide templates as required to related trade for location of support and anchorage items. Installation:

.1 In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for phases of work, including preparation of substrate, applying materials and protection of installed units.

.2 Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing expansion joint cover assemblies to in-place construction, including threaded fasteners with drilled-in fasteners for masonry and concrete where anchoring members are not embedded in concrete. Provide fasteners of metal, type and size to suit type of construction indicated and provide for secure attachment of expansion joint cover assemblies.

.3 Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of expansion joint covers. Install joint cover assemblies in true alignment and proper relationship to expansion joints and adjoining finished surfaces measured from established lines and levels.

.4 Allow adequate free movement for thermal expansion and contraction of metal to avoid buckling.

.5 Set floor covers at elevations to be flush with adjacent floor materials. If necessary, shim to level, but ensure base frames have continual support to prevent rocking and vertical deflection.

.6 Locate wall, ceiling, roof and soffit covers in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. Securely attach in place with required accessories.

.7 Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3” from each end and not more than 24” on centre.

.8 Maintain continuity of expansion joint cover assemblies with end joints held to a minimum and metal members aligned mechanically using splice joints. Cut and fit ends to produce joints that will accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal to avoid buckling of frames.

.9 Adhere flexible filler materials (if any) to frames with adhesive of pressure-sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer.

.10 Installation of extruded preformed seals: install seals to comply with manufacturer’s instruction and with minimum number of end joints.

.11 For straight sections provide preformed seals in continuous lengths.

.12 Vulcanize or heat-seal field splice joints in preformed seal material to provide watertight joints using manufacturer’s recommended procedure.

.13 Apply manufacturer’s approved adhesive, epoxy or lubricant-adhesive to both frame interfaces prior to installing preformed seal.

.14 Seal transitions in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

.15 Installation of Exterior Seal Joint Assemblies

.16 Seal end joints within continuous runs and joints at transitions in accordance with manufacturer’s directions to provide a watertight installation.

.17 Install exterior flexible seal in standard lengths. .1 Seal transitions and butt joints in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction .2 Install secondary seals in continuous lengths; vulcanize field splice joints in secondary seal material to provide

watertight joints using manufacturer’s recommended procedures Installation of Fire Barrier:

.1 Install fire barrier in accordance with federal, state and local building codes using manufacturer’s recommended procedures.

.2 Install transition and end joints to provide continuous fire resistance and in accordance with instructions. Cleaning and Protection: Do not remove strippable protective material until finish work is adjacent areas is complete. When

protective material is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer’s instructions.


Page 82 of 141

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

08 13 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

General: Scope: Provide labour and materials as required to supply hollow metal doors and frames. Submittals:

.1 Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings that note / illustrate the following; manufacturer, number, size, door types, frame types / profiles, jamb type and depth, fire rating, gauge, glass units, anchor types, finish, door core.

.2 Manufacturer’s Literature: Provide manufacturer’s literature on door and frame types and maintenance requirements. Warranty:

.1 Submit manufacturers’ standard warranty covering the maintenance, repair or replacement of defective work for a period of one (1) year from the expiration of the standard one (1) year warranty included in the Contract under the General Conditions.

.2 Structural failure, leaking, loosening, fading, discolouration, deforming and failure of doors and frames to be judged as defective work.

.3 Total warranty period to be two (2) years. Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling:

.1 Brace frame units to prevent distortion in shipment, and protect finished surfaces by sturdy protective wrappings.

.2 Store doors in protective wrappings in a secure dry location, to ensure that they are not damaged until hung. Install them only when work has progressed to a stage when no damage will occur to them in place.

Steel Fire Rated Doors and Frames: Doors and frames to be labelled and listed by an organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada in conformance with CAN/ULC S-104-2015, CAN4 S105-2016 and NFPA-80, 2016 edition for ratings specified or indicated.


.1 Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include; but are not limited to, the following: .1 Fleming Steel Doors & Frames. .2 Baron Metal Doors & Frames. .3 Artek Door Ltd. .4 Or approved equal.

Materials: .1 Steel: commercial grade steel to ASTM A568, Class 1, wiped coat galvanized to ASTM A527, coating designation ASTM

A525, ZF75 typical. Doors and Panels:

.1 Facings, rails, stiles: 5/64” (1.2mm) (18 ga.) base steel thickness.

.2 Interior Stiffeners: 0.914mm base steel thickness.

.3 Hardware Reinforcement: 1/8” (3mm) base steel thickness.

.4 Interior Doors - Sound Deadening Material: semi-rigid fibreglass 24 kg/m3 minimum density, to fill core space. Honeycomb structural core consisting of kraft paper with 3/4” (19mm) cells x core thickness may be used at interior locations.

.5 Exterior Doors - Insulating Material: 22 ga. steel stiffeners at 6” o/c with injected polyurethane foam, min U factor (imperial) 0.29, R3.4

.6 Interior Doors: door panels shall be D Series Doors by Fleming Door Products or equivalent.

.7 Glazing Stops: 1/16” (1.6mm) base steel thickness, formed, drilled and countersunk for fasteners. Interior Frames:

.1 Steel: 1/16” (1.6mm) (16 ga.) base thickness.


.3 Mortar Guards: 0.762mm base steel thickness.

.4 Rubber Bumpers: Glynn-Johnson GJ64 or approved equivalent. Exterior Frames:

.1 Steel: 1/16” (1.6mm) (16 ga.) base thickness.


.3 Mortar Guards: 0.762mm base steel thickness.

.4 Rubber Bumpers: Glynn-Johnson GJ64 or approved equivalent.

.5 Insulation: Fill solid with polyurethane foam, min U factor (imperial) 0.69, R1.45 Anchors:

.1 Frames in Masonry: adjustable "T" strap anchors.

.2 Labelled Frames: to conform to ULC requirements.

.3 Frames in Gypsum Board Partitions: steel anchor clips and floor anchors of suitable design securely welded inside each jamb.


Page 83 of 141

.4 Anchorage to Floor: minimum 1/8” (3mm) thick clip angles with 2 holes for expansion bolting to floor. Galvanizing:

.1 Typical interior units: steel sheet wipe coated with zinc-iron alloy to a total mass coating both sides of 75 g/m2 to conform to ASTM A525M, Z275 coating designation.

.2 Exterior units, and interior units in unheated areas: steel sheet coated with zinc to a total mass coating both sides of 275 g/m2 to conform to ASTM A525M, Z275 coating designation. Mill phosphatize to provide for good paint adhesion.

Fabrication: .1 General:

.1 Fit and assemble work in the shop, where possible. Make trial assembly in shop when not possible.

.2 Fabricate, reinforce and anchor component parts and assemblies to support loads that usage will impose without deflection detrimental to function, appearance or safety. For interior doors either the use of metal stiffeners with the spaces between stiffeners filled with insulation, or honeycomb structural core will be acceptable. For exterior doors the core is to be completely filled with insulation.

.3 Reinforce components to resist in-use stresses imposed by finishing and security hardware.

.4 Prepare frames and doors for finish hardware with mortises and reinforcement. Drill and tap to template information. Reinforce for surface-mounted hardware and for door closer brackets. Provide for concealed door closers where specified. Install mortar guards at cut-outs and reinforcing plates in frame. For cylindrical locks install reinforcing units to lock manufacturer's specification. For mortise locks provide a suitable internal bracket to hold the lock case rigidly in the centre of the door.

.5 Provide for anticipated expansion and contraction of frames and supports.

.6 Fit elements at intersections and joints accurately together in true planes, plumb and level.

.7 Weld frame and door assemblies. Weld continuously at joints exposed to view including door edge seams, or at joints through which air or water could penetrate from the exterior of the building to the interior. Seams shall be welded, filled and sanded flush.

.8 Where welding is impossible, connections may be bolted. Ream drilled holes and leave exposed edges clean and smooth.

.9 Isolate from each other dissimilar metals and metal from concrete or masonry, to prevent electrolysis.

.10 Ensure that exterior doors and frames are tightly fitted, and that entry of water is prevented by drips on head frames of out swinging doors exposed to weather.

.11 Make allowance in frames and doors to receive electrical conduits for security strikes and contactors which may be installed in doors and frames. Provide electrical conduit protection mortar boxes to receive conduit for electric strikes, locks, door closers, and hinges as detailed.

.12 Fabricate hollow metals and frames and screens in accordance with CSDFMSA, Specifications for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames, Latest Edition.

.13 Coordinate fabrication of hollow metal doors, frames, and screens with hardware schedule. .2 Doors and Frames:

.1 Fabricate interior and exterior doors and panels with sheet steel in specified base steel thickness.

.2 Minimum panel thickness applies only to doors not otherwise requiring heavier gauges to meet specified fire-rated construction.

.3 Fabricate doors with faces true and smooth, and with no dimples or welds visible.

.4 Bevel edges of stiles to suit door swing.

.5 Locate hardware to Canadian Steel Door & Frame Manufacturer's Association Standard, unless shown otherwise on Drawings or Door Schedule.

.6 Fill solid all voids within doors and panels with insulation, or honeycomb core. For exterior doors and panels, fill voids with insulation.

.7 Fabricate muntins, removable stops, and glass mouldings of minimum 1.2mm steel.

.8 Prepare doors to receive glass and grilles. Install grilles. Secure removable stops with countersunk Phillips oval head screws symmetrically spaced on stop lengths.

.9 Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors to make a weathertight seal, and doors to which the tops can be seen from stair landings or other high elevations, so that they are flush with face edges.

.3 Anchors: .1 Provide frames for installation in masonry walls with the following number of anchors:

.1 Frames up to 7’-6” (2300mm) height, 3 anchors

.2 Frames 7’-6” (2300mm) to 8’-0” (2400mm), 4 anchors

.3 Frames over 8’-0” (2400mm), 1 anchor for each 2’-0” (600mm) or fraction thereof in height over 8’-0” (2400mm).

.2 Provide frames for installation in stud partitions with the following number of anchors: .1 Frames up to 7’-6” (2300mm height, 4 anchors .2 Frames 7’-6” (2300mm) to 8’-0” (2400mm),, 5 anchors


Page 84 of 141

.3 Frames over 8’-0” (2400mm),, 5 anchors, plus 1 additional for each 2’-0” (600mm) or fraction thereof in height over 8’-0” (2400mm).

.3 Provide frames to be anchored to previously-placed concrete, masonry, or structural steel, with anchors of suitable design, as shown on reviewed shop drawings.

.4 Securely weld adjustable floor anchors to inside of each jamb profile, with two holes provided at each jamb for floor anchorage.

.5 Anchors shall have minimum gauges: "T" strap type, 1/16” (1.6mm) "L" type, 3/64” (1.2mm); wire type, 5/32” (3.9mm) diameter; stirrup type, 1/16” (1.6mm); stud type, 3/64” (1.2mm); jamb spreaders; 3/64” (1.2mm).

Finishing: .1 Carbon Steel: Clean and smooth work at welds which has been ground. Fill if necessary, and prime all areas from which zinc

has been removed. Fire Rated Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:

.1 Construct fire-rated doors and frames of ratings indicated, in accordance with ULC Section 120 IDO, and as otherwise required by Jurisdictional Authorities. Fire rated screens containing doors shall be labelled (whole assembly).

.2 Ensure that hardware used meets requirements of ULC 120 ID16, and installed to NFPA 80 requirements.

.3 Doors and frames indicated as labelled shall have attached ULC labels. Attach labels on the inside of the hinge jamb midway between the top hinge and the head of the door frame. Where fire doors are shown in pairs swinging in the same or opposite directions they shall bear a ULC label of a category that does not require astragals.

Temperature Rise Limit: .1 In addition to fire protection rating, certain doors require a maximum temperature rise limit, and are indicated on the Door

Schedule by the designation "TRL". .2 Provide combination temperature rise and fire protection rating label, attach to the door at the same location specified for fire

rated doors.


.1 Examine areas which are to receive the work of this section. Correct unsatisfactory conditions prior to start of work. Commencement of work implies acceptance of conditions as they exist and no extra will be allowed for failure to ensure satisfactory substrate condition.

Installation: .1 Installation of the work of this Section is specified in other Sections.


Page 85 of 141

08 14 00 – WOOD DOORS

General: Scope: Provide flush wood doors, fire rated and non-rated with paint grade wood, as indicated, schedules and specified. References:

.1 ANSI / AHA A135.4-2004, Basic Hardboard.

.2 ASTM E2074-00e1, Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, Including Positive Pressure Testing of Side-Hinged and Pivoted Swinging Door Assemblies.

.3 ASTM E413-04, Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.

.4 Architectural Woodwork Institute / Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association (AWMAC) of Canada / Quality Standards Illustrated (QSI), 2003 edition, hereafter referred to as QSI Manual, to form part of these Specifications.

.5 CAN/CSA O132.2 SERIES-90 (R1998), Wood Flush Doors.

.6 NFPA 80, Fire Doors, Fire Windows.

.7 NFPA 252, Standard Method of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. Submittals:

.1 Product Data: Indicate door core materials and edge construction; veneer species, type and characteristics.

.2 Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special blocking for hardware, identify cutouts for glazing and louvers.

.3 Samples: Submit two samples of door construction, 300mm x 300mm min size cut from top corner of door. Provide manufacturer's written installation instructions indicating special instructions as required.

Schedule: .1 Refer to drawings and Door and Hardware Schedules for sizes, types, details and ratings of doors and corresponding frames. .2 Identify and mark (concealed or removed when doors are installed and finished) in conjunction with Door and Hardware

Schedule number designations and key for site location. Door numbers to be the same as those indicated on the Door Schedule.

Delivery, Storage and Handling: .1 Arrange delivery and storage on site in a timely manner in accordance with contractor’s construction schedule, keeping site

storage to a minimum. .2 Deliver doors to project site factory-sealed, each door individually wrapped with polyethylene to prevent damage or

deterioration. .3 Provide equipment necessary for off-loading of materials to complete the work. .4 Protect materials from damage, dampness, weather and store in a dry place. .5 Immediately remove damaged or deteriorated doors from site and return to supplier for re-use and recycling

Warranty: .1 Submit a warranty in accordance with Section 01 33 00, covering the replacement of defective work for a period of two (2)

years from the expiration of the one-year warranty under the General Conditions. .2 Warping, shrinking, twisting, showing of core ghost lines, splitting, delaminating, or sagging under normal use will be

considered as defects. Warpage to not exceed 1/4” (6mm) clearance over height or width. .3 Warranty to cover hanging, refinishing, and complete replacement costs of defective doors. .4 Total warranty period: three (3) years.

Products: Acceptable Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers are acceptable subject to conformance to requirements of

Drawings, Door Schedule and Specifications: .1 Baillargeon Doors Inc. .2 Cambridge Door Company Ltd. .3 Cedoor Inc. .4 JWS Manufacturing Inc. .5 Lambton Doors .6 Premdor Inc. .7 Sauder Industries Ltd. .8 Weyerhaeuser Architectural Door Division

Materials: .1 General: Conform to the specified requirements of CAN/CSA-0132.2 for wood flush doors, except as specified herein. .2 Wood Doors:

.1 Construction: 7 ply

.2 Core: Solid mat-formed wood particleboard core conforming to CAN/CSA-0188.1-M Grade DC. Core to be minimum 513 kg. /m3 high-density.1659

.3 Frame: refer to Section 08 71 00, Door Hardware. .3 Door Facing: Paint grade Masonite.


Page 86 of 141

.4 Glazing Stops: At non-rated doors to be beveled birch mouldings to match Weyerhaeuser “W-3” profile. At rated doors to be equivalent to “BFL-123” Series, factory plated to match door hardware finish, as manufactured by Anemostat Door Products.

.5 Adhesives: Type II conforming to CSA 0112.5-M, moisture resistant urea formaldehyde resin adhesive. Fabrication:

.1 General: .1 Fabricate doors and frames to meet specified requirements for service in interior locations, in sizes and designs

indicated on drawings and schedules. .2 Fabricate slab doors 1-3/4” (44mm) thick, 7-ply solid-core construction, unless indicated otherwise on drawings and

schedules. .3 Provide (particleboard core) doors with built-up full height stiles, and full width rails. Fabricate stiles and rails,

hardwood outer piece laminated to inner piece. Fabricate stiles and rails to conform to CAN/CSA 0132.2. Laminate 1/16” (1.6mm) thick hardwood veneer crossbanding to serve as substrate for facing material. Incorporate solid wood blocking at locations where finish hardware and security hardware is installed.

.4 Sand back of facing material to provide a homogeneous bonding surface. Bond the facing material to manufacturer's instructions to provide a perfectly smooth surface, free from distortion, waves, or ridges.


.1 Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. .1 Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been

installed with level heads and plumb jambs. .2 Reject doors with defects.

.2 Correct unsatisfactory conditions.

.3 Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

.4 Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment. Installation:

.1 Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

.2 Install fire-rated frames and fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80.

.3 Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.

.4 Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

.5 Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.

.6 Placing Frames: Comply with AWI Custom Grade quality standard. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

.7 Wall Anchors: Provide at least three anchors per jamb. For openings 2286mm (90”) or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs.

.8 Gypsum Board Partitions: For in-place partitions, install knock-down, drywall slip-on frames.

.9 Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with ANSI/DHI A115.1G.

.10 After installation, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames and touch up prime coat with compatible air-drying primer.


Page 87 of 141

08 51 13 – ALUMINUM WINDOWS AND DOORS

General: Scope: Provide new aluminum windows systems. Systems to comply with the following requirements;

.1 Compliance with the following reference standards; .1 AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101 I.S.2/A440-11 - North American Fenestration Standard / Specification for Windows, Doors and

Skylights, including the Canadian Supplement A440S1-09 .2 ASTM E283 Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and

Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences across the Specimen. .3 ASTM E331 – Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls

by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. .4 ASTM E330 – Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors Skylights and Curtain

Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. Warranty:

.1 Submit a warranty covering the maintenance, repair or replacement of defective work for a period of nine (9) years from the expiration of the standard one (1) year warranty included in the Contract under the General Conditions.

.2 Structural failure, leaking, loosening, fading, discolouration, deforming and failure of glazing units to be judged as defective work.

.3 Total warranty period to be ten (10) years. Submittals:

.1 Samples: Submit one (1) representative 24” x 24” (600mm x 600mm) sample of the curtain wall. Include frame, sash, sill, vision glass, spandrel panel and weatherproofing method, and surface finish.

.2 Test Reports: .1 Submit test reports from approved independent testing laboratories, certifying compliance with specifications, for:

Windows: .1 air infiltration to ASTM E283 .2 air exfiltration to ASTM E293 .3 static water penetration to ASTM E547 .4 structural design load deflection to ASTM E330

.2 Insulation Value: Overall and combined thermal resistance values inclusive of frame and insulated glazing unit. .3 Shop Drawings:

.1 Indicate materials and details in scale full size for head, jamb and sill, profiles of components, interior and exterior trim junction between combination units, elevations of unit, anchorage details, location of isolation coating, description of related components, and exposed finishes, fasteners, and caulking.

.2 Indicate size location of steel reinforcing located in aluminum mullions.

.3 Provide data / tables / and or test result that prove the window frame and insulated unit with achieve the thermal performance requirements required by this specification and the Ontario Building Code.

.4 Shop drawings to bear the seal and signature of a qualified Professional Structural Engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario.

.5 Shop drawings for windows and curtain wall must be coordinated with exterior cladding design and shop drawings for the metal wall panel and metal cladding systems.

.4 Manufacturer’s Maintenance Data: Provide manufacturer’s maintenance data for the curtain wall system.


.1 Aluminum Curtain Wall Systems: VersaWall SlimLine 1750 series as manufactured by Alumicor Inc., tel 416 745 4222 or approved equal. The curtain wall system to have the following characteristics; .1 Cap: 44.5mm (1 3/4”). .2 Mullion Depth: 89mm (3 1/4”). .3 Thermal Break: sized to coordinate with insulated unit .4 Interior + Exterior Finishes: Anodized Aluminum. .5 Minimum Thermal Performance of Window Assembly: minimum R value to be R3.0 (U=0.34), min SHGC of 0.45,

minimum visible light transmission / solar heat gain coefficient to be not less than 1.10. .6 Minimum Structural Performance of Window Assembly: The window assembly and the connections of the window to

the superstructure of the existing building to be designed to suit proposed opening sizes / configurations of the curtain wall and the window loads as defined by the OBC without deformation and act as a guard in accordance with OBC part 4 requirements.


Page 88 of 141

.7 Minimum Environmental Performance of Window Assembly: Curtain wall to be designed to provide a rainscreen – thereby allowing preventing water from entering the building or exterior wall assembly and allowing water to drain from and out of the curtain wall system where required.

.2 Aluminum Vestibule Systems: Flushglaze TL 1800 Series (non-thermally broken) as manufactured by Alumicor Inc., tel 416 745 4222 or approved equal. The vestibule glazing system to have the following characteristics; .1 Overall Frame Dimensions: 1 3/4” (44.5mm) x 4 1/2” (114.3mm) .2 Aluminum Finishes: Bronze anodized. .3 Glass: Refer to Section 08 81 00 – Glass and Glazing. .4 Door Adapter: Provide required door adapters at head and jambs of the door to permit installation of new aluminum

doors as scheduled. .5 Accessories: Provide fasteners, glazing tapes and other required and related accessories as required to suit

application. .3 Aluminum Windows: ShadowLine 970 series as manufactured by Alumicor Inc., tel 416 745 4222 or approved equal,

complete with the following characteristics; .1 4 1.2” deep frame profile .2 Minimum Thermal Performance of Window Assembly: minimum R value to be R3.0 (U=0.34), min SHGC of 0.45,

minimum visible light transmission / solar heat gain coefficient to be not less than 1.10. .3 Thermal Break: sized to coordinate with insulated unit

.4 Aluminum Window Operators: UniVent 1350 series as manufactured by Alumicor Inc., tel 416 745 4222 or approved equal, awning type, operators complete with the following characteristics; .1 4 9/32” (108.6mm) deep x 1 ¾” (44.5mm) wide frame profile, .2 Weather-stripping at side of opening, .3 Operator Restrictors: Provide restrictors on operable units to prevent windows from opening to provide more that a 4”

(102mm) clear space between frames on all windows above one storey in height. .4 Hardware for bottom hung awning: projecting window spring catch and transom latch keeper, comes with transom

hook and pole, provide cam handle locks with pole operated handle. .5 Removable insect screens with aluminum framing and stainless steel mesh screening, .6 Minimum Environmental Performance of Window Assembly: Curtain wall to be designed to provide a rainscreen –

thereby allowing preventing water from entering the building or exterior wall assembly and allowing water to drain from and out of the curtain wall system where required.

.5 Aluminum Doors Systems .1 For exterior doors; Thermaporte 7700 series aluminum doors, model T400A as manufactured by Alumicor Inc., tel

416 745 4222 or approved equal. The door system to have the following characteristics; .1 Door Sizes (width and height): to conform with the door schedule – refer to drawings .2 Door Thickness: 1.75 inches .3 Door Stiles: 4 inches .4 Bottom Rail: 7 inches .5 Top Rail: 3 7/8 inches .6 Insulated unit to be GL-1; tripled glazed with an overall thickness of 1.0 inches .7 Minimum Thermal Performance of Window Assembly: minimum R value to be R1.4, min SHGC of 0.45

.2 For interior vestibule doors; Canadiana HD series aluminum doors, model 400A as manufactured by Alumicor Inc., tel 416 745 4222 or approved equal. The door system to have the following characteristics; .1 Door Sizes (width and height): to conform with the door schedule – refer to drawings .2 Door Thickness: 1.75 inches .3 Door Stiles: 4 inches .4 Bottom Rail: 7 inches .5 Top Rail: 3 7/8 inches .6 Glass to be TGL – fully tempered.

.6 Low-Pressure Spray-Foam: .1 As recommended by aluminum frame manufacturer and in accordance with the Ontario Building Code. .2 Install as per manufacturers written instructions.

.7 Accessories: Provide fasteners, glazing tapes and other required and related accessories as required to suit application.


.1 Field verify jamb, head and sill conditions and dimensions of rough openings.


Page 89 of 141

.2 Develop shop drawings of required products. Identify and design structural connection of window / framing to existing superstructure. Confirm windows meet required wind and thermal loading. Provide engineered shop drawings to consultants for review.

.3 Install new window systems. Tie in new assemblies to existing air and vapour barriers as detailed.

.4 Provide low expansion spray foam insulation at sills, jambs and heads to seal areas around new window and door framing systems.

.5 Install new insulated units.

.6 Install new door hardware.


Page 90 of 141

08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE – SUPPLY Scope: Provide door hardware in accordance with Owners requirements and in compliance with the Ontario Building Code 2012,

.1 Submittals: .1 Shop Drawings: Provide an updated hardware schedule prepared by an accredited architectural hardware consultant

(AHC). .2 Manufacturer’s Literature: Provide manufacturer’s literature on hardware types and maintenance requirements.

.2 Warranty: .1 Submit a warranty covering the maintenance, repair or replacement of defective work for a period of one (1) year from

the expiration of the standard one (1) year warranty included in the Contract under the General Conditions. .2 Structural or operational failure, loosening, discolouration, deforming of the hardware to be judged as defective work. .3 Total warranty period to be two (2) years.

.3 Schedule: .1 Aluminum Doors

.1 Pulls

.2 Locksets

.3 Automatic Operators, push buttons, related equipment

.4 Electric Strikes, where required

.5 Closers

.6 Overhead Friction Stops

.7 Thresholds .2 Interior HM Doors:

.1 Latchset

.2 Hinges

.3 Deadlock

.4 Kickplate

.5 Top and bottom bolt

.6 Overhead Friction Stop or Wall Stop (as required)

.7 Smoke Sweep (if required, refer to Door Schedule)

.8 Set Smoke Seal (if required, refer to Door Schedule) .3 Exterior HM Doors:

.1 Hinges

.2 Lockset

.3 Deadlock

.4 Lockguard

.5 Closer

.6 Kickplate

.7 Threshold

.8 Door sweep

.9 Weatherstripping .4 Door Hardware shall be from the following manufacturers, or equal:

.1 Stanley: Hinges

.2 Best: Lockets, cylinders

.3 Sargeant: Locks, closers

.4 CBH: Kickplates


Page 91 of 141

08 71 10 – DOOR HARDWARE – INSTALLATION Scope: Provide labour and materials required to install doors and hardware scheduled for the project. Complete work in accordance

with the following; .1 Fire Rated Doors, Frames and Hardware: Install fire rated assemblies in accordance with NFPA-80-2016 edition, CAN/ULC

S-104-2015, CAN4 S105-2016 for ratings specified or indicated. .2 Product Handling: Accept delivery of doors and finish hardware. Inspect doors for damage, upon delivery to the site. Hollow

metal doors which cannot be readily corrected by sanding, to be promptly returned to the manufacturer. Store doors in a dry and clean location. Store in a temperature and humidity controlled area. Stack 6” (150mm) off the floor. Be responsible for any damage to doors and hardware from time of delivery until accepted by Owner after installation. Provide locked room for the storage of hardware at the job and a person responsible for the control and distribution of hardware.

.3 Quality Assurance: Installation is to be executed by the Hardware Supplier’s installer and by personnel with a minimum of five (5) years’ experience in the installation of finishing hardware.

.4 Protection: Protect hardware from damage during construction period by removing and reinstalling or where necessary, using temporary hardware to maintain finish in new condition and maintain manufacturer’s warranty.

.5 Installation of Finish Hardware: .1 Install hardware at mounting heights as specified in the manufacturers’ templates or specific references in approved

hardware schedule or approved elevation drawings. Where mounting height is not otherwise specified, install hardware at mounting heights as agreed to by Owner and Consultant.

.2 Install hardware using only manufacturer supplied and approved fasteners in strict adherence with manufacturers published installation instructions.

.3 Ensure that locksets / latch sets / deadlocks are of the correct hand before installation to ensure that the cylinder is in the correct position. Handing is part of installation procedure.

.4 Ensure that exit devices are of the correct hand and adjust device cam for proper outside trim function prior to installation. Handing is part of installation procedure.

.5 Follow manufactures installation instructions. Adjustment is inclusive of spring power, closing speed, latching speed and back-check at the time of installation.

.6 Delayed action door closers are to be adjusted to forty (40) second delay for handicapped accessibility and movement of materials. Time period to be approved by Owner.

.7 Install head seal prior to installation of “PA”-parallel arm mounted door closers and push side mounted door stops/holders.

.8 Counter sink through bolt of door pull under push plate during installation.

.9 Mount closers, automatic operators and hold-open devices with through bolts, as indicated in the finish hardware schedule.

.10 Set, fit and adjust hardware according to manufacturer's directions. Hardware to operate freely. After installation, adjust door closers for closing and latching speed and panic devices for proper latching. Protect installed hardware from damage and paint spotting.

.11 Pre-drill kick plates and doors before attachment of plates. Apply with water-resistant adhesive and countersunk stainless steel screws.

.12 Locate hardware in accordance with the hardware schedule.

.13 Thresholds: Site measure openings before cutting. Set thresholds on two continuous beads of caulking conforming to item entitled Sealant in this specification.

.14 Door Closers and Holders: Install door closers in such a manner that door opening is unaffected, and that maximum swing is permitted.

.15 Weather stripping of Doors: Install weather stripping effectively to tightly seal entire perimeter of doors. Secure in place with non-ferrous screws, in accurate alignment. Maintain integrity of weather seal at head of doors fitted with closers. Adapt weather stripping as required to achieve specified performance and provide any necessary accessories.

.16 Electronic Hardware: Install electronic handicap operator components, security components such as magnetic locks, door status switches, card readers, processors, transformers, and other electric devices. Wiring will be supplied and installed by Electrical Division 16 including conduit, boxes and other electrical appurtenances, including connections and terminations. Be responsible for ensuring that wiring work is done in accordance with the suppliers wiring diagrams and directions. Arrange for testing and commissioning of system by the distributor of the system. Submit a copy of reports to the Consultant. Note: When installing electric strikes, it is imperative that doors are perfectly aligned to enable the bolt to properly close. Also ensure that rubber silencers do not impair the proper strike action required. Adjust or remove silencers as necessary.

Adjusting and Cleaning of Finish Hardware: .1 Check and adjust each operating hardware item to ensure proper operation and function of unit. Check locked doors against

approved keying schedule. .2 Lubricate moving parts as recommended by hardware manufacturer. Use graphite type lubricant if no other is recommended.


Page 92 of 141

.3 Repair or replace defective materials and units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly. Re-install items found improperly installed.

.4 Prior to date of Substantial Performance, re-adjust and re-lubricate as necessary.

.5 Instruct Owner's designated personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and finishes at time of final hardware adjustment. Provide written verification to Consultant that this instruction has occurred.

.6 Hardware to be left clean and free of disfigurements. Field Quality Control:

.1 Perform bi-monthly on-site inspections during hardware installation and provide inspection reports listing progress of work, unacceptable work and corrective measures. Repair or replace as directed by the Consultant.

.2 Upon completion of finish hardware installation, the Consultant, the Hardware Supplier, Installer, and General Contractor to do a thorough “walk-through” of the Project to determine that Finish and Security Products are; .1 Furnished and installed in compliance with the Specification. .2 Acceptable to the Owner as to fit their requirements, final installation, adjustment, and correct applications.

.3 In the event the Consultant rejects any product or installation, the Contractor to correct the condition at no expense to the Owner, until the Consultant gives final acceptance. The Installer and the Contractor to record and provide a list of hardware deficiencies. The Hardware Supplier to re-inspect when notified by the Installer as to the clearing of deficiencies. The Installer and the General Contractor to certify in writing that hardware items and their installation are in accord with requirements of Contract Documents. Final inspection must ensure hardware items operate as per Hardware Supplier requirements. Coordinate final inspections with the Hardware Supplier’s representatives as required to establish warranties. Send correspondence directly to the Consultant and copied to the Owner.


Page 93 of 141

08 81 00 – GLASS + GLAZING

General: Scope: Provide labour and materials required to supply and install glass and glass product on the project. References:

.1 ASTM C1048 - 12e1 Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass.

.2 ASTM C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

.3 ASTM C1172, Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass.

.4 CAN/CGSB 12.1-90, Tempered or Laminated Safety Glass.

.5 CAN/CGSB 12.3, Flat, Clear Float Glass.

.6 CAN/CGSB 12.8, Insulating Glass.

.7 CAN/CGSB 12.9, Spandrel Glass.

.8 CAN/CGSB 12.20, Structural Design of Glass for Buildings.

.9 ULC CAN-S104, Standard Method For Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

.10 ULC CAN-S106, Standard Method For Fire Tests of Window and Glass Block Assemblies Submittals:

.1 Submit information requested and specified in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

.2 Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of product specified. Data to indicate compliance with specification

and installation recommendations of manufacturer of products being used. .2 Submit copy of manufacturer's warranty, in Owner's name for review by consultant.

.3 Samples: .1 Submit samples of materials if required by Consultant before commencing work of this section. Samples to be clearly

labeled with manufacturer's name and type. .2 Submit samples of spandrel glass coatings for review and acceptance by Consultant prior to ordering. .3 Samples for Verification: Upon consultant’s request furnish a 12” x 12” samples of glass types, gaskets, tapes and

sealants. .4 Shop Drawings:

.1 Submit shop drawings, to the Consultant for review prior to fabrication.

.2 Maintenance Data:

.3 Upon completion of installation, supply instructions covering re-glazing, adjustments and other relevant maintenance data.

Quality Assurance: .1 Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, except where more

stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or referenced standards. .1 GANA: “Glazing Manual,” “Laminated Glazing Manual,” and “Sealant Manual.” .2 IGMA: "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

.2 Single-source fabrication responsibility: glass fabricated for each type to be processed and supplied by a single fabricator. Delivery, Storage and Handling:

.1 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver packaged materials in their original containers with manufacturer's labels and seals intact.

.2 Storage and Handling Requirements: Store vertically, blocked off the floor in a weatherproof enclosure in original containers with manufacturers labels and seals intact until read for installation, and as follows: .1 Install glass as soon as possible after delivery to site. .2 Handle glass carefully to its place of installation. .3 Prevent damage to glass, adjacent materials and surfaces.

Environmental Conditions: .1 Ambient Conditions: Maintain temperature, humidity and solar exposure conditions of Glass Glazing materials during shipping,

storage and site installation as required by manufacturer to maintain warranty and performance of installed products. Warranty: Provide a warranty for insulated units that complies with the following;

.1 Warranty to cover the repair or replacement of defective work, starting at substantial completion of the project.

.2 Structural failure, leaking, loosening, condensation within units, deforming and failure of glazing units to be judged as defective work.

.3 Provide a Total Workmanship Warranty for a period of ten (10) years for components of the insulated units.

.4 Record noted deficiencies and arrange for their proper repair under warranty.


Page 94 of 141

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements specified in this section, the following manufacturers are approved to be installed specified

products on this project: .1 Oldcastle Glass .2 Guardian Industries .3 Vitro Architectural Glass .4 AGC .5 Vitricon

Float Glass: Glazing quality, conforming to CAN/CGSB 12.3, minimum thickness as indicated or as required by Code. Glazing in Rated Doors, Side Lites, Glazed Walls:

.1 Fire Rated Glass (FG): .1 5mm (3/15”) thick with standard grade surface, to be rated as indicated on drawings, Traditional Wired Glass is not to

be used in this project. .1 Approved Product: ‘FireLite’ as manufactured by Fire Glass, or approved equal. .2 Approved Frames: Refer to Section 08 13 13, Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

Safety (Laminated) Glass: Type 1, laminated; Class B, float or plate glass, clear; conforming to CAN/CGSB 12.11-M90, 0.762mm (0.030") minimum thickness vinyl interlayer.

Security Glass (SG-1): Type 2, tempered; Class B, float or plate glass, clear; conforming to CAN/CGSB 12.11, 6mm thickness minimum. .1 Window film to be equal to ‘Ultra Prestige Series’ by 3M, on side as recommended by Manufacturer.

Safety (Tempered) Glass (TPG): Type 2, tempered; Class B, float or plate glass, clear; conforming to CAN/CGSB 12.11, 6mm thickness minimum.

Frosted Glass (FTD): Acid etched frosted glass on underside only, top will be smooth, gradient to be determined later by Architect. Submit 6” x 6” samples for review before fabrication of glass.

Heat Strengthened Glass: CAN/CGSB 12.9-M, Type 2, Heat-Strengthened Glass, Class A Float Glass. Bird Friendly Glass:

.1 Subject to compliance with requirements specified in this section, the following manufacturers are approved to be installed specified products on this project: .1 ‘BirdsiGlass’ by iMagic Glass. .2 Or ceramic frit dots 6mm dia. 100mm on centre

Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl with continuous spacer, Shore "A" 10-15 durometer hardness paper release, black colour, 1/8” (3mm) x 3/8” (10mm).

Warm Edged Spacers: Provide warm edged spacer in the construction of insulated units equal to Edgetech Super ‘U’ Spacer. Insulated Units:

.1 All insulated unit configurations are basis of design, equals to be approved by Consultant.

.2 Configuration for insulated glazing type GL-1 (Double Glazed): .1 Outboard Lite: 6mm (1/4”) clear tempered glass with Solarban 70XL reflective coating on surface 2 by Vitro

Architectural Glass. .2 Space 1: 13mm (1/2”) thick, filled with Argon – minimum Argon Concentration = 95% with non-metallic spacer. .3 Inboard Lite: 6mm (1/4”) clear tempered glass by Vitro Architectural Glass.

.1 Overall unit thickness: 25mm (1”).

.2 Winter night time U-value of: 1.32 W/m2C or lower (0.23 BTU/hr./ft2/F)

.3 Solar Heat Gain Coefficient of: 0.27 +/-

.4 Daylight transmittance of: 64% +/- .3 Configuration for insulated glazing type GL-2 (Triple Glazed):

.1 Outboard Lite: 6mm (1/4”) clear tempered glass with Solarban R100 reflective coating on surface 2 by Vitro Architectural Glass.

.2 Space 1: 13mm (1/2”) thick, filled with Argon – minimum Argon Concentration = 95% with non-metallic spacer.

.3 Centre Lite: 6mm (1/4”) clear tempered glass by Vitro Architectural Glass. with Solarban 70XL reflective coating on surface 3 by Vitro Architectural Glass.

.4 Space 2: 13mm (1/2”) thick, filled with Argon – minimum Argon Concentration = 95% with non-metallic spacer.

.5 Inboard Lite: 6mm (1/4”) clear tempered glass by Vitro Architectural Glass. .1 Overall unit thickness: 43.4mm (1 11/16”) .2 Winter night time U-value of: 1.00 W/m2C or lower (0.18 BTU/hr/ft2/F) .3 Solar Heat Gain Coefficient of: 0.18 or lower .4 Daylight transmittance of: 30% or higher .5

Glazed Walls: .1 Glazing to meet NFPA 257: Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies.


Page 95 of 141

.2 Fire-Resistive Glazing: .1 Fire-resistive glazing limits transfer of heat through the glass, designated to block the passage of excessive heat, hot

gases or flames and many meet the Category II impact requirements. .2 Glass Products:

.1 For areas requiring fire-resistance-rated construction (materials that block heat transfer during a fire), use Pilkington Pyrostop®. with ratings from 45- to 120-minutes

.3 Types of Framing: .1 Frames for up to Category II impact safety ratings can also function as heat transfer barrier to ASTM E119 and UL 263

test requirements. .2 Frame Products:

.1 Fireframes Aluminum Series. Fabrication and Manufacture:

.1 Label each light of glass with the registered name of the product and the weight and quality of the glass.

.2 Check dimensions on site before cutting materials.

.3 Minimum bite or lap of glass on stops and rabbets as recommended by glass manufacturer. Finish surfaces to be free of tong marks.

.4 Cut glass true to dimensions, square, plumb and level. Verify dimensions prior to fabrication.

.5 Distortion, pock marking or defects detrimental to appearance and/or performance, as determined by the Consultant, will be rejected.


.1 Take critical site dimensions to ensure that adjustments in fabrication or installation are provided for, and that clearances to other constructions have been maintained.

.2 Ensure that anchors and inserts installed by others are adequate to meet specified requirements, and make adaptations before installation.

.3 Accurately measure openings and calculate light size based on manufacturer's installation tables, allowing for proper minimum edge engagement, rabbet width, rabbet depth, and expansion.

.4 Free rabbets, stops and glass edges of dust, dirt, moisture, oil and other foreign matter detrimental to or obstructing the glazing material.

.5 Follow manufacturer's recommendations for preparation.

.6 Unless otherwise specified, dry glaze interior glass.

.7 Remove and replace glazing stops in original locations using original fasteners, securely set and undamaged.

.8 Use setting blocks and spacers as required to properly support the glass, centred in place in glazing space independent of the materials and to uniformly distribute its load.

.9 Use a minimum of 2 setting blocks, locate at 1/8 points. Locate spacers at jamb edges of glass, uniformly spaced at 24” (600mm) o.c. maximum, and 12” (300mm) maximum from top and bottom.

.10 Ensure rattle-free cushioning. Cleaning:

.1 Repair defects caused by work of this section.

.2 Remove excess or foreign materials or droppings that would set or become difficult to remove from surfaces at time of final cleaning.

.3 Immediately prior to acceptance of work of this section by Consultant, remove temporary protection, clean and polish exposed surfaces of work of this section. Use proper cleaning materials and methods to prevent damage to surfaces, finishes, sealer or work of other trades. Make good such damage to Consultant's satisfaction.

.4 Do not use steel wool, wire brushes or steel scrapers on any finished surfaces.

.5 Replace or make good to Consultant's satisfaction, upon completion of work of this section, defective, scratched or damaged work, at no extra cost to the Owner.


Page 96 of 141

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

09 21 16 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

General: Scope:

.1 Provide labour and material required to supply and install gypsum board and metal stud systems. Gypsum board and metal stud materials and accessories to be in accordance with CAN/CSA A82.27.

References: .1 Built Green Canada Program & Guide for High Density (HD) Multi Family Residential New Construction. .2 ASTM C442 – Standard Specification for Gypsum Backing Board, Gypsum Core board and Gypsum Shaft liner Board .3 ASTM C475 – Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board .4 ASTM C840 – Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board .5 ASTM C1177 – Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing .6 ASTM C1396 – Standard Specification for Gypsum Board .7 ASTM F1267 – Standard Specification for Metal, Expanded, Steel .8 CAN/ULC-S102 – Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies .9 CAN/ULC-S102.2 – Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Flooring, Floor Coverings and Miscellaneous

Materials and Assemblies .10 Gypsum Association (GA):

.1 GA-214 - Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.

.2 GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.

Products: Gypsum Wallboard: Conforming to ASTM C1396, ivory paper faced, tapered edges, 1219mm (48") wide sheets of maximum

practical lengths to minimize end joints. .1 Acceptable Materials:

.1 ‘Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Panels’ by CGC Canada Inc.

.2 ‘ProRoc Regular’ by CertainTeed.

.3 ‘ToughRock Gypsum Wallboard’ by Georgia-Pacific Canada. Fire-Rated Gypsum Board 'Type X': Conforming to ASTM C1396, 1219mm (48”) wide sheets of maximum practical lengths to

minimize end joints, tapered edges, 5/8" (16mm) thick, as indicated on drawing. .1 Acceptable Materials:

.1 ‘Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Panels, Firecode Core’ by CGC Canada Inc.

.2 ‘ProRoc Type X’ by CertainTeed.

.3 ‘ToughRock Fireguard Gypsum Board’ by Georgia-Pacific Canada. Gypsum Ceiling Board: Sag Resistant Gypsum Board: Meeting requirements of ASTM C1396M, ceiling board manufactured to have

more sag resistance than regular type gypsum board with long edges tapered, and as follows: .1 Location: Ceiling surfaces. .2 Acceptable Materials:

.1 ‘Sheetrock Interior Ceiling Board’ by CGC Canada Inc.

.2 ‘Tough Rock CD Ceiling Board’ by Georgia Pacific Canada.

.3 ‘ProRoc Interior Ceiling Board’ by CertainTeed. Water (Moisture) and Mould Resistant Wallboard: Conforming to ASTM C1396 or ASTM C1278, 1219mm (48”) wide panels of

maximum practical lengths to minimize end joints, tapered edges, thick, with water (moisture) and mould resistant core. Mould resistant panel score of 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273 and evaluated to ASTM D3274. Less than 5% water absorption by weight after 2-hour immersion, as per ASTM C473. .1 Acceptable Materials: Paperless, coated fibreglass mat on face, back and long edges, water-resistant treated core gypsum

board. Conforming to ASTM C1658: .1 ‘DensArmour Plus High Performance Interior Panels’ by Georgia Pacific Canada. .2 ‘Sheetrock Glass Mat Mold Tough’ by CGC Canada Inc. .3 ‘ProRoc M2 Tech’ by CertainTeed.

Water (Moisture) and Mould Resistant Wallboard 'Type X': Minimum 5/8" (15.9mm) thick or as noted on drawings; with water (moisture) and mould resistant core as above. .1 Acceptable Materials:

.1 ‘DensArmour plus Fireguard Type X Interior Panels’ by Georgia-Pacific Canada.

.2 ‘Fiberock Brand Aqua-Tough Interior Panels Type X’ by CGC Canada Inc.

.3 ‘ProRoc M2 Tech Type X’ by CertainTeed.


Page 97 of 141

Exterior Sheathing Board: Glass mat faced, water-resistant treated core gypsum board, 1219mm (48”) wide sheets of maximum practical lengths to minimize end joints, silicone treated gypsum core, front and back faces penetrated with inorganic glass fibre mats, square edge, conforming to ASTM C1177. Mould resistant panel score of 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273 and evaluated to ASTM D3274. .1 Acceptable Materials:

.1 ‘Securock Glass-Mat Sheathing’ by CGC Canada Inc.

.2 ‘Dens-Glass Gold’ by Georgia-Pacific Canada.

.3 ‘GlasRoc Sheathing’ by CertainTeed. Exterior Sheathing Board 'Type X': Glass mat faced, water-resistant treated core gypsum board, 1219mm (48") wide sheets of

maximum practical lengths to minimize end joints, silicone treated gypsum core, front and back faces penetrated with inorganic glass fibre mats, square edge, conforming to ASTM C1177. Mould resistant panel score of 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273 and evaluated to ASTM D3274. .1 Acceptable Materials:

.1 ‘Securock Firecode Type X’ by CGC Canada Inc.

.2 ‘Dens-Glass Gold Fireguard Type X’ by Georgia-Pacific Canada.

.3 ‘GlasRoc Sheathing Type X’ by CertainTeed. Exterior Sheathing Board with Vapour Permeable Weather Barrier: Applied to exterior face of Gypsum Board:

.1 Vapour Permeable, Water Resistant Sheathing: with integrated water resistant (air barrier, permeable vapour barrier) directly in the gypsum board below the fibreglass mat facer.

.2 Acceptable Systems: .1 ‘DensElement’ by Georgia-Pacific Canada with Prosoco R-Guard Fast Flash liquid Flashing. .2 ‘Securerock ExoAir 430 Air Barrier System’ by CGC/USG Inc. & Tremco Inc., with Dymonic 100 liquid Flashing.

Tile Backer Board: Water-resistant, mould-resistant, abrasive resistant with a fibreglass mat facer, for interior walls and ceilings. For use in wet and high traffic areas. Suitable for noncombustible construction conforming to CAN/ULC S102. .1 Acceptable Materials:

.1 ‘Glass-Mat Tile Backer Board’ by CGC/USG Inc.

.2 ‘DensShield Tile Baker’ by Georgia-Pacific Canada.

.3 ‘GlasRoc Diamondback Tile Backer’ by CertainTeed. Gypsum Board Liner Panels: 25.4mm (1”) thick x 609.6mm (2’-0”) wide gypsum liner panels friction fit, in accordance with ASTM

E136, gypsum core UL-classified as non-combustible, ASTM E84, flame spread is 20; smoke developed is 0. Gypsum Board Liner Panels to be in accordance with ULC Design No 452. .1 Acceptable Materials:

.1 ‘Sheetrock Gypsum Liner Panels’ by CGC Canada Inc.

.2 Or approved equal. Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396; 1/2 and 5/8-inch-thick, maximum permissible length, single core composition, with

no surface reinforcement, ends square cut, tapered -edges. .1 Acceptable Materials:

.1 ‘Fibre Abuse Resistant’ by CGC Canada Inc.

.2 ‘DensAmour Plus Abuse Guard’ by Georgia-Pacific Canada Inc. Very High Impact (VHI) Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396; 16mm (5/8") thick, maximum permissible length, single

core composition, with no surface reinforcement, ends square cut, tapered edges; .1 Acceptable Materials:

.1 ‘Fiberock VHI Abuse Resistant’ by CGC Canada Inc.

.2 ‘Dens Armor Plus Impact Resistant Panel’ by Georgia-Pacific Canada Inc. Exterior Soffit Board: Mould and moisture resistant cement board, non-combustible, 1219mm (48") wide sheets of maximum

practical lengths to minimize end joints, aggregated Portland cement core wrapped in polymer-coated, glass-fiber mesh. Panel score of 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273: .1 Acceptable Materials:

.1 ‘Durock’ by CGC Canada Inc.

.2 ‘PermaBase Cement Board’ by CertainTeed. Joint Materials:

.1 Joint Reinforcing Tape: 2” (50mm) wide x 0.3mm thick perforated paper with chamfered edges.

.2 Joint and Skim Compounds: gypsum with latex resin, possessing good adhesion, mixed with fresh, unadulterate.

.3 Skim Coating: "Durabond 90" or equivalent manufactured by Domtar Gypsum. Compounded water, having no detrimental effect on compounds.

.4 Green Glue Noiseproofing Compound: Noiseproofing compound manufactured by Green Glue Company (www.greenglue.com) to be applied between layers of gypsum board at a rate of 2 tubes per 4’ x 8’ sheet of gypsum board as scheduled – refer to the construction assemblies on the architectural drawings.


Page 98 of 141

Accessories: .1 Concrete Anchors:

.1 Self-drilling tie wire anchors, Phillips "Red-Head No. T-32" by ITW Construction Products, or approved alternate. Do not use power activated anchors for seismic connections, and only with the approval of Structural Consultant.

.2 Concrete Inserts: .1 Hot-dip galvanized "turtle back" type concrete inserts to suit conditions as approved by Consultant, by Acrow-

Richmond National Concrete Accessories, Division of Premetalco Inc., or approved alternate. .3 Gypsum Wallboard Accessories:

.1 In general, gypsum wallboard accessories will conform to ASTM C1047.

.2 Corner Beads: .1 Made from galvanized steel sheet conforming to ASTM A653, minimum 0.0179" (25 gauge). Minimum width of

flanges 28mm (1-1/8") for 12mm (1/2") thick wallboard and 32mm (1-1/4") for 16mm (5/8") thick wallboard. .3 Casing Beads:

.1 Made from galvanized steel sheet conforming to ASTM A653, minimum 30 gauge, U-shaped designed for finishing with joint compound.

.4 Control Joints: .1 Made from galvanized sheet steel conforming to ASTM A653, minimum 0.0179" (25 gauge), or roll-formed

zinc-alloy to resist corrosion, with expansion joint material perforated flanges. .2 'Zinc Control Joint No. 093' by CGC Inc. .3 Or approved alternate.

.5 Reveals: .1 Galvanized sheet steel conforming to ASTM A653, minimum 0.0179" (25-gauge), in profiles as indicated on

drawings. .4 Wallboard Screws:

.1 Corrosion resistant, self-drilling, self-tapping gypsum wallboard screws conforming to ASTM C1002 (Type S) and ASTM C954 (Type S-12), 24mm (1") long No. 6 for single layer application, 41mm (1-5/8") long No. 7 for double layer application.

.2 At fire-rated construction, type and size of wallboard screw will be same as used in fire-rating test. .5 Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board:

.1 Conforming to ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum wallboard, fire-rated gypsum wallboard and exterior wallboard manufacturers to suit conditions.

.6 Joint Compound for Exterior Sheathing Boards and Soffit Panels: .1 Fibreglass mesh tape.

.7 Resilient Sponge Tape: .1 Closed cell neoprene sponge type tape with self-sticking adhesive on one side. 'Permastik 122X' by Jacobs and

Thompson Ltd., or foamed vinyl type tape, 'Arnofoam' by Arno Adhesive Tape Incorporated. .8 Adhesive:

.1 Conforming to CGSB 71-GP-25M, and as recommended by manufacturer and compatible with contacted surfaces. .9 Acoustic Sealant:

.1 Green Glue Sealant: Noiseproofing sealant manufactured by Green Glue Company (www.greenglue.com) to be applied at joints between ceiling and wall assemblies’ gypsum board and as indicated on the architectural drawings.

.10 Sill Plate Gasket: .1 Install sill gasket continuously under sill plate on concrete floors to isolate steel and reduce air infiltration. .2 Size: Thickness: 4.5mm (3/16”); Width: To suit stud width .3 Approved Products: FoamSealR by Owens Corning or approved alternate.

.11 Access Panels: .1 Supply 600 x 600 (24" x 24") self-framing metal access panels with integral locks as approved by Consultant, where

required for access to concealed controls and equipment, where panels are not provided by Division 22/3 and 26, by Le Hage Metal Ltd., or Acudor Products Limited, or approved alternate.

Steel Studs: Depth and gauge to suit span. Minimum load is 5 psf. Max deflection is L/240. Provide studs with increased depth where indicated on the drawings. Minimum requirements include; knurled flanges 1-1/4” (32mm) wide with edges doubled back at least 3/16” (4.8mm); #25 gauge (0.59mm) steel galvanized, typical, with girts as required and with service access holes. Where stud length is greater than 13’-0” use minimum 3 5/8”, 18gaugemetal studs at 24” o/c.

Retainer Studs: As manufactured by Bailey Metal Products, or Insulock Systems. Partition Runners: As specified for studs with flanges a minimum 5” (125mm) high, and to suit depth of studs as required to serve as

backing for carpet base or terrazzo where carpet or terrazzo occurs. Bracing Channels: For partitions, 3/4” wide x 1-1/2” high x 16 gauge thick (19mm x 38.1mm x 1.6mm) cold-rolled, galvanized steel. Furring Channels: #25 gauge galvanized, nominal size of 7/8” (22mm) deep by 1-1/4” (32mm) face, hat type with knurled face. Resilient Channels: CGC RC-1 or equivalent by other reputable manufacturers.


Page 99 of 141

Shaft Wall Framing: C-H steel studs, size, gauge and spacing to suit shaft wall and horizontal shaft assemblies as described by ULC for use in ULC 452 shaft wall construction.

Ceiling Hanger System: .1 Hangers: Galvanized annealed steel wire, #12 gauge to support a maximum weight of 68 kg. per hanger. #9 gauge to support

a maximum weight of 140 kg. per hanger, and galvanized annealed steel rod 3/16” (4.8mm) diameter to support a maximum weight of 250 kg. per hanger.

.2 Inserts and Hanger Connection: Steel, galvanized after forming, suitable for structure and ceiling conditions and loading.

.3 Runner Channels: Galvanized steel channels, #16 gauge (1.6mm) overall thickness, 1-1/2” high (38.1mm) with 3/4” (19mm) wide flanges, for primary furring member in suspended gypsum board ceilings.

.4 Acoustical Caulking: “Noiseproofing Compound / Sealant” by Green Glue or "Acoustical Sealant" by Tremco (Canada) Limited.

.5 Gaskets: “Noiseproofing Tape” by Green Glue or FoamSealR Sill Gasket by Owens Corning. Sill gaskets to be 6mm thick x width of metal stud framing as indicated on the drawings.

Execution: Install gypsum boards and metal studs to conform with CAN CSA A82.31-M1980 – Gypsum Board Application and with the following;

.1 Examination: .1 Before application of gypsum board commences, ensure that services have been installed, tested and approved by

relevant Jurisdictional Authorities and Consultant; that conduits, pipes, cables and outlets are plugged, capped or covered; and that fastenings and supports installed by others are in place.

.2 Ensure that environmental conditions and work preceding that of this Section are satisfactory.

.3 Verify that work performed under other Sections as a part of a ULC specification for a fire-rated assembly has been done in accordance with that specification.

.2 General: .1 Install furring, studs, gypsum board, accessories, and other related products in strict accordance with CSA Standard

A82.31, including Appendix B "Control Joints". Where the standard does not incorporate specific products and methods, follow the manufacturer's directions. Use 5/8” (16mm) thick gypsum board for interior work unless detailed otherwise.

.2 Install work within 1/8” (3mm) of dimensioned location unless approved otherwise by Consultant, and flat to tolerance of 1/8” (3mm) maximum in 10’-0” (3m) and 1/16” (1.6mm) maximum in any running 12’ (300mm).

.3 Co-ordinate the work of this Section with that of other Sections. Ensure that adequate preparation is made for the attachment of hangers, fasteners, stiffeners, and reinforcing. Provide for carrying and integration of flush-mounted and recessed components only after consultation and verification of methods with those performing the work of Divisions 15 and 16. Do not use through-the-roof hangers.

.4 Do not install metal framing, trim, casings, or accessories which have been bent, dented, or otherwise deformed.

.5 Securely attach trim, casings, framing and accessories. Attachment by means of tape is unacceptable.

.6 Framing and furring shown on Drawings is indicative, but do not regard it as exact or complete. Construct work to provide adequate strength to withstand stresses imposed by use without distortion and to maintain dimensions indicated on drawings.

.7 Erect supporting and finish materials to dimensions indicated on drawings, plumb, level, straight, and square to adjoining elements.

.8 Provide for movement at intersections with structural members to avoid transference of loads to this work. Construct vertically sliding deflection space at top of partitions by means of double channels. Secure top channel to structure and bottom channel to stud work. Secure board only to bottom track making allowance for up to 3/4” (19mm) deflection of structure. Cut board short at top and caulk this joint.

.9 Make allowance for thermal movements in gypsum board systems.

.10 Provide control joints in gypsum board work in locations as indicated on Drawings and at no greater spacing than 20’-0” (6000mm) in each direction, at perimeters of ceilings where they abut walls and other vertical surfaces, at abutting structural elements, at dissimilar walls and ceilings, at structural expansion and control joints, and at other locations where stresses are likely to develop as recommended by board manufacturer. Line up control joints with joints in other construction or with centrelines of mullions, columns, piers, or similar building elements.

.11 Form control joints using continuous furring channels along each side of joint locations, and filling control joint space with specified joint strip, secured in place, making straight joints.

.12 Install casings and thermal breaks at junctions of gypsum board with exterior door, window, or screen joints.

.13 Do not support the work of this Section from, nor make attachment to ducts, pipes, conduit or the support framing of the work of other Sections. Place supplementary steel supports as required to maintain hanger spacing and to keep mechanical ducts free from hangers being secured to.

.14 Do not apply gypsum board in close proximity to hot pipes or heating ducts.

.15 Install materials with the minimum of joints. Tightly butt joints without force and neatly align them.


Page 100 of 141

.16 Frame openings on each side with suitable sections. Provide clearances required at mechanical and electrical services such as grilles, diffusers, access panels and lighting fixtures only after verification of requirements in each case.

.17 Co-operate with those installing the work of other Sections. Where the work of others penetrates gypsum board construction, fit openings snugly, and to ensure cover by escutcheons or plates utilized.

.3 Fixture, Cabinet, Toilet Partition and Urinal Screen Supports: .1 Verify location of supports within gypsum board assemblies to support wall mounted lights, fitments, cabinets,

plumbing fixtures, wall plates required for grab bars and any other item attached to drywall. Co-operate and co-ordinate with trades and provide information in ample time to ensure supports are provided in the correct locations, and are adequate to support the loads.

.4 Partition Stability: Where partitions do not extend to structure, provide suitable internal reinforcement to prevent lateral movement of the partitions. Secure head runners to acoustic tees by means of "twist clips".

.5 Concrete Anchors: Locate anchorage points in reinforced concrete floor slab underside in accordance with gypsum board manufacturer’s suspension requirements. Drill holes with carbide-tipped drill bits conforming to ANSI B94.12. Install anchors; minimum installation depth and method of expansion to be as recommended by the anchor manufacturer.

.6 Installation of Suspended Ceiling Framing and Furring: .1 Include in the work of this Section the supply of hangers and supervision of their proper location, or inserts for hanger

attachment, when either or both are embedded in concrete. .2 Space hangers for runner channels to suit structure, to support ceiling load, at a maximum distance of 4’-0” (1220mm)

o.c. and at no greater distance than 6” (150mm) from ends of runner channels. .3 Install runner channels at 3’-0” (915mm) o.c. generally, and at no greater distance than 6” (150mm) from terminations

of supported cross-furring members. Bend rod hangers sharply under bottom flange of runners, and wire securely in place with saddle ties.

.4 Splice runner channels by lapping at least 12” (300mm), with interlocking flanges and wires at each end with two loops. Splice only where unavoidable. Do not bunch or line up splices.

.5 Install cross-furring at 24” (600mm) generally, and at no greater distance than 6” (150mm) from walls, openings, breaks in continuity of ceilings, and changes of direction. Space furring in cases to suit incorporated services, and so as to avoid contact with perimeter walls. Span hat-type furring no greater than 4’-0” (1220mm). Use metal studs for greater spans: 1-5/8” (40mm) deep spanning to 5’-0” (1525mm), 2-1/2” (65mm) deep to 6’-0” (1830mm) and 3-5/8: (92mm) deep to 8’-0” (2440mm).

.6 Secure cross-furring to supports with double wire ties or approved equivalent attachment. Splice by nesting and tying together with8” (200mm) overlap.

.7 Erect entire hanger and suspension system to adequately support the ceiling assembly, including services incorporated with a maximum deflection of 1/360 of span of each component member, and free from horizontal movement.

.8 Enclose ducts, pipes or beams that occur below the general finished ceiling level with metal furring and gypsum board, in rooms where gypsum board is specified.

.9 Enclose ducts, pipes, or beams that occur below the general finished ceiling level with metal furring and gypsum board, in rooms where acoustic treatment for ceilings is specified.

.10 Form recesses for light coves where indicated on drawings. Enclose light coves with gypsum board. .7 Metal Stud Partition Framing:

.1 Lay down gasket at location of bottom track. Secure runner channels at floor and tops of partitions for their full lengths, at 24” (610mm) o.c. with concrete fasteners or as suitable for the substrate material. Install runner channels also at heads and sills of openings. Secure runners at openings by cutting flanges, turning up webs, and screwing to studs.

.2 Butt, not mitre, runners at wall intersections and corners. At ceilings, lap and screw channels together.

.3 Space studs at 16” (400mm) o.c. generally, and at no greater distance than 2” (50mm) from abutting walls, partitions and corners.

.4 Secure studs to runners by screws, crimping, or welding as required by stud type to conform to manufacturer's design specification.

.5 Utilize only proper stud sizes to meet the requirements of this specification. Span studs of 1-5/8” (40mm) depth no greater than 8’-10” (2700mm) between supports, 2-1/2” (65mm) depth, 11’-9” (3600mm) and 3-5/8” (92mm) depth, 15’-9” (4800mm).

.6 Double studs at door jambs. At each jamb of doors exceeding either 36” (915mm) width or 2-1/2” (63mm) in thickness or both, install a structural channel reinforcing extending from floor structure to structure above, and adequately anchored at each end.

.7 Brace studs with stiffeners over doors in partitions of greater height than 10’-0” (3000mm) spaced as preceding, and above and below window type openings spaced not more than 6” (150mm) from the top and bottom of openings. Stiffeners to be 3/4” (19mm) bracing channels, wire tied or welded to each stud, and extending horizontally across entire length of each braced partition and across two full stud spaces at each side of door and window openings.


Page 101 of 141

.8 Splice studs only when unavoidable by nesting with 8” (200mm) minimum lap, and fastened with one screw in each flange.

.9 Co-ordinate work with others installing horizontal runs of service lines so that work of is done simultaneously. Where standard holes are too small for installed services, notch studs and splice notched flange with a splice piece 12” (300mm) longer than notch, fastened with two screws.

.10 Unless shown otherwise on drawings, partitions, together with wallboard facing, to extend above ceilings to underside of structure above.

.11 Ensure that electrical and telephone boxes are not installed back to back.

.12 Screw frame anchor clips of frames supplied and installed under the work of another Section, to jamb studs and head and sill runners. Provide adequate fastening to prevent movement of frames within partitions.

.8 Acoustically Treated Walls and Bulkheads: .1 Install board 1/2” (12.7mm) short at top, bottom and edges and fill with caulking. Caulk on both sides of wall. Caulk

after gypsum board is in place, not before. .2 Stagger joints in double layer gypsum board construction. .3 Pack partition cavities with acoustical insulation. Friction fit insulation securely between studs. .4 Fill butt joints of gypsum board with joint filler prior to taping or finishing. .5 Caulk or plaster fill penetrations through gypsum board for electrical boxes, wiring, pipes, ducts and similar items.

Caulk airtight around electrical and communication boxes before plate is installed. .6 Do not let fastening screws extend through to opposite set of studs. Build bulkheads above acoustically rated doors

and partitions and folding partitions as detailed. .9 Installation of Gypsum Board:

.1 Extend boards into door, window, and other opening reveals.

.2 Back joints with a framing member.

.3 Install boards in maximum lengths and widths to minimize joints, and never in lengths of under 6’-0” (1800mm). Stagger end joints where they are unavoidable. Locate joints in ceilings and soffits where least prominently discernible.

.4 Form neat joints at mill ends and at field-cut edges of wallboard panels. Cut paper on face with a knife. Smooth by sanding and rubbing edges together.

.5 Fasten boards to metal support members by sheet metal gypsum board screws at 12” (300mm) o.c. no closer than 3/8” (10mm) to and no farther than 1/2” (12.7mm) from centre of joints. Do not force adjacent boards into place. Allow moderate contact. Provide extension slips where required. Drive screws to form a slight depression, but no so paper cover is broken.

.6 Where curved gypsum board is indicated, wet boards and bend to required radius, and block in position until dry. Finished curved surface to be smooth and even.

.10 Treatment of Gypsum Board Joints: .1 Fill joints, screw holes, and depressions on board surfaces exposed to view to provide smooth, seamless surfaces,

and square, neat corners. Use jointing compounds and reinforcing tapes in conformance with manufacturer's specifications. Ensure that board is tight against framing members, fasteners are properly depressed, and adhesives have sufficiently cured.

.2 Fill joints, edges and corners by Gypsum Association Level 5 three coat tape and joint filler method.

.3 At external corners, install corner beads secured to framing at 6” (150mm) o.c. on alternate flanges. Fill to nose of corner bead with joint filler and topping cement, as specified for bevelled joints.

.4 At casing beads installed at edges of board exposed to view, where board butts against other materials, with no trim to conceal junction at control joints, at perimeter of ceiling surfaces, at top of partitions where they stop against continuous ceiling surfaces, and where otherwise shown on drawings, secure casing beads to framing at 12” (300mm) o.c.

.5 At screwheads, fill holes and depressions with a two-coat application of joint filler. .11 Exterior Sheathing Board with Vapour Permeable Weather Barrier :

.1 Install exterior sheathing boards as per manufacturer’s strict instructions.

.2 Apply liquid flashing over joints, corners, rough openings, penetrations, material transitions, and fasteners in thicknesses as recommended by manufacturer.

.12 Joint and Surface Treatment of Cement Board – Typical: .1 Apply 2” (50mm) glass fibre tape over joints and corners. Press firmly and uniformly in place to avoid bumps. Apply in

accordance with manufacturer's directions. .2 Where board is to serve as substrate for paint or coating, apply 1/8” (3mm) thick uniform water resistant skim coat,

ready to receive paint or coating. .13 Installation of Accessories:

.1 Install accessories such as access panels, and grilles when supplied by other sections. Obtain prior Consultant's approval of locations of accessories prior to installation.


Page 102 of 141

.2 Gypsum board infill at access panels to have taped edges. Apply gypsum board with adhesive. Fill and sand smooth perimeter edges as specified for joint finishing.

.14 Fire Separations: .1 Construct gypsum board assemblies where located at fire separations of metal framing covered on both sides by fire-

rated gypsum wallboard. .2 Fit assemblies tightly to enclosing constructions to maintain integrity of the separations. Install casing beads at

perimeter edges. Ensure that caulking work under Section 07 72 00 relative to non-sound rated assemblies, i.e. perimeter joints in concealed locations is done, before continuing with the work of this Section.

.3 For two layers of gypsum board, attach one layer of gypsum board to each side of studs with long edges on studs by screws at 16” (400mm) o.c. as well as at intermediate studs and runners. Attach second layer of gypsum wallboard by screws at 16” (400mm) o.c. at studs and 12” (300mm) o.c. at runners. Stagger joints at first and second layers 12” (300mm) tape joints only where exposed to view. Fill screw holes. For tested assemblies secure in accordance with test data.

.4 Assemblies constructed other than those indicated may be approved by the Consultant on presentation of affidavits which validate fire resistance ratings by acceptance of the Jurisdictional Authorities.

.5 For walls containing fire dampers provide gypsum board end covers over studs between duct and stud. .15 Cleaning and Patching:

.1 Remove droppings and excess joint compound from work of others and from work of this Section, before it sets.

.2 Make good to cut-outs for services and other work, fill in defective joints, holes, and other depressions with joint compounds.

.3 Make good defective work, and ensure that surfaces are smooth, evenly textured, and within specified tolerances to receive finish treatments.

.4 Clean off beads, casings, and other metal trim, and leave surfaces ready for specified finishes.


Page 103 of 141

09 30 00 – WALL AND FLOOR TILE

General: Scope:

.1 The work in this section includes, but is not limited to the following: .1 Supply and installation of interior wall, floor tile. .2 The preparation of the floor and walls to receive tiles. .3 The supply and installation of an anti-fracture membrane on cold joints and over existing control joints in the floor and

slab cracks, where necessary. .2 Protective barricades and traffic control. Protection of new tile surfaces. .3 Work required to result in a first class installation for the Owner's intended use. No substitution of materials or installation

methods will be accepted. .4 Refer to drawings for locations and extent.

References: .1 ANSI A137.1: National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile. .2 ASTM C1178/C1178M, Standard Specification for Glass Mat Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel. .3 ASTM C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. .4 CAN/CGSB 75.1 M88, Tile, Ceramic. .5 Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada (TTMAC): Specification Guide 09 30 00, Tile Installation Manual. .6 TTMAC: Dimensional Stone Guide .7 TTMAC: Hard Surface Maintenance Guide

Delivery, Storage, Handling and Protection: .1 Delivery: Coordinate deliveries to comply with construction schedule and arrange ahead for off the ground, under cover

storage location. Do not load any area beyond the design limits. .2 Storage: Carefully check, unloaded, stored and handled materials to prevent damage. Store material in original, undamaged

containers or wrappings with manufacturer's seals and labels intact. .3 Protection:

.1 Restrict traffic by other trades during installation.

.2 Provide adequate protection of completed tiled surfaces to prevent damage by other trades until final completion of this project. Minimum protection to consist of 4 mil polyethylene sheets lapped 4" and taped.

.3 Heavily travelled areas to have additional 1/2" thick fibreboard sheet protection with taped joints over polyethylene sheet protection as specified above.

.4 Protect exposed edges of floor tile with 4" wide tapered strip of plywood of same thickness of tile, adhered to floor until adjoining floor finish is to be installed.

Warranty: .1 Warrant the work of this section against defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions, but

for a period of five (5) years, and agree to promptly 'make good' defects which become evident during the warranty period without cost to the Owner. Defects will include but not be limited to the following; cracking, crazing, discolouration, staining, pitting, splitting and deformation of tiles and grout.

Products: Performance Requirements:

.1 Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Tile installed on walkway surfaces having following values as determined by testing identical products per ANSI A137.1 using the Dynamic Coefficient of Friction (DCOF) Accu Test: .1 Wet Treat for Level Surfaces: Minimum or greater 0.42 wet DCOF.

.2 Floor Level Tolerances: Provide materials to attain floor levelness tolerances required by this section; calculate quantity of materials based on the difference between the specified tolerance and the initial tolerance specified in Section 03 35 00; measurements will be made in the same manner as used in Section 03 35 00.

Ceramic Floor Tile: .1 ‘Purestone” as manufactured by Centura Floor and Wall Tile. Typical size 12” x 12” x 1/4” (305 mm x 305 mm x 6 mm) and

conforming to CAN/CGSB-75.1. Colour to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard range of colours. .2 Or approved equal.

Ceramic Wall Tile: .1 ‘Design Positive as manufactured by Centura Floor and Wall Tile. Typical size 4” x 4” x 1/4” (102 mm x 102 mm x 6 mm) and

conforming to CAN/CGSB-75.1. Colour to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard range of colours. .2 Or approved equal.

Waterproofing: .1 Schluter Systems – Kerdi waterproof membrane or equal as approved by architect.


Page 104 of 141

.2 At all inside and outside premanufactured corners provide waterproofing strips where required set in unmodified thinset mortar in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions

.3 Lap joint in membrane with waterproofing strips, minimum overlap of 2”

.4 Install premanufactured corners in inside and outside corners, minimum overlap of 2”

.5 Provide Kerdi Seals at all protrusions through membrane Accessories:

.1 Minor Levelling and Skim Coating: .1 Mapecem Quickpatch, by Mapei Canada Inc. .2 Flextile Patch by Flextile Ltd. .3 Feather Edge by TEC

.2 Levelling or Repair requiring 3/8" up to 4": .1 Topcem Premix with Planicrete AC, by Mapei Canada Inc. .2 Flextile Fast Set Screed with 43 Additive by Flextile Ltd. .3 Level Set 300, Self-Leveling Underlayment by TEC

.3 Flexible Crack Isolation Membrane: .1 Mapeguard 2 with SM primer by MAPEI Canada Inc. .2 Flextile 1000 Flexlastic with primer by Flextile Ltd. .3 Hydrafelx Waterproofing Crack Isolation Membrane by TEC

.4 Setting Beds: .1 Type 1 for Interior wall tile:

.1 Ultraflex LFT RS, by Mapei Canada Inc.

.2 Flextile 56 SR by Flextile Ltd.

.3 Ultimate Large Tile Mortar & Fast Set Ultimate Large Tile Mortar by TEC. .2 Type 2 for floor and stair tiles (Fast curing setting material):

.1 Granirapid mixed with KER 318 additive by MAPEI Inc.

.2 Flextile 58 XT by Flextile Ltd.

.3 Ultimate Large Tile Mortar & Fast Set Ultimate Large Tile Mortar by TEC. .5 Floor Grouts:

.1 Premixed Grout: Conforming to ANSI A118.3, A118.6 and A118.7, one-component, stain and chemical-resistant, colour-consistent, premixed grout with colour-coated quartz technology. .1 MAPEI Flexcolor CQ by MAPEI Inc. .2 Flextile Colourmax Plus by Flextile Ltd. .3 Power Grout by TEC

.6 Wall Grout: .1 Premixed Grout: Conforming to ANSI A118.3, A118.6 and A118.7, one-component, stain and chemical-resistant,

colour-consistent, premixed grout with colour-coated quartz technology. .1 MAPEI Flexcolor CQ by MAPEI Inc. .2 Flextile 500 Series by Flextile Ltd. .3 Power Grout by TEC

.7 Mastic for Wall Application of Tile: .1 Ker 907, Ultra/Mastic 1, by Mapei Canada Inc. .2 TEC 122 Double Duty Ceramic Tile Adhesive for Walls and Floors.

.8 Trims: .1 Straight Edge Strips: Extruded clear satin anodized aluminum edge strips, 3mm wide at top edge; height as required to

suit tile installation; with integral perforated anchoring leg for setting the strip into the setting material: .1 Acceptable Products: Schlüter Schiene AE, or approved alternate.

.2 Transition Edge Strips: Extruded clear satin anodized aluminum edge strips; height as required to suit tile installation; with integral perforated anchoring leg for setting the strip into the setting material and [sloped] [sloped, narrow profile] [sloped, wide profile] [flat, smooth profile] transition .1 Acceptable Products: Schlüter Reno U, or approved alternate.

.9 Tile Cleaner: .1 A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved

for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers and as follows: .1 Job Site Cleaner: Phosphoric acid/nitric acid based cleaning solution mixed in accordance with cleaner

manufacturer’s recommendations and as recommended by tile manufacturer. .2 Maintenance Cleaner: Nontoxic, electrolytic, biodegradable, non-ammonia containing, pH controlled cleaning

solution mixed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.


Page 105 of 141


.1 Maintain minimum temperature of 13 degrees C at tile installation area for 24 hours prior to curing and for 24 hours after installation. Do not apply work to frozen surfaces.

.2 Examine areas and conditions affecting work of this section and report any discrepancies or defects which would affect finished results.

Crack Suppression Membranes: .1 Prepare surfaces of non-structural and structural cracks in strict accordance with the crack suppression membrane

manufacturer's written instructions. .2 Prime and fill surfaces of non-structural and structural cracks in strict accordance with the crack suppression membrane

manufacturer's written instructions. .3 Commencement of installation signifies complete acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

Surface Preparation: .1 Make backing surfaces level and true to a tolerance in plane of 1/8” in 8’ for walls and 1/8” in 10’ for floors using Levelling

Bed Mortar. .2 Surfaces will be structurally sound, well fastened, clean and free from dust, oil, grease, paint, tar, wax, curing agents, primers,

sealers, form release agents or any deleterious substances that may act as bond barriers. .3 Vacuum off loose material where necessary. .4 Backing surfaces will be dry and fully cured. Dampness must not exceed 5% by volume. .5 Examine concrete substrate, repair as required to produce level, clean surface for new tile installation. Repair Work to include

levelling, filling, grinding or cutting. .6 Work of other trades that is required before new tile installation (i.e. electrical conduit installed below ceramic tile) to be

installed, complete and approved before tile installation. Installation:

.1 Installation of the tile to be by thin-set method, as indicated on the drawings and as specified; .1 Install wall tile to wallboard in strict accordance with tile manufacturers’ written installation instructions as per the pre-

installation conference. .1 Install wall tile on gypsum board in accordance with TTMAC Detail 304W for dry areas and Detail 305W.B for

wet areas. .2 Apply floor tile and prepare floor slabs in strict accordance with tile manufacturers written installation instructions as per

the pre-installation conference. .1 Install tile on concrete floor in accordance with TTMAC Detail 311F.A.

.2 Unless otherwise specified, execute tile work according to the latest issue of Specification Guide 09 30 00, Tile Installation Manual - published by Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada 2016-2017, as the minimum standard except as varied by this Specification.

.3 Thoroughly clean surfaces to which tile is to be applied.

.4 Back butter floor tile.

.5 Neatly cut tile around fitments, fixtures, access panels, and the like. Splitting of tile is expressly prohibited except where no alternative is possible. Form intersections, corners and returns accurately.

.6 Finish surfaces flat and level or, sloped and graded as required.

.7 Joint Widths: Install tile with the following joint widths, unless indicated on drawings: .1 Make joints consistent width and alignment within tile area. .2 Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16” (1.5mm) .3 Wall Tile: 1/16” (1.5mm) .4 Large Format Tile: minimum 1/8” (3mm) to a maximum 1/4” (6mm) .5 Maintain 2/3 of grout joint depth free of setting material.

.8 Joints in base to match floor patterns. Joints will be watertight without voids, cracks or excess grout.

.9 Lay out tile so that fields or patterns are centred on wall areas or architectural features and so that no tile less than 1/2 size occurs.

.10 Install tiles in patterns and locations as indicated on drawings.

.11 Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections for items requiring to be recessed into work of this section.

.12 Sound tiles after setting and remove and replace tiles not fully bedded.

.13 Re-point joints after cleaning to eliminate imperfections. Avoid scratching tile surfaces.

.14 Finished tile work will be clean and free of tiles which are pitted, chipped, cracked or scratched. damaged tile will be removed and replaced.

.15 Where indicated on Drawings or as required, install continuous single piece metal edge trims centred under doors in closed position and other locations where tile meets other floor finishes.

Grouting: .1 Grout tiles in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and ANSI A108.10.


Page 106 of 141

.2 When grouting a fresh laid floor, make certain that traffic and grouting will not cause movement of floor in setting bed. Protect floor by using kneeling boards or gypsum board to defend floor against traffic while grouting.

.3 Mix grouts and install in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

.4 Excess grout will be removed from the surface of tiles using the edge of a rubber float held at a 45 degree angle, moving it diagonally to the joints. Fill gaps and air holes.

.5 Do not allow grout to harden on face of tile. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for thorough removal. Cleaning:

.1 Clean tiled areas after grouting has cured, using compatible solutions and methods as recommended by the manufacturer.

.2 Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

.3 Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation.

.4 Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning.

.5 Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbounded, or other tile deficiencies.


Page 107 of 141

09 51 00 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

General: Scope: This section includes requirements for supply and installation of ceilings consisting of acoustic panels, complete with exposed

suspension system and trim. References:

.1 ASTM C635 ‘Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings’.

.2 ASTM C636 ‘Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels’.

.3 ASTM E1264 ‘Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products’

.4 CAN/ULC S102 ‘Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies’.

Products: Suspended Ceiling Grid System (Fine Line)

.1 ‘Silhouette XL 9/16” Bolt Slot – 1/8” Reveal’ Series as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries Canada Ltd., having the following characteristics; .1 profile type: bolt slot .2 colour: white .3 duty rating: intermediate duty .4 face dimension: 9/16” (15mm) .5 material: painted galvanized steel .6 Use shadow moulding at wall intersections.

Acoustic Lay-in Panels: .1 ACT1 (Typical): to be 24” (610mm) x 48” (1220mm) x 1” (24.5mm) tegular edge panels, “Optima Open Plan – 3257” as

manufactured by Armstrong World Industries Canada Ltd. Colour “white”, NRC 0.95, .2 ACT2 (At Washrooms / Dry): shall be 24” (610 mm) x 48” (1220 mm) x 1” (25.4 mm) tegular edge panels, “Optima Health Zone

- 3217”, colour ‘white’, NRC 0.95, as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries Canada Ltd. .3 ACT3: shall be 24” (610 mm) x 48” (1220 mm) x 3/4” (19 mm) square tegular edge panels, “Fine Fissued - 1824”, colour

‘white’, NRC 0.7, as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries Canada Ltd .4 ACT4 (Fire Rated):

Basic Steel Material and Finish: Commercial quality cold rolled steel minimum 0.179" (26 gauge) thick, galvanized to zinc coating designation Z275. Exposed surfaces of metal products to be factory finished with satin white enamel.

Main Tees: 12'-0” (3650mm) long, 15/16" (23.8mm) face width double web design, rectangular bulb at top of web, 1-1/2" (38.1mm) web height.

Main Tee Splices: Designed to lock lengths of main tees together so that joined lengths of tee function structurally as single unit with tee faces at joint perfectly aligned and presenting tight seam

Cross Tees: 4’-0” (1220mm) long, 1” (25mm) web height structural cross-section, design same as main tees, designed to connect at main tees forming positive lock without play, loss or gain in grid dimensions with offset over-ride of face flange over main tee flange to provide flush joint

Edge Moulding: Materials and finish to match tees. Hold-Down Clips: Spring steel clips by CGC Inc. or Armstrong. Hangers and Anchors:

.1 #12 galvanized annealed steel wire for support of a maximum weight of 68 kg. Per hanger; #9 galvanized annealed steel wire for support of a maximum weight of 140 kg. Per hanger; 3/16” (4.5mm) diameter galvanized annealed steel rod to support a maximum weight of 250 kg. Per hanger.

.2 Inserts and attachments to structure for hanger connections to suit conditions and loading, and galvanized after forming. Minimum tensile strength 390 MPa.

.3 Concrete anchors to be Phillips Red Head TW-614 or other make of tie wire sleeve anchors conforming to US Federal Specifications FF-S-325, Group II Type III, Class 3, and QQ-2-325, Type II, Class 3.

Accessories: .1 Miscellaneous clips, splicers, connectors, screws, nails, and other standard accessories to be zinc-coated and to be of

strength and design compatible with the system specified. Provide special accessories to complete work.

Execution: Install acoustic ceilings to conform with the following:

.1 Installation to be by skilled tradesmen and in strict accordance with system manufacturer's printed directions to produce a first-class flush-finished surface, in true planes, and free from uneven joints, and dropping, warped, damaged tile or panels. Butt joints evenly.

.2 Install suspension system in general conformity with ASTM C636.


Page 108 of 141

.3 Do not erect ceiling suspension system until work above ceiling has been inspected by Consultant.

.4 Hangers for systems to be spaced at approximately 4’-0” (1220mm) centres both ways, and where normally required in good standard practice for the systems specified. Supporting and grid members to provide adequate support for the ceiling and services incorporated with a maximum deflection of 1/360 in each grid member span. Support luminaries and diffusers with additional hangers placed within 6” (150mm) of each corner and at a maximum of 24” (600mm) around perimeter of luminaire and/or diffuser.

.5 Secure hangers firmly to grid and to anchors. Twist wire a minimum of two (2) turns around vertical hanging wire.

.6 Erect suspension system at required elevation and level to tolerance of 1/8” (3mm) over 12’-0” (3650mm). Frame around recessed fixtures, diffusers, grilles and openings, and where normally required in good standard practice. Furr around ducts, beams, bulkheads or the like, as shown or required in best standard practice. Tape or adhesive attachment is unacceptable.

.7 Install main grid with intersections arranged in a basket weave pattern.

.8 Co-ordinate the work with trades affected by the work of this Section. Provide a layout of hangers and framing suitable to accommodate fittings and units of equipment. Failure to follow this procedure will require that the hangers and channels be revised to suit as necessary without additional cost to the Owner.

.9 Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest adjacent hangers and related carrying channels and furring as required to span the greater distance.

.10 Lay out work in accordance with reflected ceiling plans. Allowable tolerance of finished acoustical ceiling system: 1/8” (3mm) in 12’-0” (3650mm), and1/64” (0.04mm) between adjacent metal members. Tolerances to not be cumulative.

.11 Hang suspended ceilings independently of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of the longitudinal axis of face plane of adjacent members.

.12 Centre acoustical ceiling installation on room axis leaving equal border pieces but not less than half the size of the panel specified. Provide a row of hangers adjacent to and parallel with the walls for the support of the ends of the main tee runners at not more than 6” (150mm) from the ends of runners.

.13 Install components to form a level ceiling with parts flush and true, parallel to the module lines, and to the pattern shown. Install panels in level, uniform plane free from twist, warp, dents and flush, without gaps and exposed face of carrying members. Fit border units neatly against abutting surfaces. Ensure that flanges of recessed light fixtures fit snugly and flush to ceiling plane.

.14 Install cut panel at sprinkler heads.

.15 Install hold-down clips on lay-in panels to hold such panels tight to grid system where within 20’-0” (6100mm) of exterior doors or interior vestibule doors.

Adjustments: Adjust any sags or twists which develop in the suspension system and replace any part of the complete system which is damaged or faulty.


Page 109 of 141

09 62 00 – INTERIOR TACTILE WARNING SURFACE INDICATORS

General: Scope: Work of this section includes interior applications for tactile warning surfaces at the top of stairs and ramps and all other

locations as indicated on the drawings. Submittals:

.1 Manufacturers Maintenance Data and Installation Instructions

.2 Manufacturers full written warranty.

.3 Manufacturers samples indicating colour and size of specified products.


.1 The following manufacturers are approved for use on this project: .1 Kinesik Engineered Products.

Contact: Sandro Pinto; tel 905.330.9233, email [email protected] Applications:

.1 Resilient Floor applications: “Eon Tile” by Kinesik Engineered Products. .1 Thickness: To be selected by Architect at a later date. .2 Colour / Finish: To be selected by Architect at a later date.

.2 Porcelain Tile applications: “Elan Tile” by Kinesik Engineered Products. .1 Colour / Finish: To be selected by Architect at a later date.

.3 Surface Applied (Tile-less) applications: “Advantage One” by Kinesik Engineered Products. .1 Colour / Finish: To be selected by Architect at a later date.

.4 Abuse Resistant / High Traffic applications: “Access Tile” by Kinesik Engineered Products. .1 Cast-in-Place. .2 Colour / Finish: To be selected by Architect at a later date.


.1 Examine areas which are to receive the work of this section. Correct unsatisfactory conditions prior to start of work. Commencement of work implies acceptance of conditions as they exist and no extra will be allowed for failure to ensure satisfactory substrate condition.

Installation: .1 Install all products in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions, and most recent AODA, CSA, ISO, and Ontario

Building Codes. Clean-up:

.1 Work to be handed over to the Owner free of blemishes and in perfect condition.

mailto:[email protected]


Page 110 of 141

09 65 00 – RESILIENT FLOORING

General: Scope:

.1 Provide linoleum sheet flooring, tactile warning strips, and vinyl composite tiles in accordance with interior finishes list.

.2 Provide rubber base for other flooring. References:

.1 American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): .1 E648-06 - Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source. .2 E662-06 - Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. .3 E1907-06 - Evaluating Moisture Conditions of Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Floor Coverings .4 F710-05 - Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors and Other Monolithic Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. .5 F1303-04 - Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing. .6 F1913-04 - Sheet Vinyl Flooring without Backing.

.2 Resilient Floor Covering Institute (RFCI): .1 Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings.

Submittals: .1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Product Data:

.1 Description of resilient material and accessories to be provided.

.2 Resilient material manufacturer's recommendations for adhesives, weld rods, sealants, and underlayment.

.3 Application and installation instructions. .3 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating:

.1 Location of seams and edges.

.2 Location of columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built in furniture, cabinets, and cut out locations.

.3 Type and style of resilient transition strip used between adjacent flooring types. .4 Site Quality Control Test Results:

.1 Submit results of testing moisture in concrete subfloors prior to installation of flooring. Results to include comparison of manufacturer’s recommended moisture content to actual moisture vapour emission rate.

.5 Maintenance Data and Operating Instructions: .1 Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s written instructions for maintenance and cleaning

procedures, include list of manufacturer recommended cleaning and maintenance products, and name of original installer and contact information in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals: Operation and Maintenance Data.

.6 Safety Data Sheet: .1 Submit WHMIS safety data s for incorporation into the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Keep one copy of WHMIS

safety data s on site for reference by workers. Quality Assurance:

.1 Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Manufacturer to have been installing poured in place surfacing for minimum of five (5) years.

.2 Contractor executing work of this section to have a minimum five (5) years continuous Canadian experience in successful installation of work of type and quality shown and specified. Submit proof of experience upon Consultant's request.

.3 Resilient Flooring Installer: Use an installer who is approved by flooring system manufacturer.

.4 Pre Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site in accordance with requirements of Section 01 31 19 to verify project requirements, substrate conditions, patterns and layouts, coordination with other sections affected by work of this section, manufacturer’s installation instructions and manufacturer’s warranty requirements.

.5 Sheet vinyl floor coverings to meet fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products, per ASTM test method, indicated below by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or another recognized testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. .1 Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more, Class I, per ASTM E648. .2 Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E662.

Delivery, Storage, Handling and Protection: .1 Coordinate deliveries to comply with Construction Schedule and arrange ahead for off-the-ground, under cover storage

location. Do not load any area beyond the design limits. .2 Materials to be carefully checked, unloaded, stored and handled to prevent damage. Protect materials with suitable non-

staining waterproof coverings. .3 Store material in original, undamaged containers or wrappings with manufacturer's seals and labels intact. .4 Restrict traffic by other trades during installation. .5 Provide adequate protection of completed tiled surfaces to prevent damage by other trades until completion of this project.

Minimum protection to consist of kraft paper.


Page 111 of 141

Environmental Conditions: .1 Temperature of room, floor surface and materials to not be less than 21 degC for 48 hours before, during and for 48 hours

after installation. Concrete floors to be aged for a minimum of 28 days and will be dry before application of the resilient flooring. .2 Moisture content of floor not to exceed a maximum of 3 lbs. of water per 1,000 sq.ft. of concrete slab area over a 24-hour

period as measured methods approved by Consultant. Moisture content to not exceed 5% as measured by normal Thermometer Hygrometers.

.3 Avoid exposure to high humidity, cold drafts and abrupt temperature changes. Keep materials under cover and free from dampness.

.4 Coordination: Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and until time after installation recommended in writing by manufacturer; install flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting and ceiling construction have been completed.

Maintenance Materials: .1 Provide 5% of each colour of floor type and 30'-0" lineal feet coil stock of each colour of resilient base specified, boxed and

labelled. .2 Store maintenance materials on the premises as directed by the Owner.

Warranty: .1 Warrant the work of this section against defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions but

for an extended period of five (5) years and agree to repair or replace faulty materials or work which become evident during warranty period without cost to the Owner. Defects to include, but not limited to, bond failure, and extensive colour fading.


.1 Subject to compliance with requirements specified in this section, the following manufacturers are approved to be installed specified products on this project: .1 LSI Floors. .2 Forbo Floors. .3 Armstrong Flooring, Inc.

.2 Manufacturers offering similar solid surfacing systems may be incorporated into the work provided they meet the performance and aesthetic requirements established by the named products.

Vinyl Composite Tiles: .1 Vinyl Composition Floor Tile (VCT): 305mm x 305mm (12” x 12”) asbestos free uniform in thickness with uniform colour and

pattern through the full thickness, with straight, sharp and square edges and corners, accurately cut to size, conforming to ASTM F1066: .1 Approved product: ‘Solids’ by LSI Floors.

Linoleum Sheet Flooring: .1 Sheet Flooring with backing: ASTM F2034-08 Standard Specification for Sheet Linoleum Floor Covering, 2.5mm thick in 2

meters wide sheets, homogeneous sheet linoleum of natural products, jute backing. .1 Approved product: ‘Marmoleum’ by Forbo Flooring.

Accessories: .1 Resilient Wall Base (RB): Smooth, buffed exposed face, toe or toeless, and ribbed or grooved bonding surface supplied in

maximum practical length, with pre moulded end stops and external corners to match base, conforming to ASTM F1861. .1 Approved product by Johnsonite Inc. or approved alternate.

.2 Fillers and Primers: .1 Types and brands approved, acceptable to flooring material and resilient base manufacturers for the applicable

conditions. Use non-shrinking latex compound. .3 Sealer and Wax: Coordinated with Owners preferred long term maintenance program, sealer or wax as appropriate to flooring

materials specified. .4 Leveling Compound: Provide cementitious products with latex or polyvinyl acetate resins in mix. .5 Sealant: refer to Section 07 72 00.


.1 Examine substrates, areas, and conditions affecting work are in accordance with manufacturer's requirements, and as follows: .1 Test moisture emission rate of concrete subfloor prior to installing flooring, using the calcium chloride test method in

accordance with ASTM F1869. .2 Verify that floor surfaces are smooth and flat to plus or minus 1/8” over 10’; notify Consultant in writing where floor

tolerances are not within acceptable values. .3 Verify that concrete slabs exhibit normal alkalinity of between 5 and 9 and that they are free of carbonization or dusting

deleterious to flooring installation or adhesive bond.


Page 112 of 141

.2 Prior to beginning any installation of flooring, it is recommended that entire room be vacuumed thoroughly to remove dust, loose dirt and debris. Do not use sweeping compounds.

.3 Store rubber tiles on clean, dry, flat surface, carefully protecting corners and edges from possible damage, including from exposure to harmful weather conditions.

Preparation: .1 Subfloors must be properly prepared to provide satisfactory bonding surface for adhesive being used to install resilient flooring.

Refer to manufacturers’ Subfloor Preparation Guide for requirements. .2 Provide finished concrete subfloor ready to receive resilient rubber flooring. Subfloors must be smooth and level within

tolerance of 1/8" (3mm) in 10' (3.05m) radius. Minor surface cracks or grooves must be filled with good quality Portland cement based patching or leveling compound. High spots, bumps and peaks must be repaired prior to installation. Once subfloor preparation is complete, subfloor to have CSP (Concrete Surface Profile) of 1.

.3 Maintain stable room and subfloor temperature prior to installation, before performing moisture tests, during the installation and min. 48 hours after installation. Recommended temperature range of 18 degrees Celsius to 30 degrees Celsius. Humidity control level is between 35 to 55%.

.4 Concrete substrates must be fully cured and free of any hydrostatic and moisture discrepancies. Moisture and alkalinity tests must be performed on concrete substrates, under in-service conditions (see sentence 3 above). pH level to be in range of 7 to 10. Readings below 7 and more than 10 known to affect adhesives. Moisture vapor emission content of concrete slab must not exceed tolerance of adhesive specified when tested per ASTM F1869 ‘Anhydrous Calcium Chloride for Moisture Vapors from Concrete’, and relative humidity of concrete slab must not exceed the tolerance of the adhesive specified when tested per ASTM F2170 ‘In-Situ Probes for Relative Humidity in Concrete Slab’.

.5 Do not attempt moisture test until HVAC unit has been operational for at least 7 days and the site conditions (temperature and humidity) are constant in building and reflective of in-service conditions.

Installation: .1 Examine areas which are to receive the work of this section. Correct unsatisfactory conditions prior to start of work.

Commencement of work implies acceptance of conditions as they exist and no extra will be allowed for failure to ensure satisfactory substrate condition.

.2 Install work in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and approved layout drawings.

.3 Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in inconspicuous and low traffic areas, but in no case, less than 150mm (6 inches) away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.

.4 Match edges of resilient floor coverings for color shading and pattern at seams.

.5 Inform Resident Engineer of conflicts between this section and manufacturer's instructions or recommendations for auxiliary materials, or installation methods, before proceeding.

.6 Keep joints to a minimum; avoid small filler pieces or strips.

.7 Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for seams at butt joints. Do not leave any open joints that would be readily visible from a standing position.

.8 Follow manufacturer’s recommendations regarding pattern match, if applicable.

.9 Integral Cove Base Installation: .1 Set preformed cove to receive base. Install base material with adhesive and terminate exposed edge with cap strip.

Integral base to be // 100mm (4 inches) // 150mm (6 inches) // high. .2 Install base with adhesive, terminate expose edge with cap strip. .3 Internal and external corners formed to geometric shape generated by cove at either square or radius corners. .4 Solvent weld joints as specified for flooring. Seal cap strip to wall with an adhesive type sealant. .5 Unless otherwise specified or shown where flooring is scheduled, provide integral base at intersection of floor and

vertical surfaces. Provide flooring and base scheduled for room on floors and walls under and behind areas where casework, laboratory and pharmacy furniture and other equipment occurs, except where mounted in wall recesses.

Rubber Base Application .1 Lay out base for resilient flooring. Keep number of joints at a minimum. Use full roll lengths to minimize joints. .2 Set base in adhesive tightly by using a 7lb. hand roller, against the wall and floor surfaces. .3 Install straight and level to variations of 1:1000. .4 Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions. .5 Cope internal corners. Use formed straight base material for corners of other angles.

Cleaning, Sealing And Finishing .1 Cleaning, sealing and finishing of resilient tile flooring to be performed using the cleaning, sealing and finishing materials

specified of one manufacturer in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Allow a minimum of four (4) days to elapse after completion of each resilient flooring installation before commencing cleaning, sealing, and finishing operations.

.2 Work to be handed over to the Owner free of blemishes and in perfect condition.


Page 113 of 141

09 90 00 – PAINTING AND COATING

General: Scope: Provide paint finishes using the highest grade, first line quality product of the manufacturer and comply with or exceed CAN2-

85-100 for premium grade work.

Products: The following paint manufacturers are acceptable:

.1 International PC.

.2 Para Paints Canada Inc.

.3 Benjamin Moore Paints.

.4 ICI Paints Canada.

.5 Sherwin-Williams Company of Canada Limited.

Execution: Prepare, prime and paint surfaces as noted in the room finish schedule and this specification and surfaces that are left unfinished by

other sections / trades. Paint colours to be selected by the Owner at a later date. Allow for multiple colours. Hardware: Remove finish hardware, switch plates and accessories, removable trim, grilles, etc.; mask any that are not removable. Re-

install these when paint is thoroughly dry and clean them. Do not clean hardware with solvent. Prime-painted hardware items to be painted to match the surface on which they are installed.

Provide drop cloths or adequate plastic sheets to protect floors in areas assigned for storage and mixing of paints. Mask and cover surrounding surfaces to provide neat, clean, true juncture lines, and to keep paint from adjacent surfaces. Upon completion, remove masking and clean adjacent surfaces free of overspray spatters, drips, smears and overspray.

Apply work using skilled tradesmen working under direction of a capable foreman, and according to manufacturer's specifications; in a workmanlike manner; with suitable clean equipment in good condition; in dust-free and under adequate illumination and suitable conditions for production of best results; evenly, uniform in sheen, colour and texture, free from brush marks, sags, crawls, runs, or other defects detrimental to appearance or performance; and in a manner to prevent spattering or spilling over finished surfaces. Sand lightly between coats with No. 00 sandpaper.

Prepare surfaces and provide paint finishes in accordance with the following formulas. The formula is intended to provide completely opaque surface. If surfaces are not completely opaque provide additional finish coats at no cost to the Owner. .1 On exposed ferrous metal surfaces (shop primed);

.1 Prepare ferrous metal surfaces as follows: sandblast / spongeblast / grind metal surface to SSPC-SP6 (to remove existing paint, rust and to expose metal surfaces) specifications before application of the primer coat.

.2 Touch-up only with same paint as that applied in the shop.

.3 Two (2) coats of acrylic latex, semi-gloss finish. Use exterior grade for exterior work and interior grade for interior work.

.4 Prime caulking compound as required. .2 On wood studs / plywood surfaces as scheduled;

.1 Prepare wood surface as follows; ensure surface is clean, free of dirt, grease or other construction debris.

.2 Two (2) coats of solid stain, flat finish (Aborcoat by Benjamin Moore). .3 On exposed ferrous metal surfaces (shop primed);

.1 Prepare Galvanized and Pre-Primed Surfaces as follows; .1 New Metal With Wipe Coated Galvanizing: Thoroughly clean to remove grease, oil, dirt and other contaminants

which may be present on the surface. Mineral Spirits or Xylol are acceptable solvents to use for this purpose - that is, to remove grease, oil, dirt and similar contaminants. Remove scale by wire brushing.

.2 Weathered Metal With Wipe Coated Galvanizing: For old and weathered galvanized and pre-primed metal, thorough surface preparation is essential - to ensure that contaminants have been removed from the surface and pre-treat as for New Metal.

.3 Spangled Type Galvanizing: Treat with vinyl wash primer to provide proper bond for paint finish. .2 Touch-up only with same paint as that applied in the shop. .3 Two (2) coats of acrylic latex, semi-gloss finish. Use exterior grade for exterior work and interior grade for interior work. .4 Prime caulking compound as required.

.4 Painted Masonry or Concrete: .1 Prepare surface using the following methods;

.1 Test surfaces for alkalinity with pink litmus paper or other standard industry method.

.2 Where extreme alkalinity occurs, wash surface with 4% solution tetrapotassium pyrophosphate where latex base paint is to be used, and with zinc sulphate solution where other paint bases are to be used.

.3 Etch normal concrete surface to receive alkyd paint with commercial muriatic acid solution (1 part to 20 parts water by volume). Follow with complete rinsing with clean water.


Page 114 of 141

.4 Rub down surfaces of different textures and remove mortar spots and sharp edges with a scraper. Patch where required. Fill masonry and concrete surfaces with primer/block filler to fill holes and pores.

.2 One (1) coat of masonry block filler,

.3 One (1) coat of primer,

.4 Two (2) coats of exterior acrylic latex enamel, pearl finish. .5 On gypsum board bulkheads and walls:

.1 Ensure gypsum board surfaces are prepared and ready to receive paint finishes. Ensure joints are completely filled and sanded smooth and surfaces are free from ‘nail / screw popping’. Fill small nicks and or holes with patching compound and sand smooth.

.2 One (1) coat of primer – sealer.

.3 Two (2) coats of interior acrylic latex enamel, low lustre.


Page 115 of 141

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

10 21 13 – METAL TOILET PARTITIONS

General: Scope: Provide floor mounted / overhead braced phenolic core partitions with necessary accessories for toilet enclosures located on

Level 1.’ References:

.1 ASTM A 240; Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.

.2 ASTM A 666; Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.

.3 ASTM A 743/A 743M; Standard Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General Application.

.4 ASTM B 86; Standard Specification for Zinc and Zinc-Aluminum (ZA) Alloy Foundry and Die Castings.

.5 ASTM B 221; Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

.6 ASTM E 84; Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

.7 ICC/ANSI A117.1; Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, as applicable to toilet compartments designated as accessible.

Submittals: .1 Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets for each type of product indicated. Include fabrication details, description of

materials and finishes. .1 Product Test Reports: Submit documentation by qualified independent testing agency indicating compliance of

products with requirements. .2 Shop Drawings: Include overall product dimensions, floor plan, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

Include choice of options with details. .3 Samples for Selection: Furnish samples of manufacturer's full range of colours for initial selection. .4 Samples for Verification: Furnish physical sample of material in selected colour.

.1 Size: 52mm x 52mm (2” x 2”) minimum, in type of finish specified. Delivery, Storage and Handling:

.1 Do not deliver toilet compartments to site until building is enclosed and HVAC systems are in operation.

.2 Deliver toilet compartments in manufacturer's original packaging.

.3 Store in an upright condition. Warranty:

.1 Provide manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship during the following period after substantial completion.

Products: Manufacturer:

.1 The following manufacturers are acceptable provided they comply with the requirements of these specifications: .1 Bobrick. .2 Hadrian Manufacturing Inc. .3 Shanahans Mfg. (distributed by W.G. Wood Sales) .4 Ambico Sales Ltd. .5 Ontario Accurate Partitions .6 Wm. Aikenheads Bldg. Specialties .7 ASI. .8 CDA Industries Inc. .9 General Storage Systems.

.2 Design: Toilet partitions to headrail braced toilet compartments. Materials:

.1 Steel: Zinc coated steel, ASTM A446 Grade A, fully pickled and free from scale and internal defects. Surfaces to be free from perceptible waves, buckles, and other imperfections. Minimum nominal core thickness to be as follows: panels and doors 22 gauge (.762mm), pilasters 20 gauge (.914mm), and headrails 18 gauge (1.2mm).

.2 Hardware: Brushed finish, extruded aluminum alloy of chrome plated zinc die coatings. Bolts to be stainless steel.

.3 Stainless Steel Sheet: Type 304 alloy, No. 4 finish, and 24 gauge (0.610mm) nominal thickness.

.4 Aluminum: Extruded aluminum sections with anodized finish.

.5 Shop Finish: Spray applied baked enamel conforming to CAN/CGSB 1-GP-81M (primer) and CGSB 1-GP-88, Type II, (finish), or baked polyurethane powder coating, colour as selected by Consultant from manufacturer's ‘standard colours’ range.


Page 116 of 141

Fabrication: .1 Face both sides of doors, partitions, urinal screens and pilasters with flush steel panels which are flat and free from distortion. .2 Fabricate cores of honeycomb laminated to faces under pressure with waterproof binder. Cores of doors and partitions may be

fibreboard in place of honeycomb. .3 Close edges of doors, partitions, urinal screens and pilasters with crowned steel welded and continuously sealed to faces.

Mitre and weld corners. .4 Fabricate pilasters minimum 1-1/4” (32mm) thick, and doors minimum 1” (25mm) thick. Fabricate urinal screens 18” (450mm)

wide x 42” (1070mm) long. .5 Unless detailed otherwise, provide closure pilasters as required at end units of compartment banks. .6 Reinforce doors, partitions, urinal screens and pilasters for hardware and for partition mounted tissue dispensers, in the case

of partitions. .7 Provide panel brackets, pilaster attachments, concealed gravity type hinges, door stops, pilaster shoes, coat hooks, bumpers,

latches, and pull on the outside of doors in the case of accessible compartments. Coat hooks in accessible compartments to be on the side wall, and project 1” (25mm) maximum. Locate coat hooks at 48” (1220mm) above finished floor.

.8 Where grab bar is connected to partition, reinforce partition to receive it.

.9 Use metal end caps only, in colour to match partition panels. Shop Finishing:

.1 Clean, degrease and neutralize steel components with phosphate or chromate treatment.

.2 Apply finish to doors and pilaster/panels, and urinal screens and oven bake to achieve a minimum coating of dry film thickness of 25.4 microns.


.1 Examine areas which are to receive the work of this section. Correct and report unsatisfactory conditions prior to start of work. Commencement of work implies acceptance of conditions as they exist and no extra will be allowed for failure to ensure satisfactory conditions.

Installation: .1 Install partition assemblies and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's directions. .2 Set partitions, screens and doors 12” (300mm) above the finished floor in accurate position, plumb, level and free from sag and

distortion. .3 Fasten pilasters, partitions and screens to masonry walls with "U" brackets. Provide three (3) brackets per panel. .4 At partitions adjacent to a urinal, provide a 16” (406mm) wide x 36” (915mm) high stainless steel panel. Fasten with concealed

fasteners. .5 Ensure spaces between panels and pilasters, between panels and walls and between pilasters and walls are of uniform

consistent width and sized to ensure it is not possible to see persons using the compartments. .6 Perform drilling of steel, masonry and concrete necessary to install the work of this Section. .7 Co-ordinate installation with the work of trades providing wall and floor finishes, washroom accessories and other adjacent

components and construction. .8 Use non-corrosive anchors and fasteners. Ferrous metals are not acceptable.

Adjustment: .1 Upon completion of the work or when directed, remove traces of protective coating or paper, and wipe partitions. .2 Test hinges, locks and hatches and where necessary, adjust and lubricate. Set hinges so that doors stand open 30 degrees

when compartment is not in use. Ensure that partitions are in working order. Clean up:

.1 Remove packaging and construction debris and legally dispose of off-site.

.2 Clean partition and screen surfaces with materials and cleansers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Schedule of Metal Toilet Partitions:

.1 Install headrail braced toilet compartments in the following washrooms, refer to drawings for additional details and extent of partitioning required:


Page 117 of 141

10 26 00 – CORNER GUARDS

General: Scope: This section includes the following types of wall protection systems:

.1 Corner Guards Submittals:

.1 General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contract and Division 1 Section 01 33 00

.2 Product data and detailed specifications for each system component and installation accessory required, including installation methods for each type of substrate.

.3 Shop drawings showing locations, extent and installation details of corner guards. Show methods of attachment to adjoining construction.

.4 Samples for verification purposes: Submit the following samples, as proposed for this work, for verification of guard: .1 12" (304.8mm) long sample of each model specified.

.5 Product test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory showing compliance of each component with requirements indicated.

.6 Maintenance data for wall protection system components for inclusion in the operating and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

Quality Assurance: .1 Installer qualifications: Engage an installer who has no less than 3 years’ experience in installation of systems similar in

complexity to those required for this project. .2 Manufacturer’s qualifications: Not less than 5 years’ experience in the production of specified products and a record of

successful in-service performance. .3 Code compliance: Assemblies should conform to all applicable codes including IBC, UBC, SBCCI, BOCA and Life Safety. .4 Fire performance characteristics: Provide metal components tested in accordance with ASTM E84 for Class A/1 fire

characteristics. .5 Single source responsibility: Provide all components of the wall protection system manufactured by the same company to

ensure compatibility of color, texture and physical properties. Delivery, Storage and Handling:

.1 Deliver materials to the project site in unopened original factory packaging clearly labeled to show manufacturer.

.2 Material must be stored flat.

.3 Deliver and store materials as per manufacturer’s strict instructions.


.1 Interior surface protection products specified herein and included on the submittal drawings shall be manufactured by Construction Specialties, Inc. or approved equivalent.

Materials: .1 Stainless steel: To be type 304 alloy with #4 satin finish; minimum strength and durability properties as specified in ASTM

A276. .2 All necessary fasteners to be supplied by the manufacturer.

Corner Guards: .1 Stainless steel corner guards to be CS Acrovyn: Surface mounted guards to be 16 gauge stainless steel. .2 Model CO-8 90° stainless steel corner guard with 3/16" (4.8mm) radius and 3 1/2" (88.9mm) standard legs. Bull nose 3/4"

(19.1mm) radius optional. Mounted with construction adhesive standard; Available in variable angles and leg sizes. For odd angle specify model CO-8M.

.3 Or approved equivalent. Fabrication:

.1 General: Fabricate wall protection systems to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, detail, finish and member sizes.

.2 Preassemble components in shop as much as possible to minimize field assembly. Finishes:

.1 General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applications and designations of finishes.


.1 Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

.2 Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


Page 118 of 141

Preparation: .1 Surface preparation: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dirt, debris and loose particles. Perform additional

preparation procedures as required by manufacturer’s instructions. .2 Protection: Take all necessary steps to prevent damage to material during installation as required in manufacturer’s installation

instructions. Installation:

.1 Install the work of this section in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, using only approved adhesive and locating all components firmly into position, level and plumb.

Cleaning: .1 General: Immediately upon completion of installation, clean material in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended

cleaning method. .2 Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from installation as work progresses and upon completion of work.

Protection: .1 Protect installed materials to prevent damage by other trades. Use materials that may be easily removed without leaving

residue or permanent stains.


Page 119 of 141

10 28 00 – WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

General: Scope:

.1 Provide washroom accessories in each washroom as noted on the drawings and as per the following schedule; .1 Typical W/C:

.1 soap dispenser (SD) 1

.2 mirror (M-1) 1

.3 paper towel dispenser / waste receptacle (PTD/WR) 1

.4 toilet tissue dispenser 1 (TTD1) 1 .2 Universal W/C:

.1 grab bars (GB-1, GB-2) 1 set

.2 sanitary napkin disposal (SND) 1

.3 soap dispenser (SD) 1

.4 mirror (M-2) 1

.5 paper towel dispenser / waste receptacle (PTD/WR) 1

.6 toilet tissue dispenser 2 (TTD2) 1

.7 utility hook (UH) 1

.8 shelf (SH) 1 .2 Include materials and fitments required for the operation of any unit furnished, in the manner, direction and performance shown

on the shop drawings and specified herein. Submittals:


.2 Shop Drawings: Show and describe in detail, materials, finishes, dimensions, details of connections and fastenings, elevations, plans, sections, metal gauges, hardware and any other pertinent information.

.3 Coordinate the work of this section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement.

.4 Submit manufacturer's catalogue cut of each component required.

.5 Submit a washroom accessories schedule indicating accessories required, showing model number, finish and mounting height on a room by room basis.

Delivery, Storage and Handling: .1 Coordinate deliveries to comply with construction schedule and arrange ahead for off the ground, under cover storage location. .2 Materials will be carefully checked, unloaded, stored and handled to prevent damage. Protect materials with suitable non-

staining waterproof coverings. Unsatisfactory materials to be removed from the site. .3 Store materials in original, undamaged containers or wrappings with manufacturer's seals and labels intact. .4 Adequately protect the structure and work of other sections during delivery, storage, handling and execution of the work of the

section. .5 Provide tools, plant and other equipment required for the proper execution of the work of this section.

Warranty: .1 At no cost to Owner, replace mirrors should defects in silvering occur within from date of Substantial Performance a period of

five (5) years.


.1 Basis-of-Design Products: Products named in this section were used as the basis-of-design for the project; additional manufacturers offering similar products may be incorporated into the work of this section provided they meet the performance requirements established by the named products and provided they submit requests for substitution in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.

.2 Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include; but are not limited to, the following: .1 Bobrick. .2 ASI (American Specialties Inc.) .3 Bradley Corp. .4 Frost Products Ltd.

.3 Install specified product as indicated on drawings. Washroom Accessories:

.1 Soap Dispenser (SD): By Owner. Surface mounted soap dispenser units to be supplied by the Owner and installed by the Contractor.

.2 Toilet Tissue Dispenser 1 (TTD1): B-2888 ClassicSeries, Surface-Mounted Multi-Roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser, as manufactured by Bobrick.


Page 120 of 141

.3 Toilet Tissue Dispenser 2 (TTD2): B-2890, Single Jumbo-Roll Surface-Mounted Toilet Tissue Dispenser, as manufactured by Bobrick.

.4 Paper Towel Dispenser (PTD): By Owner. Surface mounted paper towel dispenser (PTD) to be supplied by the Owner and installed by the Contractor.

.5 Waste Receptacle (WR): Surface mounted paper towel disposal to be satin finish, type 304 stainless steel, 12.75 gal (48.3 l) capacity, 15 1/8” w x 23” h x 8 1/2” d, with linermate, model no B-277 ConturaSeries by Bobrick.

.6 Combination Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle (PTD/WR): B-3942 ClassicSeries, Semi-Recessed Convertible Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle as manufactured by Bobrick.

.7 Sanitary Napkin Disposal (SND): Surface mounted sanitary napkin disposal bin with satin-finish stainless steel. Cover is drawn, one-piece construction; secured to cabinet with full-length stainless steel piano-hinge. Capacity: 1.0-gal. (3.8-L). Unit 7 1⁄2" W, 10" H, 3 13⁄16" D (190 x 255 x 95mm), Bobrick Model No. B-270.

.8 Mirror Type 1 (M-1): Surface mounted mirror to be 24" W x 36" H (61 x 91cm), one-piece, roll-formed 3⁄4" x 3⁄4" (19 x 19mm) angle-frame,Type 304 stainless steel angle with satin finish, corners heliarc welded, ground and polished smooth. Beveled frame edge at mirror for improved appearance. No. 1 quality, 1⁄4" (6mm) glass mirror; warranted against silver spoilage for 15 years. Galvanized steel back. Secured to concealed wall hanger with theft-resistant mounting. Type 304 satin-finish stainless steel shelf. Shelf projects an additional 5" (125mm) from the mirror, with 3⁄4" (19mm) return on front and sides; front return edge hemmed for rigidity and safety. Shelf corners heliarc welded, ground and polished smooth. Acceptable Products; Bobrick Model No. B-292 2436

.9 Mirror Type 2 Barrier Free (M-2): Mirrors (M-2) Surface mounted Barrier Free Fixed Position Tilt Mirror gapless fit mirror to be Type 304 polished stainless steel #8 architectural bright finish with all-welded construction. Unit size to be approximately 24” (610 mm) wide x 36” (910mm) high. Acceptable Products Bobrick Model No. B-293 2436.

.10 Shelf (SH): Surface mounted shelf to be constructed of Type 304 stainless steel with satin finish. Mounting brackets to be 16-gauge (1.6mm) and to be welded to shelf. Shelf to be 18-gauge (1.2mm) and have 3/4” (19mm) return edges with hemmed front edge. Unit size to be approximately 6” (150mm) wide x 18” (610mm) in length. Acceptable Product: Bobrick Model No. B-296x18

.11 Utility Hook (UH): Bobrick B-670, Install at heights shown on drawings. Surface mounted utility hook to be constructed of Type 304 stainless steel with satin finish and to project max. 2” (50mm) from finished wall. Flange and support arm to be 22-gauge (0.8mm) and equipped with a concealed 16-gauge (1.6mm) mounting bracket, secured to a 16-gauge (1.6mm) wall plate, fastened with stainless steel setscrew. Cap to be 10-gauge (3.6mm) welded to support arm.

.12 Grab Bar (GB1) (GB-2): Bobrick B-6806.99x24, Install at heights and locations shown on drawings. Equip water closet compartments designated for the handicapped with grab bars in conformance with the Ontario Building Code and as follows. .1 GB-2 to be Bobrick model 6898.99, one (1) L-shaped bar with 30” (762 mm) long horizontal, 30” (762 mm) long

vertical component, 1 1/2” (38mm) dia., mounted on wall adjacent to the water closet. .2 GB-1 to be Bobrick model 6806.99, one (1) bar 2’-0” (610 mm) long x 1 1/2” (38mm) dia., mounted horizontally on

wall behind water closet. .3 Grab bars to have concealed non-corrosive anchorage systems of types approved by Consultant. Grab bar material

and anchorage to withstand downward force of 2.2 kN (500 lbs.). .4 Fabricate grab bars with minimum 16 gauge (1.6 mm) thick, 1-1/2” (38 mm) diameter peened surface tubular stainless

steel with welded concealed flanges. .13 Toilet Backrest (TBR): conforming to Section 3.8.3.12. Sentence (c) of the Ontario Building Code 2012 and CSA B651-18. .14 Shower Rod + Curtain (SC):

.1 Rod to be Bobrick B-6047, 1 ¼” (32mm) diameter x length to suit opening.

.2 Curtain and hooks to be Bobrick 204 series, 72” x length to suit opening. .15 Shower Bench (SB): Bobrick B-5191. .16 Future Adult Change Table: must conform to Section 3.8.3.12. Sentence (c) of the Ontario Building Code 2012. .17 Emergency Panic Button (EPB): Refer to Electrical. .18 Emergency Panic Button Strobe Light and Siren (EL): Refer to Electrical.

Fabrication: .1 Fabricate work true to dimensions, square and plumb. .2 Thickness of metal to be adequate for the various conditions, and intended uses. .3 Finished work to be free from warping, open seams, weld marks, rattles and other defects. Drilling to be reamed and exposed

edges finished smooth. .4 Fastenings to be concealed or theft proof type where possible. Exposed fastenings to be neatly executed and to be of the

same material and finish as the base metal on which they occur.


.1 Take site measurements to ensure that work is fabricated to fit surrounding construction around obstructions and projects in place, or as shown on drawings, and to suit service locations.


Page 121 of 141

Installation: .1 Securely fasten accessories plumb, true, square, straight, level, and accurately and tightly fitted together and to surrounding

work. Install in locations shown and specified herein. Mounting heights as shown or in accordance with the OBC in the case of barrier-free accessories.

.2 Work to include anchor bolts, bolts, washers and nuts, lag screws, expansion shields, toggles, straps, sleeve brackets, clips, and other items necessary for secure installation, as required by loading and by Jurisdictional Authorities.

.3 Attach work at wood by screws through countersunk holes in metal.

.4 Attach work to masonry with lead plugs and non-corrosive fastenings, to support load with a safety factor of 3. Perform drilling necessary to install the work.

.5 Insulate between dissimilar metals or between metals and masonry or concrete with bituminous paint, to prevent electrolysis.

.6 Co-ordinate installation with the work of other trades adjacent to accessories to achieve the reveals or other edge conditions shown, where their front faces are flush with the finished wall surfaces.

.7 Install accessories in rooms as scheduled herein. Exact locations to be confirmed by Architect at later date. Cleaning and Adjustment:

.1 Upon completion of work or when directed, remove traces of protective coatings or paper.

.2 Test mechanisms, hinges, locks and latches and where necessary, adjust, lubricate and ensure that accessories are in perfect working order.


Page 122 of 141

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT_NOT USED DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

12 24 00 – MANUAL WINDOW SHADES

General: Scope:

.1 Supply and install premanufactured roller blinds, having shade fabrics for each opening scheduled on the drawings. Submittals:

.1 Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings that indicates sectional characteristics of the blind systems and mounting detail.

.2 Samples: Provide samples of fabrics for review by the Architect.

.3 Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including materials, finishes, fabrication details, dimensions, profiles, mounting requirements, and accessories.

.4 Manual Shades: Provide layout drawing showing locations of shade clutches.

.5 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

.6 Operation and Maintenance Data: List of all components with part numbers, sources of supply, and operation and maintenance instructions; include copy of shop drawings.

.7 Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and documentation of final executed warranty completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

Delivery, Storage, And Handling: .1 Deliver shades in manufacturer's unopened packaging, labeled to identify each shade for each opening. .2 Handle and store shades in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.


.1 Lutron Electronics Company, Inc. www.lutron.com.

.2 Or approved alternate. Window Shade Fabric:

.1 To be selected by Architect at a later date. Roller Shades:

.1 Product: Lutron Contract Roller Manual Shades.

.2 Operating Mechanism: Clutch operated continuous loop with beaded ball pull chain.

.3 Clutch Construction: .1 Consists of three brake springs on a cylindrical metallic mandrel lubricated with silicone-based lubricant to ensure

smooth and reliable operation. .2 Includes field-configurable chain routing clip designed to ensure chain is in constant contact with clip for smooth and

quiet operation when raising shades. .4 Provide pull chain tensioning device complying with WCMA A100.1. .5 Clutch/Pull Chain Configuration: To be decided by Architect at a later date.

Shade Accessories: .1 Brackets and Mounting Hardware: Size as recommended by manufacturer for mounting configuration and span indicated. .2 Fasteners: Non-corrosive, and as recommended by shade manufacturer. .3 Top Treatments:

.1 Provide top treatments consistent across shade products.

.2 Fascia: Size as required to conceal shade mounting; provide matching endcaps.

.3 Colour/Finish: To be selected by Architect at a later date from manufacturer’s standard colours. Fabrication:

.1 Field measure finished openings prior to ordering or fabrication.

.2 Dimensional Tolerances: As recommended in writing by manufacturer.

.3 Railroad fabric for applications that are wider than the usable fabric roll width.


.1 Examine finished openings for deficiencies that may preclude satisfactory installation. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. Start of installation shall be considered acceptance of substrates.

http://www.lutron.com/


Page 123 of 141

Preparation: .1 Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for achieving best result for substrate under the project

conditions. Installation:

.1 Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Shade Installation: .1 Install in accordance with approved shop drawings, using mounting devices as indicated. .2 Installation Tolerance: 1.5mm (1/16”) maximum offset from level. .3 Replace shades that exceed specified dimensional tolerances at no extra cost to Owner. .4 Adjust level, projection and shade centering from mounting bracket where applicable. .5 Verify there is no telescoping of shade fabric. Ensure smooth shade operation.

Cleaning: .1 Clean soiled shades and exposed components as recommended by manufacturer.

Protection: .1 Protect installed products from subsequent construction operations. .2 Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.


Page 124 of 141

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

14 41 00 – BARRIER FREE LIFT

General: Scope: Barrier Free Lift as shown and specified. Lift work includes:

.1 Standard pre-engineered barrier free passenger lift.

.2 Lift car enclosure, hoistway entrance and signal equipment.

.3 Operation and control system.

.4 Jack.

.5 Accessibility provisions for physically disabled persons.

.6 Equipment, machines, controls, systems and devices as required for safely operating the specified elevators at their rated speed and capacity.

.7 Materials and accessories as required to complete the elevator installation. Work Not Included: General contractor shall provide the following in accordance with the requirements of the Model Building Code

and ANSI A17.1 Code. State or local requirements must be used if more stringent. The cost of this work is not included in the Manufacturers Lift’s proposal, since it is a part of the building construction. .1 Supply in ample time for installation by other trades, inserts, anchors, bearing plates, brackets, supports and bracing including

all setting templates and diagrams for placement. .2 Shaft walls require a minimum one hour fire rating. Hoistway should be clear and plumb with variations not to exceed 1/2'' at

any point. .3 Lift hoistways shall have barricades, as required. .4 Install bevel guards at 75 deg on all recesses, projections or setbacks over 2'' (4'' for A17.1 2000 areas) except for loading or

unloading. .5 Provide rail bracket supports at pit, each floor and roof. For guide rail bracket supports, provide divider beams between

hoistway at each floor and roof. .6 Pit floor shall be level and free of debris. Reinforce dry pit to sustain normal vertical forces from rails and buffers. .7 Machine room to be enclosed and protected. .8 Machine Room temperature must be maintained between 55 and 90 degF. .9 If machine room is remote from the lift hoistway, clear access must be available above the ceiling or metal/concrete raceways

in floor for oil line and wiring duct from machine room. .10 Access to the machinery space and machine room must be in accordance with the Ontario Building Code, Latest Edition. .11 Provide an 8” x 16” cutout through machine room wall, for oil line and wiring duct, coordinated with liftcontractor at the building

site. .12 All wire and conduit should run remote from the hoistways. .13 When heat, smoke or combustion sensing devices are required, connect to elevator control cabinet terminals. Contacts on the

sensors should be sided for 12 volt D.C. .14 Install and furnish finished flooring in lift cab. .15 Finished floors and entrance walls are not to be constructed until after sills and door frames are in place. Consult lift contractor

for rough opening size. The general contractor shall supply the drywall framing so that the wall fire resistance rating is maintained, when drywall construction is used.

.16 Where sheet rock or drywall construction is used for front walls, it shall be of sufficient strength to maintain the doors in true lateral alignment. Drywall contractor to coordinate with lift contractor.

.17 Before erection of rough walls and doors; erect hoistway sills, headers, and frames. After rough walls are finished; erect fascias and toe guards. Set sill level and slightly above finished floor at landings.

.18 To maintain legal fire rating (masonry construction), door frames are to be anchored to walls and properly grouted in place.

.19 The elevator wall shall interface with the hoistway entrance assembly and be in strict compliance with the lift contractor's requirements.

.20 General Contractor shall fill and grout around entrances, as required.

.21 Liftsill supports shall be provided at each opening.

.22 All walls and sill supports must be plumb where openings occur.

.23 For signal systems and power operated door: provide ground and branch wiring circuits, including main line switch.

.24 For car light and fan: provide a feeder and branch wiring circuits, including main line switch.

.25 Wall thickness may increase when fixtures are mounted in drywall. These requirements must be coordinated between the general contractor and the lift contractor.

.26 Provide supports, patching and recesses to accommodate hall button boxes, signal fixtures, etc.

.27 Locate telephone and convenience outlet on control panel.


Page 125 of 141

Submittals: .1 Product Data: When requested, the elevator contractor shall provide standard cab, entrance and signal fixture data to describe

product for approval. .2 Shop Drawings:

.1 Show equipment arrangement in the corridor, pit, and hoistway and/or optional control room. Provide plans, elevations, sections and details of assembly, erection, anchorage, and equipment location.

.2 Indicate elevator system capacities, sizes, performances, safety features, finishes and other pertinent information.

.3 Show floors served, travel distances, maximum loads imposed on the building structure at points of support and all similar considerations of the elevator work. .1 Indicate electrical power requirements and branch circuit protection device recommendations.

.3 Colour Selections: Submit manufacturer’s standard selection charts for exposed finishes and materials.

.4 Metal Finishes: Upon request, standard metal samples provided.

.5 Operation and Maintenance Data. Include the following: .1 Owner’s manuals and wiring diagrams. .2 Parts list, with recommended parts inventory.

Quality Assurance: .1 Manufacturer Qualifications: An approved manufacturer with minimum 15 years of experience in manufacturing, installing, and

servicing elevators of the type required for the project. .1 The manufacturer of machines, controllers, signal fixtures, door operators cabs, entrances, and all other major parts of

elevator operating equipment. .1 The major parts of the elevator equipment shall be manufactured by the installing company, and not be an

assembled system. .2 The manufacturer shall have a documented, on-going quality assurance program. .3 ISO-9001:2000 Manufacturer Certified .4 ISO-14001:2004 Environmental Management System Certified

.2 Installer Qualifications: The manufacturer or an authorized agent of the manufacturer with not less than 15 years of satisfactory experience installing elevators equal in character and performance to the project elevators.

.3 Regulatory Requirements: .1 ASME A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, latest edition or as required by the local building code. .2 Building Code: National. .3 NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. .4 NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows. .5 Americans with Disabilities Act - Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) .6 Section 407 in ICC A117.1, when required by local authorities .7 CAN/CSA C22.1 Canadian Electrical Code .8 CAN/CSA B44 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. .9 California Department of Public Health Standard Method V1.1–2010, CA Section 01350

.4 Fire-rated entrance assemblies: Opening protective assemblies including frames, hardware, and operation shall comply with ASTM E2074, CAN4-S104 (ULC-S104), UL10(b), and NFPA Standard 80. Provide entrance assembly units bearing Class B or 1-1/2 hour label by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (2 hour label in Canada).

.5 Inspection and Testing: .1 Elevator Installer shall obtain and pay for all required inspections, tests, permits and fees for elevator installation. .2 Arrange for inspections and make required tests. .3 Deliver to the Owner upon completion and acceptance of elevator work.

Delivery, Storage and Handling: .1 Manufacturing shall deliver elevator materials, components and equipment and the contractor is responsible to provide secure

and safe storage on job site. Project Conditions:

.1 Temporary Use: Lifts shall not be used for temporary service or for any other purpose during the construction period before Substantial Completion and acceptance by the purchaser unless agreed upon by Lift Contractor and General Contractor with signed temporary agreement.

Warranty: .1 Warranty: Submit lift manufacturer's standard written warranty agreeing to repair, restore or replace defects in elevator work

materials and workmanship not due to ordinary wear and tear or improper use or care for 12 months after final acceptance. Maintenance:

.1 Furnish maintenance and call back service for a period of 12 months for the lift after completion of installation or acceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever is earlier, during normal working hours excluding callbacks.


Page 126 of 141

.2 Service shall consist of periodic examination of the equipment, adjustment, lubrication, cleaning, supplies and parts to keep the elevators in proper operation. Maintenance work, including emergency call back repair service, shall be performed by trained employees of the elevator contractor during regular working hours.

.3 Submit parts catalog and show evidence of local parts inventory with complete list of recommended spare parts. Parts shall be produced by manufacturer of original equipment.

.4 Manufacturer shall have a service office and full time service personnel within a 100 mile radius of the project site.


.1 Manufacturer: Design based on Savaria’s Prolift HD.

.2 Or approved equal. Materials, General:

.1 All Lift Cab materials including frame, buttons, lighting, wall and ceiling assembly, laminates and carpet shall have an EPD and an HPD, and shall meet the California Department of Public Health Standard Method V1.1–2010, CA Section 01350 as mentioned in 1.03.9 of this specification.

.2 Colours, patterns, and finishes: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors, patterns, and finishes.

.3 Steel: .1 Shapes and bars: Carbon. .2 Sheet: Cold-rolled steel sheet, commercial quality, Class 1, matte finish. .3 Finish: Factory-applied baked enamel for structural parts, powder coat for architectural parts. Colour selection must be

based on elevator manufacture’s standard selections. .4 Plastic laminate: Decorative high-pressure type, complying with NEMA LD3, Type GP-50 General Purpose Grade, nominal

0.050" thickness. Laminate selection must be based on elevator manufacture’s standard selections. .5 Flooring by others.

Hoistway Equipment: .1 Platform: Fabricated frame of formed or structural steel shapes, gusseted and rigidly welded with a wood sub-floor. Underside

of the platform shall be fireproofed. The car platform shall be designed and fabricated to support one-piece loads weighing up to 25% of the rated capacity.

.2 Sling: Steel stiles bolted or welded to a steel crosshead and bolstered with bracing members to remove strain from the car enclosure.

.3 Guide Rails: Steel, omega shaped, fastened to the building structure with steel brackets.

.4 Guides: Slide guides shall be mounted on top and bottom of the car.

.5 Buffers: Provide substantial buffers in the elevator pit. Mount buffers on continuous channels fastened to the elevator guide rail or securely anchored to the pit floor. Provide extensions if required by project conditions.

.6 Automatic Self-Leveling: Provide each elevator car with a self-leveling feature to automatically bring the car to the floor landings and correct for over travel or under travel. Self-leveling shall, within its zone, be automatic and independent of the operating device. The car shall be maintained approximately level with the landing irrespective of its load.

.7 Wiring, Piping: Provide all necessary hoistway wiring in accordance with the National Electrical Code. All necessary code compliant pipe and fittings shall be provided to connect the power unit to the jack unit. theoiltype

Hoistway Entrances: .1 Doors and Frames: Provide complete hollow metal type hoistway entrances at each hoistway opening bolted\knock down

construction. .1 Manufacturer's standard entrance design consisting of hangers, doors, hanger supports, hanger covers, fascia plates

(where required), sight guards, and necessary hardware. .2 Main landing door & frame finish: ASTM A1008 steel panels, factory applied powder coat finish. .3 Typical door & frame finish: ASTM A 366 steel panels, factory applied powder coat finish.

.2 Interlocks: Equip each hoistway entrance with an approved type interlock tested as required by code. Provide door restriction devices as required by code.

.3 Door Hanger and Tracks: Provide sheave type two point suspension hangers and tracks for each hoistway horizontal sliding door. .1 Sheaves: Polyurethane tires with ball bearings properly sealed to retain grease. .2 Hangers: Provide an adjustable device beneath the track to limit the up-thrust of the doors during operation. .3 Tracks: Drawn steel shapes, smooth surface and shaped to conform to the hanger sheaves.

.4 Hoistway Sills: Extruded metal, with groove(s) in top surface. Provide mill finish on aluminum. Passenger Elevator Car Enclosure:

.1 Car Enclosure: .1 Walls: Cab type a laminate wall design, durable wood core finished on both sides with high pressure plastic laminate. .2 Reveals and frieze: Not applicable


Page 127 of 141

.3 Canopy: Cold-rolled steel with hinged exit.

.4 Ceiling: Suspended type, LED lighting with translucent diffuser mounted in a metal frame. Framework shall be finished with a factory applied powder coat finish.

.5 Cab Fronts, Return, Transom, Soffit and Strike: Provide panels faced with No. 4 brushed stainless steel

.6 Doors: Horizontal sliding car doors reinforced with steel for panel rigidity. Hang doors on sheave type hangers with polyurethane tires that roll on a polished steel track and are guided at the bottom by non-metallic sliding guides.

.7 Door Finish: Stainless steel panels: No. 4 brushed finish.

.8 Cab Sills: Extruded aluminum, mill finish.

.9 Handrail: Provide 1.5'' diameter cylindrical metal on side and rear walls on front opening cars and side walls only on front and rear opening cars. Handrails shall have a stainless steel, No. 4 brushed finish.

.10 Ventilation: Manufacturer’s standard exhaust fan, mounted on the car top.

.11 Protection pads and buttons: Not required .2 Car Top Inspection: Provide a car top inspection station with an “Auto-Inspection” switch, an "emergency stop" switch, and

constant pressure "up and down" direction and safety buttons to make the normal operating devices inoperative. The station shall give the inspector complete control of the elevator. The car top inspection station shall be mounted in the door operator assembly.

Door Operation: .1 Door Operation: Provide a direct or alternating current motor driven heavy duty operator designed to operate the car and

hoistway doors simultaneously. The door control system shall be digital closed loop and the closed loop circuit shall give constant feedback on the position and velocity of the elevator door. The motor torque shall be constantly adjusted to maintain the correct door speed based on its position and load. All adjustments and setup shall be through the computer based service tool. Door movements shall follow a field programmable speed pattern with smooth acceleration and deceleration at the ends of travel. The mechanical door operating mechanism shall be arranged for manual operation in event of power failure. Doors shall automatically open when the car arrives at the landing and automatically close after an adjustable time interval or when the car is dispatched to another landing. AC controlled units with oil checks, or other deviations are not acceptable. .1 No Un-Necessary Door Operation: The car door shall open only if the car is stopping for a car or hall call, answering a

car or hall call at the present position or selected as a dispatch car. .2 Door Open Time Saver: If a car is stopping in response to a car call assignment only (no coincident hall call), the

current door hold open time is changed to a shorter field programmable time when the electronic door protection device is activated.

.3 Double Door Operation: When a car stops at a landing with concurrent up and down hall calls, no car calls, and no other hall call assignments, the car door opens to answer the hall call in the direction of the car's current travel. If an onward car call is not registered before the door closes to within 6 inches of fully closed, the travel shall reverse and the door shall reopen to answer the other call.

.4 Nudging Operation: The doors shall remain open as long as the electronic detector senses the presence of a passenger or object in the door opening. If door closing is prevented for a field programmable time, a buzzer shall sound. When the obstruction is removed, the door shall begin to close at reduced speed. If the infra-red door protection system detects a person or object while closing on nudging, the doors shall stop and resume closing only after the obstruction has been removed.

.5 Door Reversal: If the doors are closing and the infra-red beam(s) is interrupted, the doors shall reverse and reopen. After the obstruction is cleared, the doors shall begin to close.

.6 Door Open Watchdog: If the doors are opening, but do not fully open after a field adjustable time, the doors shall recycle closed then attempt to open six times to try and correct the fault.

.7 Door Close Watchdog: If the doors are closing, but do not fully close after a field adjustable time, the doors shall recycle open then attempt to close six times to try and correct the fault.

.8 Door Close Assist: When the doors have failed to fully close and are in the recycle mode, the door drive motor shall have increased torque applied to possibly overcome mechanical resistance or differential air pressure and allow the door to close.

.2 Door Protection Device: Provide a door protection system using microprocessor controlled infra-red light beams. The beams shall project across the car opening detecting the presence of a passenger or object. If door movement is obstructed, the doors shall immediately reopen.

Car Operating Station: .1 Car Operating Station, General: The main car control in each car shall contain the devices required for specific operation

mounted in an integral swing return panel requiring no applied faceplate. Wrap return shall have a No. 4 brushed stainless steel finish. The main car operating panel shall be mounted in the return and comply with handicap requirements. Pushbuttons that illuminate using long lasting LED’s shall be included for each floor served, and emergency buttons and switches shall be provided per code. Switches for car light and accessories shall be provided.

.2 Emergency Communications System: Integral phone system provided.


Page 128 of 141

.3 Column Mounted Car Riding Lantern: A car riding lantern shall be installed in the lift cab and located in the entrance. The lantern, when illuminated, will indicate the intended direction of travel. The lantern will illuminate and a signal will sound when the car arrives at a floor where it will stop. The lantern shall remain illuminated until the door(s) begin to close.

Control Systems: .1 Controller: The lift control system shall be microprocessor based and software oriented. Control of the lift shall be automatic in

operation by means of push buttons in the car numbered to correspond to floors served, for registering car stops, and by "up-down" push buttons at each intermediate landing and "call" push buttons at terminal landings.

.2 Automatic Light and Fan shut down: The control system shall evaluate the system activity and automatically turn off the cab lighting and ventilation fan during periods of inactivity. The settings shall be field programmable.

.3 Emergency Power Operation: (10-DOA) upon loss of the normal power supply, building-supplied standby power is available on the same wires as the normal power supply. Once the loss of normal power is detected and standby power is available, the elevator is lowered to a pre-designated landing and the doors are opened. After passengers have exited the elevator, the doors are closed and the car is shut down. When normal power is restored, the elevator automatically resumes operation.

.4 Special Operation: Not Applicable Hall Stations:

.1 Hall Stations, General: Buttons shall illuminate to indicate call has been registered at that floor for the indicated direction. .1 Provide one pushbutton riser with faceplates having a No. 4 brushed stainless steel finish.

.1 Phase 1 firefighter’s service key switch, with instructions, shall be incorporated into the hall station at the designated level.

.2 Floor Identification Pads: Provide door jamb pads at each floor. Jamb pads shall comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.

.3 Hall Position Indicator: An electronic dot matrix position indicator shall be provided and mounted for optimum viewing. As the car travels, its position in the hoistway shall be indicated by the illumination of the alphanumeric character corresponding to the landing which the elevator is stopped or passing. When hall lanterns are provided, the position indicator shall be combined with the hall lanterns in the same faceplate. Faceplates shall match hall stations. Provide at all typical landings.


.1 Before starting elevator installation, inspect hoistway, hoistway openings, pits and/or control room, as constructed, verify all critical dimensions, and examine supporting structures and all other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Do not proceed with lift installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.

.2 Installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for satisfactory performance. Installation:

.1 Install elevator systems components and coordinate installation of hoistway wall construction. .1 Work shall be performed by competent elevator installation personnel in accordance with ASME A17.1, manufacturer's

installation instructions and approved shop drawings. .2 Comply with the National Electrical Code for electrical work required during installation.

.2 Perform work with competent, skilled workmen under the direct control and supervision of the Lift manufacturer's experienced foreman.

.3 Supply in ample time for installation by other trades, inserts, anchors, bearing plates, brackets, supports, and bracing including all setting templates and diagrams for placement.

.4 Welded construction: Provide welded connections for installation of elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualification of welding operators.

.5 Coordination: Coordinate lift work with the work of other trades, for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. Use benchmarks, lines, and levels designated by the Contractor, to ensure dimensional coordination of the work.

.6 Install machinery, guides, controls, car and all equipment and accessories to provide a quiet, smoothly operating installation, free from side sway, oscillation or vibration.

.7 Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of lift guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum safe, workable dimensions at each landing.

.8 Erect hoistway sills, headers, and frames before erection of rough walls and doors; erect fascia and toe guards after rough walls finished. Set sill units accurately aligned and slightly above finish floor at landings.

.9 Lubricate operating parts of system, where recommended by manufacturer. Field Quality Control:

.1 Acceptance testing: Upon completion of the lift installation and before permitting use of elevator, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by Code and governing regulations or agencies. Perform other tests, if any, as required by governing regulations or agencies.


Page 129 of 141

.2 Advise Owner, Contractor, Architect, and governing authorities in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on the elevator.

Adjusting: .1 Make necessary adjustments of operating devices and equipment to ensure elevator operates smoothly and accurately.

Cleaning: .1 Before final acceptance, remove protection from finished surfaces and clean and polish surfaces in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations for type of material and finish provided. Stainless steel shall be cleaned with soap and water and dried with a non-abrasive surface; it shall not be cleaned with bleach-based cleansers.

.2 At completion of elevator work, remove tools, equipment, and surplus materials from site. Clean equipment rooms and hoistway. Remove trash and debris.

.3 Use environmentally preferable and low VOC emitting cleaners for each application type. Cleaners that contain solvents, pine and/or citrus oils are not permitted.

Protection: .1 At time of Substantial Completion of elevator work, or portion thereof, provide suitable protective coverings, barriers, devices,

signs, or other such methods or procedures to protect elevator work from damage or deterioration. Maintain protective measures throughout remainder of construction period.

Demonstration: .1 Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevators. Review emergency provisions,

including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of failure in operation and other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in normal procedures to be followed in checking for sources of operational failures or malfunctions.

.2 Make a final check of each elevator operation, with Owner's personnel present, immediately before date of substantial completion. Determine that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly.

Lift Schedule: .1 Lift Qty. 1 .2 Lift Model: Pro Lift HD or approved equal. .3 Lift Type: Barrier Free Lift .4 Rated Capacity: 1050 lbs. .5 Rated Speed: 30 ft./min. .6 Operation System: 1:2 Hydraulic .7 Travel: Refer to drawings. .8 Landings: 2 total. .9 Openings: Refer to drawings. .10 Clear Car Inside: 4' - 0'' wide x 5' - 0'' deep .11 Cab Height: 8'-0'' standard .12 Hoistway Entrance Size: 3' - 6'' wide x 7'-0'' high .13 Door Type: Single Speed .14 Power Characteristics: Refer to drawings. .15 Hoistway Dimensions: 5' - 0'' wide x 5' - 6'' deep .16 Pit Depth: 1' - 0'' .17 Button & Fixture Style: Traditional Signal Fixtures .18 Special Operations: None


Page 130 of 141

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSSION - NOT USED

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

Refer to Mechanical Drawings prepared by SNC Lavalin.

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

Refer to Mechanical Drawings prepared by SNC Lavalin.

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Refer to Electrical Drawings prepared by SNC Lavalin.

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS Refer to Electrical Drawings prepared by SNC Lavalin.

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

Refer to Electrical Drawings prepared by SNC Lavalin

DIVISION 29 – 30 – NOT USED


Page 131 of 141

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

31 23 00 – EXCAVATION AND FILL Protection: Provide necessary barriers and other protection to open excavations and maintain lighting for safe pedestrian and

vehicular traffic. Support abutting property and structure to maintain work safe to life, limb and property. Comply strictly with the Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects and other applicable safety regulations in force. Protect existing buildings and surface features which may be affected by work from damage while work is in progress and repair damage resulting from work

Existing Utilities and Structures: Size, depth and location of existing utilities and structures as indicated on drawings are for guidance only. Prior to commencing work of this Section, notify applicable Owner or authorities, establish the location and extent of underground utility lines occurring in the work area to prevent damage or disturbance during execution of the Work.

Excavation: Excavation to include strata except rock excavation including frozen materials to provide sufficient space to permit application of damp proofing and/or waterproofing and installation of subsurface drainage systems. Remove and dispose of unsuitable / unusable excavated materials, concrete, masonry, paving walks and rubble and other obstructions encountered during excavation off site.

The Contractor to make certain that sides of excavated area are cut on a stable slope; otherwise sides must be shored and braced to maintain stability and safety. The design and installation of shoring and bracing to be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Any findings by the Contractor of unstable soil at indicated building elevations must be reported to the Consultant immediately. Failure to report such findings to make the Contractor fully responsible for damage caused by undue settlement.

Keep bottoms of excavations clean and clear of loose materials, leveled and stepped at changes of levels with exception of excavations made for drainage purposes and those to slope as required.

Excavations must not interfere with normal splay of bearing from bottom of any footing. Excavation at Bedrock: At footings, piers and or foundation systems that are required to bear on clean, approved, sound bedrock,

excavate and remove materials to expose bedrock. Clean bedrock using compressed air equipment to removal fines, gravel and loose rock. Scale bedrock to ensure that there is no loose rock supporting the foundations systems. Coordinate review of exposed bedrock by the geotechnical consultant. Where additional loose rock or scaling is required complete this work as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. Complete scaling and cleaning of the rock to the satisfaction of the Geotechnical Engineer.

After completion of excavation and prior to placing any concrete on bearing strata or placing of fill, notify Consultant to inspect exposed bearing surfaces. Do not proceed without authorization.

Backfill material to comply with OPSS 101-13 – Material Specifications for Aggregate – Base, Subbase, Select Subgrade and Backfill Material. Material to general consist of the following types; .1 Granular ‘A’ Fill: screened crushed aggregate .2 Pea Gravel / Clear Stone: to be 5/8” (16mm) screened, washed ‘pea gravel’ or 3/4” (19mm) diameter screened, washed

crushed stone graded uniformly between maximum size of use 3/4” (19mm) and minimum size of 1/4” (6mm) with not more than 5% undersize particles

.3 Granular ‘B’ Fill: free of clay, shale and composed of clean, hard durable, uncoated particles from deposits of gravel or sand, talus rock or quarried rock, 4” (100mm) minus.

.4 Granular ‘B’ Type II fill; to be free of clay, shale and composed of clean, hard, durable uncoated particles from quarried rock, 6” (150mm) minus.

.5 Bedding Fill For Trenches: .1 Earth Trenches to 600mm (2') Above Mechanical Pipe Work: Clean, natural, unwashed gravel or sand, ranging in size

from medium gravel to medium sand, 100% passing 25mm (1") sieve and 95% to 100% retained on 250 um (No. 60 sieve).

.2 Earth Trenches - 100mm (4") Envelope Surrounding Electrical Raceways and Wiring: Fine aggregate (sand) for concrete, graded, CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.6 Earth Fill: Earth fill for use for rough grading to be clean excavated earth or clay fill materials free of, waste materials, debris of any nature, frozen material, organic matter, muskeg, topsoil, or cohesive matter and rocks larger than 100mm (4") in diameter. If sufficient quantity of material is not available from excavation, use imported fill having same, or better, characteristics. Provide minimum 12” (300mm) depth under sodded and landscaped areas

.7 Lean Concrete Fill:15 MPa concrete Rock Removal: Complete rock removal required to permit construction of proposed work. Complete rock removal in accordance with

the following items. Remove and dispose of rock from the site. .1 The Contractor to comply with statutes, regulations, by-laws and orders relating to the supply, hauling, handling, use of, and

storing of explosives. .2 The Contractor to retain a Blasting Consultant to advice on methods and procedures, inspect and record existing condition on

the blast site and at adjacent properties, and witness / monitor blasts and rock removal. .3 Before any blasting operations are carried out, the Contractor to give reasonable notice to any department or agency of

Government and to any person, partnership or corporation, including a municipal corporation, and board or commission thereof affected thereby.


Page 132 of 141

.4 Before blasting, the Contractor must give adequate warning to parts of the project by siren or other suitable means.

.5 In addition to any other precaution that may be necessary, the Contractor to, immediately prior to a blast, clear the blasting area of residents, vehicular and pedestrian traffic, and to post flagmen on each road entering the blasting area who to stop traffic and to prevent such traffic from entering the area until the blast has taken place.

.6 The Contractor to take precautions necessary in regard to explosives, drilling, or methods of blasting used to ensure that persons are not injured and that adjoining property and structures, including public utilities, are not damaged. Without limiting the General Conditions, the Contractor to be responsible for claims whatsoever arising from the hauling, handling, use of, or storing of explosives and effects direct or indirect of the drilling and blasting operations, whether on or off the limits of the contract.

.7 For purposes of defending himself and the Owner against claims for damages to buildings in the vicinity of the work, the Contractor to, both prior to and following construction and at his own expense, carry out complete inspections of buildings likely to be affected or damaged by detonations under this contract. Such inspection to be by an independent qualified agency, at the Contractor’s expense. Copies of the inspection reports to be provided to the Owner.

.8 No payment to be made for protection measures or for injury to persons or for damages or repairs to property, structures including public utilities or for any claim whatsoever arising from blasting operations.

Compaction Testing: backfill to be compacted to 100% standard Proctor Dry Densities in accordance with ASTM D698. Backfill to be placed in layers not greater than 8” (200mm) thick and be compacted using mechanical equipment to suit the backfill locations. Extent and frequency of testing to be specified by the testing company. Coordinate testing as required.

Backfilling: For backfilling, use granular material herein specified, free from waste, organic matter and other objectionable foreign matter. Do not use any kind of frozen material. Clay is not to be used under any circumstances as backfilling material. Fill materials to be approved by the Consultant prior to the commencement of any backfilling operations. .1 Concrete Footings: In areas to receive new concrete footings remove existing fill to achieve required depth as scheduled.

Provide a minimum of 150mm Granular A on top native soils. .2 Drainage Pipe / Weeping Tile: Drainage Pipe / Weeping Tile: Pea Gravel / Clear stone as defined above. Provide a minimum

of 6” around the drainage pipe / weeping tile. .3 Foundations: Insulation, damp proofing, waterproofing and drain tile, where scheduled or indicated on the drawings, to be

installed and approved by the Consultant prior to backfilling excavations. Backfill to indicated levels on interior and to within 12” (300mm) of finished grade, or as required to suit site grading on exteriors with Granular ‘B’ Type II fill. Place backfill carefully to prevent damage to foundations, damp proofing, waterproofing and insulation. In areas with finished surface, exterior stairs and concrete pads, place fill in maximum 8” (200mm) lifts, compacting each lift to 100% SPD prior to placing subsequent layers.

.4 Earth Fill: Provide minimum 12” (300mm) earth fill under sodded and landscaped areas. Provide 6” clay stop below earth fill when placed on free draining granular fill.

.5 Slabs-on-Grade: In areas to receive slabs-on-grade, check previously places granular fill and recompact any disturbed areas. Over accepted native soils / rock / engineered fill approved by geotechnical engineer, build up to a point 8” (200mm) as scheduled under finished floor with compacted Granular ‘B’ Type II and granular A as scheduled on the drawings. Granular to be fully compacted and ready to receive insulation and concrete slab.

.6 Driveways, Parking Areas, Walks and Curbs: Beneath concrete sidewalks and asphalt paving, provide a minimum compacted 8” of Granular A over existing fill / native soils.


Page 133 of 141

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 14 23 – ASPHALT UNIT PAVING

General: References:

.1 Canadian General Standard Board (CGSB).

.2 OPSS 1103-89: Material Specification for Emulsified Asphalt.

.3 OPSS 1150-93: Material Specification for Hot Mixed and Hot Laid Asphaltic Concrete. Quality Assurance:

.1 Upon request by Consultant, submit manufacturer’s test data and certification that asphalt tack coat material meets requirements of this section.

Products: Granular Base: Granular ‘A’ and ‘B’ in accordance with the requirements of Section 31 23 00, Excavation and Fill. Asphalt: Hot mix, asphaltic concrete HL3 mixture, in accordance with OPSS 1150.05. Asphaltic Joint Painting Material: SS-1 emulsified asphalt, OPSS 1103.05.

Execution: Preparation:

.1 Saw-cut perimeter of area to be replaced Remove asphalt material and re-grade existing granular base to suit new grades as indicated.

.2 Grind top surface of asphalt to depth of 1-1/2” (40mm) for width of 12” (300mm) from saw cut.

.3 Paint exposed edge of asphaltic joints with SS 1 emulsified asphalt.

.4 Compact sub grade to minimum 98% of Standard Proctor Density, ASTM D698. Placing Granular Finish:

.1 Place and finish granular surface true to grade and cross section.

.2 Grade and compact to minimum of 98% of Standard Proctor density. Placing Asphaltic Mixture:

.1 Place asphaltic mixture after granular base is placed, compacted and reviewed by Consultant. Air temperature during placing of mixture to be minimum 7 degC (45 degF) and rising. Temperature of mixture when spread to be not less than 120 degC (245 degF) nor more than 150 degC (300 degF). Do not increase temperature of mixture to offset long distance hauling.

.2 Compact asphaltic mixture to density not less than 97% of density of laboratory compacted mixture on areas as soon as it can bear roller without undue displacement or hair cracking.

.3 Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated. Keep speed of roller slow enough to avoid displacement of mixture. Keep roller wheels slightly moistened by water to prevent adhesion of mixture but avoid excess of water. Compact mixture with hot tampers in locations that are not easily accessible to machine roller.

.4 Do not place any asphaltic course less than 25mm (1”) thick nor more than 75mm (3”) thick and compact to density not less than 97% of density of laboratory compacted mixture.

.5 Upon completion of compaction each pavement course to be smooth and true grade with variation not more than 1/8” (3mm) from thickness indicated on Drawings and free from depressions exceeding 1/8” (3mm) as measured with 10’-0” (3000mm) straight edge.

Pavement Section: .1 Each pavement section to consist of 6” (150mm) compacted thickness of granular “A” aggregate over new or existing granular

“B” aggregate 2” (50mm) compacted thickness of Asphalt HL3 Joints:

.1 Carefully place and compact hot asphaltic material against joints. Correct any unsatisfactory joint before proceeding with work.

.2 Feathering of joints not permitted.

32 16 00 – CONCRETE SIDEWALKS, CURBS AND GUTTERS

General: References:

.1 CAN/CSA-A23.1-94, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction.

.2 ASTM C309-91, Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

.3 ASTM D698-91, Test Method of Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Unit Standard Effort.

.4 CAN/CSA-A23.2-M90, Methods of Test for Concrete

.5 OPSS 1010-95, Material Specification for Aggregates - Granular A, B, M and Select Sub grade Material

.6 OPSS 1308-95, Material Specification for Joint Filler (Concrete)

.7 OPSS 353-95, Concrete Curb and Gutter Systems


Page 134 of 141


.1 Concrete mixes and materials: air-entrained, 5% to 7%, 25 MPa minimum compressive strength, conforming to the requirements of OPSS 353 and in accordance with the requirements of Division 03.

.2 Granular base: in accordance with the requirements of Section 02220, Excavating and Backfilling.

.3 Curing Compound: Chlorinated rubber based, ASTM C309, Type 2.

.4 Expansion Joint Filler: Preformed, non-extruding and resilient bituminous, OPSS 1308 for Type "A".

Execution: Grade Preparation:

.1 Do grade preparation work in accordance with Section 02220, Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.

.2 Set out work to lines and levels indicated on Drawings. Maintain such lines and levels.

.3 Place fill in maximum 6” (150mm) layers. Fine grade, shape compact sub-base to minimum of 98% Standard Proctor Density to ASTM D698.

Granular Base: .1 Obtain Consultant’s approval of sub-grade before placing granular base. Place granular base to required width and thickness

in layers not exceeding 6” (150mm) un-compacted thickness. .2 Maintain true grade and cross section for each layer of material and grade and compact each layer to minimum of 98% of

Standard Proctor density to ASTM D698. Place granular base material to lines, widths, and depths as indicated. Concrete:

.1 Obtain Consultant’s approval of granular base prior to placing concrete.

.2 Do concrete sidewalk, curb and gutter work in accordance with the requirements of OPSS 353. Do not pour concrete when air temperature is, or may fall below 5 degC (41 degF) during or within 24 hours of pour, unless precautions are taken to prevent damage to concrete resulting from low temperature

.3 Immediately after floating, give sidewalk surface uniform broom finish to produce regular corrugations not exceeding 5/64” (2mm) deep, by drawing broom in direction normal to centre line.

.4 Provide edging as indicated with 3/8” (10mm) radius edging tool.

.5 Slip-form pavers equipped with string line system for line and grade control may be used if quality of work acceptable to Consultant can be demonstrated. Hand finish surfaces when directed by Consultant.

Tolerances: .1 Finish surfaces to within 1/8” (3mm) as measured with 10’-0” (3 m) long straightedge placed on surface.

Expansion and Contraction Joints: .1 Install tooled transverse contraction joints after floating, when concrete is stiff, but still plastic, at intervals of 5’-0” (1500mm). .2 Install expansion joint at intervals of 20’-0” (6000mm). .3 Install expansion joints around manholes and catch basins and along length adjacent to concrete curbs, catch basins,

buildings or permanent structure. .4 When sidewalk is adjacent to curb, make joints of curbs, gutters and sidewalk coincide.

Curing: .1 Cure concrete by adding moisture continuously in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1 to exposed finished surfaces for at least

one (1) day after placing, or sealing moisture in by curing compound approved by Consultant. .2 Where burlap is used to moist curing, place two pre-wetted layers on concrete surface and keeps continuously wet during

curing period. .3 Apply curing compound evenly to form continuous film. In accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.

Backfill: .1 Allow concrete to cure for 7 days prior to backfilling. .2 Backfill to designated elevations with material approved by Consultant. Compact and shape to required contours as indicated

or as directed by Consultant. Field Quality Control:

.1 Independent inspection and testing company may be appointed by the Owner to carry out inspection and testing as directed by Consultant. The costs of such inspection and testing will be paid for by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 45 00, Quality Control.

32 14 13.13 – INTERLOCKING PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING

General: Scope: Provide all labour, materials, equipment and services to supply and install precast interlocking pavers and related landscaping

accessories as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Job Conditions:

.1 Do not lay concrete pavers over frozen materials and improperly prepared base.


Page 135 of 141

.2 At end of each work period, protect unrestrained edges with plywood or similar material. Submittals:

.1 Provide shop drawings clearly indicating the material being supplied and showing colours and patterns according to the enclosed specification.

.2 Provide all necessary installation instructions.


.1 General: Concrete materials shall be in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1.

.2 Precast Interlocking Pavers: .1 Dry cast concrete paving brick, with compressive strength of 55 MPa (8000 psi), and 5% maximum water absorption.

Conform to CAN3-A82.2-M for freeze thaw resistance. Products by following manufacturers are acceptable: “Holland” as manufactured by Brown’s Concrete Products or equivalent as manufactured by Unilock Ltd., Perma Paving Stone Co., Decra-Loc Paving Stone Products or Durastone Ltd.

.2 Colours: as selected by Consultant.

.3 Dimensions: 200mm long x 100mm wide 60mm thick. .3 Limestone Boulders: approximately 1’-6” in height, to be coordinated with Owner and Consultant, supplied by Grand River

Natural Stone Ltd., or approved alternate. .4 Granular Base: Granular ‘A’ conforming to OPSS Form 1010. .5 Leveling Course: Clean, sharp, well graded sand, free of organics and deleterious soluble salts and similar materials;

alternatively limestone screenings. .6 Crusher Dust: 1/8” Crusher Dust as manufactured by Ethier Sand and Gravel, or approved equal. .7 Jointing Sand: Imported sand conforming to ASTM Specification C144 - gradation for 1/8” (3mm) joints - free of organics and

soluble salts or contaminants likely to cause efflorescence, and in compliance with the following grading limits:

Sieve Size Percent Passing

Natural Sand Manufactured Sand

4.75mm No. 4 100 100

2.36mm No. 8 95-100 95-100

1.18mm No. 16 70-100 70-100

600mm No. 30 40-75 40-75

300mm No. 50 10-35 20-40

150mm No. 100 2-15 10-25

75mm No. 200 0 0-10


.1 Sub grade to be unfrozen, and free of ice and snow.

.2 Ensure that the prepared sub grade is protected from damage from surface water and other trades. On-Grade Application:

.1 Excavate and re-grade as required to achieve the levels shown. Conform to the requirements of Division 31 and 32.

.2 Proof roll and compact exposed earth sub grade to 100% Standard Proctor maximum dry density.

.3 Correct any irregularities or depressions that develop under rolling by loosening the material at such locations and adding or replacing material and re-compacting until the surface is smooth and uniform. Dig out any soft spots which develop during or after compaction operations and replace at no increase in Contract Price.

.4 Place a 6” (150mm) thick compacted layer of granular base over compacted earth sub grade. Spread in maximum compacted lifts of 4” (100mm). Compact each lift to 95% Modified Proctor density.

.5 Sufficiently grade the upper surface of the granular base and compact to prevent infiltration of the bedding sand into the granular base and both during construction and throughout its service life. Bind segregated areas of the granular base by the application of crushed fines which have been watered and compacted into the surface.

.6 Place crusher dust to a depth higher than specified to allow for compaction after pavers have been installed. Installation of Pavers:

.1 Do not install pavers with excessive chips, cracks, voids, discolorations or other defects.

.2 Install paving units simultaneously to ensure colour mix uniformity.

.3 If necessary, cut pavers with a concrete saw. All cut edges shall be true, even, straight, and undamaged.

.4 Place pavers as close together as possible, so that joints do not exceed 1/8” (3mm).

.5 Compaction of pavers shall be accomplished with three (3) or more passes with a vibratory plate compactor; the first pass shall be made with the surface of the laid pavers brushed clean and joints open; the remaining passes with the vibrator shall be accompanied with simultaneous brushing of fine masonry sand into the joints and sprinkling with water to compact.


Page 136 of 141

.6 Fill all voids in the paver joints by sweeping in dry, jointing sand.

.7 Finish pavement to lines and levels to ensure positive drainage as. In no case shall the cross-fall of any portion of the pavement be less than two percent (2%). The pavement surface shall not deviate by more than 1/4” (6mm) in 6’-0” (1800mm) from a straight edge laid in any direction.

32 16 23 – PRECAST CONCRETE PAVERS

General: Scope: Installation of precast concrete pavers at ________________. Each paver to be 8’-0” x 8’-0”. References: Refer to Structural and Civil drawings and specifications.

.1 ASTM C67-89a; Methods of Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile.

.2 ASTM C144-89; Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.

.3 ASTM C33-90; Specification for Concrete Aggregate.

.4 CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90; Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction.

.5 CAN/CSA-A82.2-M78; Methods of Sampling and Testing Brick.

.6 OPSS; Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications. Submittals:

.1 Samples: When requested by Consultant, submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00, Submittals. Job Conditions:

.1 Do not lay concrete pavers or slab steps over frozen materials or on improperly prepared base.

.2 At end of each work period, protect unrestrained edges with plywood or similar material.


.1 General: Concrete materials to be in accordance with CAN/CSA-A23.1.

.2 Precast Interlocking Pavers: .1 To be Hollandstone, as manufactured by Unilock .2 Dry cast concrete interlocking paving brick, with compressive strength of 55 MPa (8000 psi), and 5% maximum water

absorption. Conform to CAN3-A82.2-M for freeze thaw resistance .3 Dimensions & Colour: Sierra.

.3 Granular Sub-Base: Modified Granular ’ B’ conforming to OPSS Form 1010 and OPSS 314

.4 Granular Base: Granular ‘A’ conforming to OPSS Form 1010 and OPSS 314

.5 Levelling Course: 4” (or, as described specifically elsewhere in the specifications), clean sharp, well graded crusher dust, free of organics and deleterious soluble salts and similar materials graded and compacted into place.

.6 Jointing Sand: Imported sand conforming to ASTM Specification C144 - gradation for 1/8” (3mm) joints - free of organics and soluble salts or contaminants likely to cause efflorescence, and in compliance with the following grading limits:

Sieve Size Percent Passing

Natural Sand Manufactured Sand 4.75mm No. 4 100 100 2.36mm No. 8 95-100 95-100 1.18mm No. 16 70-100 70-100 600mm No. 30 40-75 40-75 300mm No. 50 10-35 20-40 150mm No. 100 2-15 10-25 75mm No. 200 0 0-10

.7 Geotextile Fabric: Bentofix thermal lock geosynthetic clay liner as manufacture by Terrafix Geosynthetics Inc.


.1 Subgrade to be unfrozen, and free of ice and snow.

.2 Ensure that the prepared subgrade is protected from damage from surface water and other trades. On Grade Application:

.1 Excavate and re-grade as required to achieve the levels shown. Conform to general requirements.

.2 Proof roll and compact exposed earth subgrade to 100% Standard Proctor maximum dry density.

.3 Correct any irregularities or depressions that develop under rolling by loosening the material at such locations and adding or replacing material and re-compacting until the surface is smooth and uniform. Dig out any soft spots which develop during or after compaction operations and replace at no increase in Contract Price.


Page 137 of 141

.4 Sub-Base: Place compacted layer of granular sub-base over compacted earth sub-grade. Spread in maximum compacted lifts of 4”. Compact each lift to 95% Modified Proctor density.

.5 Base: Place compacted layer of granular base over compacted sub-base. Spread in maximum compacted lifts of 4” Compact each lift to 95% Modified Proctor density.

.6 Sufficiently grade the upper surface of the granular base and compact to prevent infiltration of the bedding sand into the granular base and both during construction and throughout its service life. Bind segregated areas of the granular base by the application of crushed fines which have been watered and compacted into the surface.

.7 Setting Bed: Place fine setting bed over filter fabric to a depth higher than specified to allow for compaction after pavers have been installed. Depth of sand after paver/slab compaction to be maximum 1-1/2” (38mm). Note: do not compact slabs – follow manufacturer’s instructions.

.8 Geotextile Fabric: Install at slab steps. Installation of Pavers and Slabs:

.1 General: Install as per manufacturers’ recommendations and as per Section – 31 23 00 Excavation and Backfill.

.2 Do not install pavers/slabs with excessive chips, cracks, voids, discolorations or other defects.

.3 Install paving units/slabs simultaneously to ensure colour mix uniformity. (i.e. continue and extend existing parking lot colour).

.4 If necessary, cut pavers/slabs with a concrete saw. Cut edges to be true, even, straight, and undamaged.

.5 Place pavers/slabs as close together as possible, so that joints do not exceed 1/8” (3mm).

.6 Compaction of pavers (not slabs) to be accomplished with three (3) or more passes with a vibratory plate compactor; the first pass to be made with the surface of the laid pavers brushed clean and joints open; the remaining passes with the vibrator to be accompanied with simultaneous brushing of fine masonry sand into the joints and sprinkling with water to compact.

.7 Fill voids in the joints by sweeping in dry, jointing sand.

.8 Finish to lines and levels to ensure positive drainage. In no case to the cross-fall of any portion of the pavement be less than two percent (2%). The pavement surface to not deviate by more than 1/4” (6mm) in 6’-0” (1800mm) from a straight edge laid in any direction.


Page 138 of 141

132 91 19 – TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND GRADING

General: Scope: Provide topsoil and finished grading to conform to the following requirements.

Products: Imported Topsoil: friable, neither heavy clay nor of very light sandy nature containing minimum of 4% organic matter for clay loams

and 2% for sandy loams to maximum of 20% by volume. Free from subsoil, roots, grass, weeks, toxic materials, stones, foreign objects and with an acidity range (pH) of 5.5 to 7.5. Topsoil containing crabgrass, couch grass or noxious weeds is not acceptable.

Fertilizer: Complete commercial synthetic slow release fertilizer with maximum 35% water-soluble nitrogen, formulation as per soil analysis recommendation.

Lime: .1 Ground agricultural limestone containing minimum 85% of total carbonates. .2 Gradation requirements: percentage passing by weight, 90% passing 1mm (0.040”) sieve, 50% passing 0.1mm (0.005”) sieve. .3 Use lime as indicated by acidity analysis of topsoil to bring pH to required level .4 Bone meal: raw bone meal, finely ground with a minimum analysis of 3% nitrogen and 20% phosphoric acid. .5 Sulphur: finely crushed agricultural elemental Sulphur, free of impurities. .6 Peat moss: Decomposed plant material, fairly elastic and homogeneous, free of decomposed colloidal residue, wood, Sulphur,

and iron; containing minimum 60% organic matter by weight and moisture content not exceeding 15%. Shredded particles may not exceed 1/4” (6mm) in size. Minimum pH value peat 4.5 maximum 6.0.

Soil Mixtures for Planting: for trees, shrubs, planting beds and planters: mix imported topsoil with 25% peat moss. Incorporate bone meal into mixture at a rate of 1-3/4 lbs. (1 kg) of bone meal per cu. yd. (m3) of soil mixture.

Execution: Schedule finish grading and placing of topsoil so as to minimize surface erosion and leaching out of soil supplements before sodding

and seeding are completed. Preparation: Grade subgrade, eliminating uneven areas and low spots, ensuring positive drainage. Remove debris, roots, branches,

stones in excess of 2” (50mm) diameter and other deleterious materials. Remove subsoil that has been contaminated with oil, gasoline or calcium chloride. Dispose of removed materials. Cultivate entire area which is to receive topsoil to depth of 4” (100mm). Repeat cultivation in those areas where equipment used for hauling and spreading has compacted subgrade.

Spreading of Topsoil: Spread topsoil with adequate moisture in uniform layers during dry weather over approved, dry, unfrozen subgrade, where seeding, sodding, planting is indicated. Keep topsoil 1-1/2” (40mm) below finished grade for sodded areas; elsewhere bring topsoil up to finished grade. Apply topsoil to the following minimum depths: 4” (100mm) for sodded and seeded areas 16” (400mm) for shrub beds and planting beds. Remove stones, roots, grass, weeds, construction materials, debris and foreign non-organic objects from topsoil. Manually spread topsoil around trees and plants.

Application of Fertilizer: Apply fertilizer at least one week after lime application and at least six (6) days before sodding. Spread fertilizer with mechanical spreaders over entire area of topsoil at rate determined on basis of soil sample test. Mix fertilizer thoroughly into upper 2” (50mm) of topsoil.

Finish Grading: Fine grade mechanically or manually entire top soiled area to contours and elevations as indicated. Eliminate rough spots and low areas to ensure positive drainage. Fine grade and loosen topsoil prior to sodding. Eliminate rough spots and low areas to ensure positive drainage. Prepare loose friable sod bed by means of discing and subsequent raking. Roll lightly and rake wherever topsoil is too loose. Roll topsoil with 100 lb. (45 kg) roller, minimum 24” (600mm) wide, to compact and retain surface. Leave surface smooth, uniform, firm against deep foot printing, with a fine loose texture.

32 92 23 – SODDING

General: Scope: Provide sod to conform to the following requirements.


.1 Nursery Sod Number One Kentucky Bluegrass / Fescue Sod: sod grown from minimum 40% Kentucky Bluegrass, 30% Creeping Red Fescue. Quality and source to comply with standards outlined in “Guide Specification for Nursery Stock”, Section 17, 1978 Edition, published by Canadian Nursery Trades Association.

.2 Water: Potable

.3 Fertilizer: To be complete synthetic slow release fertilizer with maximum 35% water-soluble nitrogen as per topsoil report.

Execution: Workmanship

.1 Keep site well drained.


Page 139 of 141

.2 Clean up immediately soil or debris spilled onto pavement and dispose of deleterious materials. Laying of Sod

.1 Obtain approval of topsoil grade and depth before starting sodding.

.2 Lay sod during growing season. Sodding during dry summer period, at freezing temperatures or over frozen soil is not acceptable.

.3 Lay sod in rows, perpendicular to slope, smooth and even with adjoining areas, and with joints staggered. Butt sections closely without overlapping or leaving gaps between sections. Cut out irregular or thin sections with a sharp knife.

.4 Provide close contact between sod and soil by means of light roller. Heavy rolling to correct irregularities in grade is not permitted.

.5 Water immediately after sod laying to obtain moisture penetration through sod into top 4” (100 mm) of topsoil.

.6 Provide adequate protection of sodded areas against erosion and mechanical damage. Remove protection after lawn areas have been accepted.

Laying of Sod on Slopes Greater than 3:1 Lay sod sections at right angles to slopes and secure with wooden pegs. Place pegs three (3) per sq. yd., 4” (100 mm) below top edge

to prevent shifting of sod and drive pegs flush with top of sod soil. Maintenance of Sod

.1 Ensure maintenance equipment suitable to Consultant.

.2 Water sodded areas in sufficient quantities and at required frequency to maintain sub-soil immediately under sod continuously moist for depth of 3” (75 mm) to 4” (100 mm).

.3 Cut grass first time to 1-1/2” (40 mm) when it reaches height of 2-1/4” (60 mm). Remove clippings which will smother grassed areas.

.4 Fertilize sodded areas one month after sodding with 2:1:1 ratio fertilizer. Spread evenly at rate of 1 lb. (50 g) of nitrogen / 100 sq. yd. (10 sq. m) and water in well. Postpone fertilizing until next spring if application falls within four week period prior to expected end of growth season in locality.

Acceptance .1 Sodded areas will be accepted at final inspection provided that:

.1 Sodded areas are properly established.

.2 Sod is free of bare and dead spots and without weeds.

.3 No surface soil is visible when grass has been cut to height of 1-1/2” (40 mm).

.4 Sodded areas are cut and have been cut minimum two (2) times. .2 Lawns sodded in fall will be accepted in following spring one (1) month after start of growing season provided acceptance

conditions are fulfilled.

32 93 00 – TREES, SHRUBS AND GROUND COVER

General: Scope: Provide trees, shrubs and ground cover to conform to the following requirements.


.1 Planting material to be in accordance with the plant schedule listed on the drawings and to comply with Guide Specification for Nursery Stock, 2006 Edition of Canadian Standards for Nursery Stock referring to size and development of plant material and root ball. Use trees and shrubs of No. 1 grade, free of disease, insects, defects or injuries and structurally sound with strong fibrous root system.

.2 Water: Potable and free of impurities that would inhibit plant growth.

.3 Stakes: T-bar, steel, 1-1/2” (40mm) x 1-1/2” (40mm) x 1/4“ (6mm) x 8’-0” (2400mm).

.4 Wire Tightener: Type 1: galvanized steel, Type 2: turnbuckle, galvanized steel, 3/8” (10mm) diameter with 11” (280mm) open length.

.5 Guying Wire: Type 1: steel, 1/8” (3mm) wire, Type 2: 1/16” 91.5mm) diameter multi-wire steel cable, Type 3: 1/8” (3mm) diameter multi-wire steel cable.

.6 Clamps: U-bolt: galvanized, ½” (12mm) diameter, c/w curved retaining bar and hex nuts.

.7 Anchors: Pressure Treated Wood:1-1/2” x 2-1/2” x 24” (40mm x 40mm x 600mm)

.8 Guying Collar: Tube: plastic, 1/2 “(12mm) diameter, nylon reinforced.

.9 Trunk Protection: Burlap: New clean, minimum 4.6 lbs/sq. yd. (2.4 kg/sq.m) mass and 6” (150mm) wide, and twine fastener.

.10 Rubber Mulch: size range of 5/16” to 7/8”, Non-toxic, polyurethane coating chemically cured to the rubber nuggets, approved product: ‘Rubber Mulch’ as manufactured by Rymar, or approved equal. Colour to be selected by Consultant from manufactures standard range of colours.

.11 Cedar Mulch: Wood chip: varying in size from 2” (50mm) to 3” (75mm) and 1/4 “ (6mm) to ¾ “(19mm) thick, free of bark, small branches and leaves.


Page 140 of 141

.12 Fertilizer: Synthetic commercial type, ratio 5:3:2.

.13 Anti-desiccant: Wax-like emulsion to provide film over plant surfaces reducing evaporation but permeable to permit transpiration.

Execution: Pre-planting Operations: Ensure plant material acceptable to Consultant. Remove damaged roots and branches from plant material.

Apply anti-desiccant to conifers and deciduous trees in leaf in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Excavation and Preparation of Planting Beds: Establish and prepare beds in accordance with other parts of this specification. For

individual planting holes: Stake out location and obtain approval from Consultant prior to excavating. Excavate to depth and width as indicated. Remove rocks, root, debris and toxic material from excavated material that will be used as planting soil for trees and individual shrubs. Dispose of excess material. Scarify sides of planting hole. Remove water which enters excavations prior to planting. Notify Consultant if water source is ground water.

Planting .1 For jute burlapped root balls, cut away top one third of wrapping and wire basket without damaging root ball. Do not pull burlap

or rope from under root ball. .2 For container stock or root balls in non-degradable wrapping, remove entire container or wrapping without damaging root ball. .3 Plant vertically in locations as indicated. Orient plant material to give best appearance in relation to structure, roads and walks. .4 For trees and shrubs: Backfill soil in 6” (150mm) lifts. Tamp each lift to eliminate air pockets. When two- thirds of depth of

planting pit has been backfilled, fill remaining space with water. After water has penetrated into soil, backfill to finish grade. Form watering saucer as indicated.

.5 For ground covers, backfill soil evenly to finish grade and tramp to eliminate pockets.

.6 Water plant material thoroughly. After soil settlement has occurred, fill with soil to finish grade. Trunk Protection: Install trunk protection on trees as indicated. Install trunk protection prior to installation of tree supports when used. Tree Supports:

.1 Use single stake tree support for deciduous trees less than 10’-0” (3000mm) and evergreens less than 6’-0” (1800mm). Place stake on prevailing wind site and 6” (150mm) from trunk. Drive stake minimum 6” (150mm) into undisturbed soil beneath roots. Ensure stake is secure, vertical and unsplit. Install 6” (150mm) long guying collar 5’0” (1500mm) above grade. Thread Type 1 guying wire through guying collar tube. Twist wire to form collar and secure firmly to stake. Cut off excess wire.

.2 Use 3 guy wires and anchors for deciduous trees greater than 10’-0” (3000mm) and evergreens greater than 6’-0” (1800mm).

.3 Use Type 2 guying wire with clamps for trees less than 3” (75mm) in diameter and Type 3 guying wire with clamps for trees greater than 3” (75mm) in diameter.

.4 Use Type 1 anchors for trees less than 3” (75mm) in diameter and Type 2 anchors for trees greater than 3” (75mm) in diameter.

.5 Install guying collars above branch to prevent slipping at approximately 2/3 height for evergreens and ½ height for deciduous trees Collar mounting height not to exceed 8’-0” (2400mm) above grade.

.6 Guying collars to be of sufficient length to encircle trees plus 2” (50mm) space for trunk clearance. Thread guy wire through collar encircling tree trunk and secure to lead wire by clamp or multi-wraps; cut wire ends close to wrap. Spread lead wires equally proportioned about trunk at 120 degrees.

.7 Install anchors at equal intervals about tree and away from trunk so that guy wire will form 45 degree angle with ground. Install anchor at angle to achieve maximum resistance for guy wire.

.8 Attach guy wire to anchors. Tension wire and secure by installing clamps.

.9 Install wire tightener ensuring that guys are secure and leave room for slight movement of tree.

.10 Saw tops off wooden anchors which extend in excess of 4” (100mm) above grade or as directed by Consultant. Trunk Protection: Install trunk protection on trees as indicated. Install trunk protection prior to installation of tree supports when used. Mulching (Cedar and Rubber): Ensure soil settlement has been corrected prior to mulching. Spread mulch as indicated, depth shall be

2” in flower beds and parking islands, and a minimum of 6” for playgrounds. Planting Time:

.1 Plant deciduous plant material during dormant period before buds have broken.

.2 Plant material noted for spring planting only, must be planted in dormant period.

.3 Plant material imported from region with warmer climatic conditions may only be planted in early spring.

.4 When permission has been obtained to plant deciduous plant material after buds have broken, spray plants with anti-desiccant to slow down transpiration prior to transplanting.

.5 Plant evergreens in spring before bud break. Planting of such stock with root balls may start after middle of August. Apply anti-desiccant to evergreen before digging.

.6 When permission has been obtained, trees and shrubs growing in containers may be planted throughout growing season.

.7 Plant only under conditions that are conducive to health and physical conditions of plants.

.8 Provide planting schedule. Extending planting operations over long period using limited crew will not be accepted.


Page 141 of 141

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

33 46 16 – SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE

General: Scope: Provide below grade weeping tile drainage systems in locations as indicated on the drawings.

References:

.1 CAN/CSA-A23.1-M90 Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction

.2 CGSB 41-GP-29Ma Tubing, Plastic, Corrugated, Drainage Submittals:


.2 Product Data: Provide printed literature for each product.

.3 Samples: Provide samples of all fittings and a 1’-0” long sample of the proposed weeping tile and filtartaion sock.

Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling: .1 Handle and store material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and Industrial Health and Safety Regulation

requirements. .2 Materials will be delivered to job in their original packages and containers bearing manufacturer's labels intact and clearly

visible. .3 Store materials off ground in dry, watertight areas, under cover away from direct sunlight. .4 Protect to prevent damage by other trades.

Products: Flexible Perforated Drainage Pipe (Weeping Tile):

.1 Shall be corrugated, 6” (150 mm) nominal inside diameter flexible drain pipe conforming to CGSB 41-GP-29Ma, Type 1 for unperforated and Type 2 for perforated and wrapped with factory installed filter fabric covering, as manufactured by Big-O Inc., Oxford Plastics (1983) Inc., Prinsco Inc. or other approved manufacturer.

.2 Provide perforated pipe sections typical; non-perforated pipe sections as required for collectors. Provide all adapters, fittings, couplings as required.

.3 Provide perforated pipe sections typical; non-perforated pipe sections as required for collectors. Provide all adapters, fittings, couplings as required.

Bedding and Cover Material: granular fill in accordance with the requirements of Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Fill.

Execution: Excavation

.1 Excavate for the work of this section. Pipe Bedding

.1 Lay drainage piping on a 4” (100 mm) thick bedding of granular fill. Spread and compact bedding to ensure proper consolidation (100% SPDD), before laying pipe.

.2 Carefully arrange weepers to bypass obstructions such as footing irregularities.

.3 Ensure drainage piping is at least 6” (150 mm) clear of obstructions and invert is minimum 3’-0” (900 mm) below the underside of floor slab on grade and as indicated on the drawings.

Pipe Laying .1 Lay drainage piping with both rows of holes and coupling slot facing down. .2 Lay perimeter weepers at elevator pit as indicated. .3 Use unperforated pipe to join perimeter weepers to sump pits, and for header runs connecting the underfloor weepers to the

sump pits. .4 Use adapter fittings to join perforated weepers to unperforated pipes. .5 Use standard fittings for corners, bends, elbows, crosses, tees and wyes. .6 Install end plugs at the terminal ends of pipe runs. .7 Protect pipe ends from damage and ingress of foreign material at all times. .8 Generally, lay all weepers sloped to drain to the sump pits, at a slope indicated. Hand excavate sub-grade where necessary to

provide required slopes. Remove any excavated material from the site. .9 The drainage system collector pipes shall drain to the storm line. Refer to the requirements of mechanical and civil drawings

and specifications.